southern conference manual · southern conference manual 2013-14 . 1 ... darcie vincent,...

Southern Conference

Manual

2013-14

1

2013-14 Conference Manual

Table of Contents General Information ............................................................................................................................................. 3 Southern Conference Officers and Staff ................................................................................................................ 5 Southern Conference Coordinators of Officials ..................................................................................................... 6 Administrative Standing Committees ..................................................................................................................... 7 Sport Committees .................................................................................................................................................. 8 Spectator Code of Conduct .................................................................................................................................... 9 Southern Conference Participant Principles ........................................................................................................ 10 Southern Conference Game Management Principles ......................................................................................... 11 Duties of the Southern Conference Staff ............................................................................................................. 12 Waivers ................................................................................................................................................................ 14 Constitution and Bylaws ................................................................................................................................... 15 Constitution .......................................................................................................................................................... 17 Bylaws .................................................................................................................................................................. 20 Administrative Regulations............................................................................................................................... 35 Sport Regulations .............................................................................................................................................. 41 Baseball................................................................................................................................................................ 43 Men’s Basketball .................................................................................................................................................. 55 Women’s Basketball ............................................................................................................................................. 67 Men’s & Women’s Cross Country ........................................................................................................................ 79 Football ................................................................................................................................................................. 87 Men’s Golf ............................................................................................................................................................ 95 Women’s Golf ..................................................................................................................................................... 105 Men’s Soccer ..................................................................................................................................................... 115 Women’s Soccer ................................................................................................................................................ 127 Softball ............................................................................................................................................................... 139 Men’s & Women’s Tennis .................................................................................................................................. 151 Men’s & Women’s Track & Field ........................................................................................................................ 163 Volleyball ............................................................................................................................................................ 175 Wrestling ............................................................................................................................................................ 187 Index .................................................................................................................................................................. 195

3

General Information

________________________________________________________________________

5

The Southern Conference 702 N. Pine St.; Spartanburg, SC 29303 .............................................................. Office Phone (864)591-5100 Administrative FAX (864) 591-4282 ......................................................... Media Relations FAX (864)591-3448 Website .............................................................................................................. http://www.SoConSports.com Southern Conference Officers for 2013-14 President .................................................................................................................................. Maj. Chip Taylor Vice President ............................................................................................................................... Dr. AJ Grube Executive Committee for 2013-14 Dr. Alan Hauser ................................................................................................... Appalachian State University Capt. Chip Taylor ............................................................................................................................ The Citadel Larry Leckonby ............................................................................................................................... The Citadel Dr. Fred Smith ........................................................................................................................ Davidson College Dr. Eric Hall ................................................................................................................................ Elon University Dr. William Pierce ................................................................................................................. Furman University Dr. Gary Clark ....................................................................................................................... Furman University Dr. Chris Geyerman .............................................................................................. Georgia Southern University Dr. David Wyrick ............................................................................ University of North Carolina at Greensboro Jody Smith ..................................................................................... University of North Carolina at Greensboro Dr. Harold Goss ................................................................................................................. Samford University Dr. Debbie Ingram .............................................................................. University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Laura Herron ...................................................................................... University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Dr. A.J. Grube ....................................................................................................... Western Carolina University Dr. Jameica Hill ........................................................................................................................ Wofford College

Conference Staff

Commissioner ...................................................................................................... John Iamarino (Mary Ann) 1036 Woodburn Rd. .............................................................................................. Email: [email protected] Spartanburg, SC 29302 .................................................................................................... Cell: 864-580-3793 Executive Assistant to the Commissioner.................................................................. Laura Hayes (Lewis) 172 Regent Street. .................................................................................................. E-mail: [email protected] Spartanburg, SC 29302 ...................................................................................................... Cell: 864-909-4559 Senior Associate Commissioner ......................................................................................Geoff Cabe (Amy) 553 Clairidge Dr. .......................................................................................................E-mail: [email protected] Boiling Springs, SC 29316 ................................................................................................. Cell: 864-363-5737 Associate Commissioner ............................................................................................ Sue Arakas (Tommy) 19 Colonial Pl. ........................................................................................................ E-mail: [email protected] Asheville, NC 28804 ........................................................................................................... Cell: 864-363-4237 Associate Commissioner, Compliance ........................................................................................ Doug King 282 N. Fairview .......................................................................................................... E-mail: [email protected] Spartanburg, SC 29302 ...................................................................................................... Cell: 864-525-5166 Director of Championships ............................................................................................ Stephanie Cushing 503 Tiffany Lane ................................................................................................. E-mail: [email protected] Taylors, SC 29687 .............................................................................................................. Cell: 239-595-2814 Championships/Compliance Assistant ..................................................................................... Erin O’Shea 134 Elizabeth Sarah Blvd. .......................................................................................E-mail: [email protected] Greer, SC 29650 ................................................................................................................ Cell: 678-787-0632 Assistant Commissioner, Multimedia Services .................................................................... Jamie Severns 600 Keats Dr. #620 ............................................................................................... E-mail: [email protected] Spartanburg, SC 29301 ...................................................................................................... Cell: 864-580-9947

________________________________________________________________________

6

Assistant Director, Multimedia Services ....................................................................... Jordan Gotfredson 637 Elizabeth Sarah Blvd. ................................................................................. E-mail: [email protected] Greer, SC 29650 ................................................................................................................ Cell: 770-403-7272 Assistant Commissioner, Media Relations ............................................................................. Jason Yaman 412 Rosemeade Ct. ............................................................................................... E-mail: [email protected] Spartanburg, SC 29301 ..................................................................................................... Cell: 864-380-1166 Assistant Director, Media Relations ............................................................................................. Phil Perry 400 Heath Lane, Apt. #13 ....................................................................................... E-mail: [email protected] Spartanburg, SC 29301 ..................................................................................................... Cell: 704-974-3340 Media Relations Assistant ........................................................................................................... Sean Jones 404 Aspencreek Circle, Apt. 101 .............................................................................. E-mail: [email protected] Spartanburg, SC 29301 ..................................................................................................... Cell: 423-736-8538

Coordinators of Officials Coordinator of Baseball Officials ........................................................................... Tony Thompson (Delia) 3375 Centerville Hwy., Box 392167 ........................................................................ E-mail: [email protected] Snellville, GA 30039 ............................................................................................................ Cell: 404-317-2955 Coordinator of Men’s Basketball Officials ....................................................................... Mike Wood (Amy) 354 Twin Oaks Drive. ............................................................................ E-mail: [email protected] Spartanburg, SC 29306 ..................................................................................................... Cell:864-360-5401 Coordinator of Women’s Basketball Officials .................................................................... Charlene Curtis 4512 Waybridge Lane ............................................................................................. E-mail: [email protected] Greensboro, NC 27407 ....................................................................................................... Cell: 336-817-7524 Coordinator of Football Officials ............................................................................ Jack Childress (Donna) 109 East Creek Rd. ................................................................................................. E-mail: [email protected] Greenwood, SC 29646 ...................................................................................................... Cell: 864-992-3010 Coordinator of Softball Officials ................................................................................... Mickey Call (Sandy) 2681 Persimmon Loop. ............................................................................................ E-mail: [email protected] The Villages, FL 32162 ...................................................................................................... Cell: 352-425-0520 Coordinator of Volleyball Officials ........................................................................................... Daniel Leake 235 Callaway Circle ............................................................................. E-mail: [email protected] Harrisonburg, VA 22801 ..................................................................................................... Cell: 540-246-6014 Coordinator of Wrestling Officials ........................................................................................... J.R. Johnson E-mail ................................................................................................................................... [email protected] Cell: ............................................................................................................................................. 804-928-3597 Coordinator of Soccer Officials .............................................................................................. Roger Morton 201 Brambleton Court. ................................................................................................. E-mail: [email protected] Winston-Salem, NC 27106................................................................................................. Cell: 336-686-7901

7

2013-14 Southern Conference

Administrative Standing Committees (All committee appointments will be one-year terms)

Audit

AJ Grube, Western Carolina

(Chair)

Larry Leckonby, The Citadel

Jim Murphy, Davidson

Laura Herron, Chattanooga

Lisa Imbragulio, Samford

Sue Arakas, Staff Liaison

Awards

Dave Blank, Elon, (Chair)

Debbie Ingram, Chattanooga

Jody Smith, UNCG

Jason Yaman, Staff Liaison

Committee on Committees

Kelly Simpson, The Citadel

(Chair)

David Wyrick, UNCG

Richard Johnson, Wofford

Gary Clark, Furman

Geoff Cabe, Staff Liaison

Constitution and Bylaws

Revision

Bill Pierce, Furman (Chair)

Jameica Hill, Wofford


Chip Taylor, The Citadel

Randy Eaton, Western Carolina

Michelle Durban, Samford

Doug King, Staff Liaison

Equity and Diversity

Elizabeth Rabb, Wofford (Chair)

Chris Geyerman, Georgia

Southern

Kim Record, UNCG

Faith Shearer, Elon

Kwadjo Steele, UNCG


Finance


(Chair)

David Wyrick, UNCG

Bill Pierce, Furman





Graduate Scholarship


(Chair)

Harold Goss, Samford


Tom Kleinlein, Georgia

Southern

Katy McNay, Davidson

Laura Hayes, Staff Liaison

Investment

Lisa Imbragulio, Samford

(Chair)

Richard Brown, Chattanooga

Robert Edwards, Western

Carolina

Barbie Jefferson, Wofford



Long Range Planning

Andy Westmoreland, Samford

(Chair)

Linda Brady, UNCG



Martin Newton, Samford

David Blackburn, Chattanooga

Elaine Baker, Furman

John Iamarino, Staff Liaison

Meetings

Terri Lewitt, Wofford (Chair)




Men’s and Women’s Officials

Martin Newton, Samford (Chair)

Kim Record, UNCG



Jody Smith, UNCG


Nominations

Chip Taylor, The Citadel (Chair)

Bill Pierce, Furman

Gary Clark, Furman (ex-officio)

Laura Herron, Chattanooga(ex-

officio)

Doug King, Staff Liaison

Resolutions

Jameica Hill, WOF (Chair)



Sports Medicine


(Chair)

David Wyrick, UNCG


Elaine Baker,Furman

Todd Bullard, Chattanooga


Television

Kim Record, UNCG (Chair)



Stacey Miller, Western Carolina


8

2013-14 Southern Conference

Sport Committees (All committee appointments will be one-year terms)

Baseball


(Chair)

Tom Kleinlein, Georgia Southern


David Wyrick, UNCG


Mark Line, Wofford

Casey Dunn, Samford Geoff Cabe, Staff Liaison Men’s Basketball


(Chair)


Bill Pierce, Furman

Alan Hauser, Appalachian State


Larry Hunter, Western Carolina

Wes Miller, UNCG Geoff Cabe, Staff Liaison Women’s Basketball

Faith Shearer, Elon (Chair)





Darcie Vincent, Appalachian

State

Karen Middleton, Western

Carolina Sue Arakas, Staff Liaison

Cross Country


(Chair)

Bill Pierce, Furman



Jen Straub, Davidson

Bill Gautier, Chattanooga Stephanie Cushing, Staff Liaison

Football

Charlie Cobb, Appalachian State

(Chair)


Southern


Mike Ayers, Wofford Geoff Cabe, Staff Liaison Men’s Golf


(Chair)


Southern

Terri Lewitt, Wofford

Elizabeth Rabb, Wofford

Woodie Eubanks, Samford Stephanie Cushing, Staff Liaison Women’s Golf

Kim Record, UNCG (Chair)


Stacey Miller, Western Carolina

Chris Colvin, Furman

Colette Murray, UTC Stephanie Cushing, Staff Liaison Men’s Soccer

Jim Murphy, Davidson (Chair)

Eric Hall, Elon

Jody Smith, UNCG

Ralph Polson, Wofford Stephanie Cushing, Staff Liaison Women’s Soccer


(Chair)

Debbie Richardson, Appalachian

State

David Wyrick, UNCG

Andrew Burr, Furman Stephanie Cushing, Staff Liaison

Softball

Elaine Baker, Furman (Chair)

Alan Hauser, Appalachian State

Kim Record, UNCG


Jim Clift, Western Carolina Sue Arakas, Staff Liaison Tennis

Cathy Beene, Georgia Southern

(Chair)

Dave Blank, Elon


Jeff Clark, Chattanooga

Thomas Mozur, UNCG Stephanie Cushing, Staff Liaison Track and Field


(Chair)


Bill Pierce, Furman

Cathy Beene, Georgia Southern

Faith Shearer, Elon

John Weaver, Appalachian State

Jody Huddleston, The Citadel Stephanie Cushing, Staff Liaison

Volleyball

Michelle Durban, Samford

(Chair)


Gary Clark, Furman

Mary Tendler, Elon

Sue Arakas, Staff Liaison Wrestling

Matt Pope, Chattanooga (Chair)

Fred Smith, Davidson

Donny White, VMI


Bob Patnesky, Davidson Stephanie Cushing, Staff Liaison

9

Southern Conference

Spectator Code of Conduct

1. Spectators are an important part of the contest and help create an environment that fosters healthy competition. However, attending a college sporting event is a privilege and not a right.

2. Spectators shall at all times conform to accepted standards of good sportsmanship and behavior. 3. All spectator comments and behavior shall reflect respect for opposing participants, coaches and game

officials. Without them there would be no game. 4. Spectators shall heed and obey all directives from game management personnel, event staff and police. 5. Any spectator interfering with play in any way shall be subject to immediate ejection from the site of the

contest. 6. Spectators shall be subject to ejection for behavior that is disruptive, unruly or abusive. This includes foul

language and any verbal or physical harassment of other spectators, especially fans of the opposing team. 7. Spectators who witness, or are harassed by intimidating behavior or comments by other spectators are

urged to report these occurrences immediately to game management personnel. 8. Physical retaliation, regardless of the actions or comments of other spectators, is never permitted and is

subject to immediate ejection and a possible ban from attendance future SoCon contests. 9. A spectator’s behavior reflects on the team he or she supports. Let others see that you’re a fan of a first-

class program. 10. Enjoy the game, have passion for the game, but remember – it’s only a game. Keep your wits, and your

personal integrity, about you.

10

Southern Conference Participant Principles 1. Participants in intercollegiate athletics should display proper respect and courtesy, and maintain civility

toward opposing coaches and student-athletes, game officials and spectators at all contests. 2. Coaches bear the responsibility of teaching the value of sporting conduct in both word and deed to their

student-athletes. The use of foul or vulgar language is inconsistent with this responsibility, and is therefore strongly discouraged on the part of coaches and student-athletes alike.

3. There is no place in intercollegiate athletics for taunting, embarrassing or humiliating an opponent or game

official. Student-athletes who do so should be disciplined by their head coach in a timely manner. Coaches who do so should be disciplined by their administration in a timely manner.

4. Representatives of SoCon member institutions shall refrain from making any public criticism of other

member institutions, their personnel, the conference in general and its office staff, or any game officials. 5. Coaches and administrators shall make every effort to promote the conference and its member institutions

in a positive manner. 6. Coaches and student-athletes should exercise self-control with game officials during competition and shall

refrain from approaching officials at the end of a period or at the end of a contest to address them in a disrespectful manner, complain about an officiating call, or express their displeasure with the officials.

7. Coaches and student-athletes must understand that competing in intercollegiate athletics is a privilege, not

a right. Their behavior and attitude toward opponents, game officials and members of the media should reflect positively upon the institution they represent.

8. Institutional administrators are responsible for insuring that all parties involved in intercollegiate athletics -

including student-athletes, coaches, trainers, managers, band members, cheerleaders and mascots - are informed of the acceptable behavior that is expected of them and are aware of the consequences when failing to abide by the acceptable code of conduct.

9. Coaches and student-athletes should be encouraged to live up to their own highest personal standard of

sportsmanship, even when their opponents may not. Personal accountability and respect for one's own standards must come first.

10. The responsibility to demonstrate and develop good character and sportsmanship should never be

subordinated to the desire to win.

11

Southern Conference Game Management Principles 1. The purpose of having sound game management procedures in place is to insure the competition, safety

and enjoyment of a SoCon athletic event for all participants and spectators alike. 2. All home SoCon contests must have an administrator from the host institution present at the start of the

contest. If possible, the administrator should remain throughout the contest, monitoring all game management issues. Should the administrator be called away from the site by other responsibilities, he/she must remain available via phone if circumstances warrant consultation.

3. The host institution is responsible for providing a proper and appropriate level of security for all SoCon

contests. All on-site administrators should have immediate access to a phone in the event of a crowd control or medical emergency requiring additional assistance.

4. The primary game management administrator must introduce himself/herself to the opposing team's head

coach and game officials prior to the start of the contest to let those parties know they are available to assist with any crowd control or game management issues.

5. The host institution is responsible for giving the visiting team the same fair chance to compete that the host

wants when it becomes a visitor. This includes insuring the security of the visiting team bench area and dressing room.

6. The host institution is ultimately responsible for controlling the behavior of its support groups and spectators.

Incidents of physical abuse, repeated verbal abuse, throwing items at opposing teams or onto the playing field or court must not be tolerated. The host institution's security force should eject those committing these violations.

7. The SoCon’s sportsmanship announcement should be read twice per contest - at the beginning of the

contest and midway through the contest. Additionally, an announcement should be made informing spectators of the proper procedure to register complaints or concerns they may have regarding the behavior of other spectators. The host institution is responsible for addressing any such reported concerns in an appropriate and timely manner.

8. The host institution is responsible for providing adequate security for all participants and game officials

entering and leaving the area of play. Both team and officials' dressing rooms should be private and secure. 9. The host institution must not permit organized groups of students from sitting directly behind the visiting

team bench to harass, intimidate or otherwise verbally or physically abuse visiting team personnel. Students who are more intent on verbally abusing the opponents rather than cheering for their own team should not be encouraged by SoCon administrations.

10. Coaches and administrators critical of game management practices at another member institution must have

the courtesy and fortitude to contact the administration of the other institution and express their concerns as soon as practical after the contest is concluded. Critical comments made to the conference office should be made only after contact has first been made with the other administration.

12

2013-14

Duties of the Southern Conference Staff

John Iamarino, Commissioner:

Responsible for directing the activities of the Conference and has the authority, duties, and responsibilities assigned by the Council of Presidents and by the Executive Committee of the conference.

Geoff Cabe, Senior Associate Commissioner: This position is the primary liaison to the Athletic Directors and head coaches of most team sports. Chief

responsibilities include the scheduling of both regular-season and televised contests, coordinating and creating agendas for league meetings, coordinating special events, and promotion and operation of the Conference’s basketball championship tournaments. The Senior Associate Commissioner also supervises both championship and merchandising efforts.

Sue Arakas, Associate Commissioner:

This position is responsible for oversight management of the conference’s financial resources and office operations. In addition, this position is the highest-ranking female administrator involved with the conduct of the conference’s programs of particular interest to women’s athletics and student-athlete welfare.

Doug King, Associate Commissioner for Compliance:

This position is responsible for managing the Southern Conference members’ compliance with league bylaws, policies and procedures. In addition, this position is responsible for assisting the members with their compliance with NCAA rules, regulations, policies and procedures.

Jason Yaman, Assistant Commissioner for Media Relations:

This position is responsible for managing Southern Conference publications, graphics, media and public relations and league statistics. In addition, this position manages the content of the league Internet website, and radio and television interests.

Jamie Severns, Assistant Commissioner for Multimedia Services:

This position is directly responsible for coordination of all Southern Conference Internet, video streaming, television, radio and special media content. An important function of this position is serving as a liaison and support person for institutional efforts to improve and upgrade their website and video-streaming capabilities.

Stephanie Cushing, Director of Championships:

This position is directly responsible for coordination of all Southern Conference championship tournaments. The exceptions are men’s and women’s basketball, which are the primary responsibility of the Senior Associate Commissioner with support from this position. Additionally, this position will have significant responsibilities in the Conference’s merchandising efforts.

Laura Hayes, Executive Assistant to the Commissioner:

This position is responsible for providing the necessary support to ensure the effective and efficient operation of the Commissioner’s office as well as managing the telephone switchboard. This position will also assist in managing the conference’s daily business operations.

Phil Perry, Assistant Director for Media Relations:

This position is responsible for assisting the Assistant Commissioner for Media Relations with various tasks, including but not limited to, publications, graphics, league statistics, media and public relations. In addition, this position will assist with the content of the league Internet website, and video-streaming efforts.

Sean Jones, Media Relations Assistant:

This position is responsible for assisting the Assistant Commissioner for Media Relations with various tasks, including but not limited to, publications, graphics, league statistics, media and public relations. In addition, this position will assist with the management of the league Internet website.

13

Jordan Gotfredson, Assistant Director for Multimedia Services: This position is directly responsible for assisting the Assistant Commissioner for Multimedia Services with the coordination of all Southern Conference Internet, video streaming, television, radio and special media content. This internship also will include occasional projects that expose the individual to activities in the television and media relations areas.

Erin O’Shea, Championships/Compliance Assistant: This position is primarily responsible for assisting with the effective and efficient management of Conference championships and merchandising, while providing support in other areas of operations, including marketing and compliance. This internship also will include occasional projects that expose the individual to activities in the television and media relations areas.

14

Waivers

Institution Waiver Rationale The Citadel Waiver of Bylaw

Article Six, Section 1, Paragraph A

Since The Citadel continues to make a good faith effort in achieving gender equity, The Citadel will be granted an exception to Article Six, Section 1, paragraph A, with an annual review thereafter.

Davidson College Waiver of Bylaw Article Six, Section 1, Paragraph A

Since Davidson College does not participate in football in the Southern Conference, a waiver of the Southern Conference sports requirement was granted.

University of North Carolina at Greensboro

Waiver of Bylaw Article Six, Section 1, Paragraph A

Since the University of North Carolina at Greensboro does not sponsor football, a waiver of the Southern Conference sports requirement was granted.

15

Constitution & Bylaws

17

Preamble Believing that well-managed intercollegiate athletic competition is an important component of higher education and therefore should be governed by faculty and administrative direction and control, we do associate ourselves for the purpose of providing a regular and orderly means of competition between the teams of student-athletes in our respective academic institutions.

Constitution

Article One Name

The name of this association shall be The Southern Conference, hereinafter referred to as the Conference.

Article Two Mission Statement

It is the purpose of the Conference to:

•Facilitate intercollegiate athletics competition for both men and women; •Promote a proper balance between academics and athletics; •Foster integrity and excellence in both athletics and academics; •Foster competitive amateur opportunities of a high quality for student-athletes in a broad spectrum of sports and championships; •Promote an atmosphere of respect and sensitivity for the dignity of every person; •Refrain from discrimination with respect to governance policies, educational programs, activities, and employment policies; •Expect fair play and sportsmanship from all member institutions and their representatives to maximize the benefits received from athletics; •Sustain intercollegiate athletics in the proper perspective while respecting the autonomy and character of each member institution; •Anticipate and plan for the future needs of intercollegiate athletics in a spirit of cooperation and mutual benefit of the member institutions; •Enhance the Conference enterprise and the visibility of the Conference and member institutions; and •Comply with principles of responsible fiscal management of athletics by, of and for the Conference and the member institutions.

Article Three Governance

Section 1. The Conference shall be governed by its Constitution, Bylaws, Administrative Regulations, and Sports

Regulations. In the event of a conflict, the Constitution shall prevail. Section 2. The Conference shall be a Division I member of the National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA). Member

institutions are bound by NCAA rules and regulations except where Conference rules are more restrictive.

Article Four Principles of Conduct

Section 1. Institutional Control. It is the responsibility of each member institution to control its intercollegiate athletics

program, and to operate it in compliance with the rules and regulations of the Conference and the NCAA. Section 2. Ethical Conduct. It is a privilege for students to participate in intercollegiate athletics. Intercollegiate athletics is

designed, in part, to promote the character development of participants, student-athletes, coaches, and all others associated with these athletics programs. Events should adhere to such fundamental values as respect, fairness, sportsmanship, civility, honesty, and accountability. These values should be manifest not only in athletics participation but also in the broad spectrum of activities affecting the athletics program. In addition, it is the responsibility of each institution to:

A. Establish policies for sportsmanship and ethical conduct in intercollegiate athletics consistent with the

educational mission and goals of the institution; and B. Educate, on a continuing basis, all constituencies about policies.

18

Article Five Membership

Section 1. Present Members. The Conference is composed of the following institutions for the current academic year:

Appalachian State University Samford University The Citadel University of North Carolina at Greensboro Davidson College University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Elon University Western Carolina University Furman University Wofford College Georgia Southern University

Section 2. New Members. Membership may be granted to an applying institution by invitation of the Conference at any

meeting. A vote of two-thirds of the full Executive Committee shall be required to accept a new member. Section 3. Suspension or Expulsion of Members. All rights and privileges of a member shall cease immediately upon

suspension or expulsion. A vote of two-thirds of the Conference members shall be required to suspend or expel a member.

Section 4. Membership Obligations.

A. Each Conference member must maintain a sports program at the NCAA Division I level. B. A Conference member may not hold membership in another conference. However, a Conference member may

compete in another conference in a particular sport provided the Southern Conference does not sponsor a championship in that sport.

C. A waiver to a specific provision of Article Six of the Bylaws may be granted by a vote of three-fourths of the full Executive Committee.

D. Each Conference member must meet its financial obligations to the Conference in a timely manner.

Article Six Organization

Section 1. Governing Body. The Conference shall be governed by the Executive Committee, with oversight by the

Council of Presidents. The voting representative of each member institution in the Executive Committee shall be the Faculty Athletics Representative.

Section 2. Officers. The officers of the Conference shall be a President, and a Vice President. The President and Vice

President shall be Faculty Athletics Representatives of member institutions. Section 3. Committees. The Bylaws shall provide for such standing committees as the Conference may consider

necessary. Membership on a standing committee may not exceed two consecutive three-year terms. Section 4. Commissioner.

A. The chief administrator of the Conference shall be the Commissioner. The election, powers and responsibilities of the Commissioner shall be provided in the Bylaws.

B. The Council of Presidents shall have ultimate responsibility for the employment of the Commissioner. All terms of the Commissioner’s contract shall be set by the Council of Presidents. A vote of two-thirds of the full Council of Presidents shall be required to elect or remove a Commissioner.

C. A vote of two-thirds of the full Executive Committee shall be required to overrule any interpretation or action by the Commissioner. An appeal of such a matter to the Executive Committee must take place in writing within 7 days of the written action or the interpretation by the Commissioner, and the President of the Conference shall ensure that the appeal is heard by the Executive Committee in a timely manner.

Article Seven

Legislative Process Section 1. Meetings.

A. Regular Meetings. The Conference shall have two regular meetings each year. In extenuating circumstances (economic uncertainty, national emergency, etc.) the Executive Committee may approve the suspension of one of the two meetings.

B. Special Meetings. The Conference may have special meetings on the call of the President, or by written request of two-thirds of the full Executive Committee. The purpose for the called meeting will be communicated to all member institutions. The sites for special meetings shall be selected by the President.

19

C. Quorum. To constitute a quorum for the transaction of business at a regular or special meeting of the Conference, two-thirds of the voting members of the full Executive Committee must be present at the meeting.

D. Procedures. The parliamentary procedures of the Conference shall be governed by Roberts’ Rules of Order, as revised. The Conference may adopt special rules of order consistent with the Constitution and Bylaws.

Section 2. Amendments.

A. The Constitution may be amended at any regular or special Conference meeting by a vote of two-thirds of the full Executive Committee.

B. Submission of Amendment. Any member institution may propose an amendment by submitting it in writing to the Commissioner not less than forty-five days prior to the next conference meeting. The Commissioner will forward the proposed amendment to the Constitution and Bylaws Revision Committee, which will review the amendment and add any comments or suggestions it deems necessary, and return such to the Commissioner in a timely manner.

C. The Commissioner shall mail (via regular mail or electronic mail) a copy of proposed amendments to the Chief Executive Officer, Faculty Athletics Representative, Athletics Director, and Senior Woman Administrator of each member institution not less than twenty-five days prior to the next conference meeting.

D. Unless otherwise specified, all approved amendments shall become effective on the first day of August following adoption of the amendment.

Section 3. Amendments to Constitutional Amendments. A proposed amendment to the Constitution may be amended at

a regular or special Conference meeting by a majority of the full Executive Committee.

Article Eight

Constitution Effective Date This Constitution of The Southern Conference was adopted by the Executive Committee, revised July 1974, May 1990, and May 1999.

20

Bylaws

Article One Governance

Section 1. Council of Presidents.

A. Composition. 1. There shall be a Council of Presidents composed of the Chief Executive Officers of the member institutions.

The officers of the Council of Presidents shall be a Chair and a Vice-Chair. 2. For transaction of business, a quorum shall consist of two-thirds of the members of the Council of Presidents. 3. The officers shall be elected at the annual spring Conference meeting by a majority vote of Council members in

attendance. The officers shall hold office for one year or until successors are elected. Normally, the chair of the Council of Presidents will not be from the same institution as the President of the Conference.

B. Powers and Duties. 1. Each member of the Council of Presidents shall be charged with the responsibility for realizing the Conference

Purpose and enforcing the Principles of Conduct specified in the Constitution. Members will ensure that Conference rules and regulations are enforced at their institutions.

2. A vote of two-thirds of the full Council of Presidents may alter any actions taken by the Executive Committee. 3. The Council may act individually or collectively in proposing amendments to the Constitution and Bylaws

through the Executive Committee. 4. The Chief Executive Officer of each institution is expected to attend Council meetings. Generally, unless

exceptional circumstances warrant, only the Chief Executive Officer may attend a Council meeting. The request for a designee to attend a Council meeting must be sent to the Commissioner for consideration.

5. The President, chair of the Finance Committee, and Commissioner of the Conference shall make an annual report to the Council at the Spring Meeting.

6. The Council of Presidents shall have ultimate responsibility for the employment of the Commissioner. All terms of the Commissioner’s contract shall be set by the Council of Presidents. A two-thirds vote of the full Council of Presidents shall be required to elect or remove a Commissioner.

7. The Council of Presidents shall review an annual evaluation of the Commissioner, conducted with input from constituent groups.

C. Time/Site of Meetings. 1. The Council of Presidents shall meet in conjunction with Conference meetings unless otherwise designated by

the Chair of the Council. The Chair of the Council shall be responsible for establishing specific dates, setting agendas, making appropriate arrangements, and presiding at Conference meetings. In the absence of the Chair, these duties shall be performed by the Vice-Chair.

2. Special meetings may be called at any time by the Chair or by a majority of members of the Council. 3. Approved minutes of the Council of Presidents will be distributed to the Executive Committee, and the

Commissioner of the Conference. Section 2. Executive Committee.

A. Composition. 1. There shall be an Executive Committee composed of the Faculty Athletics Representatives of all Conference

members. The Executive Committee shall have an elected President and Vice President who will serve as President and Vice President of the Conference. The President and Vice President shall be Faculty Athletics Representatives. The chair and one other designee of the Athletics Directors Association, and the chair and one other designee of the Senior Woman Administrators Association shall be non-voting members of the Executive Committee.

2. For the transaction of business, a quorum shall consist of two-thirds of the voting members of the Executive Committee.

3. When a Faculty Athletics Representative cannot cast an institutional vote, the Chief Executive Officer shall designate a qualified substitute who shall be empowered to vote for the institution. Such designations shall be in writing to the Commissioner.

B. Powers and Duties. 1. The Executive Committee may empower the Conference officers to perform specific tasks. 2. The Executive Committee shall manage affairs of the Conference in accordance with the Constitution and

Bylaws. 3. The Executive Committee shall establish procedures for the Commissioner’s office as from time to time they

may be deemed appropriate. 4. The Executive Committee shall hear appeals from members who disagree with rulings or imposition of

penalties by the Commissioner. On such appeals a two-thirds vote of the full Executive Committee shall be required to overrule any interpretation or action of the Commissioner. An appeal to the Executive Committee of a ruling or imposition of penalty by the Commissioner must take place in writing within 7 days of the written action by the Commissioner and the President of the Conference shall ensure that the appeal is heard by the Executive Committee in a timely manner.

21

5. The Executive Committee shall review and approve, return to the appropriate committee or to the Athletics Directors Association for reconsideration or, at its option, alter or deny, all actions taken by each Conference committee and by the Athletics Directors Association.

6. The Executive Committee shall review issues pertaining to academics and student-athlete welfare. 7. The Executive Committee shall conduct the eligibility petition approval process. 8. The Executive Committee shall assist the Conference office staff with the preparation of Conference and NCAA

legislation. Each adopted recommendation shall be reported to the Council of Presidents and the Executive Committee.

9. The Executive Committee shall fill all Southern Conference vacancies on the NCAA Division I Management Council and on all Division I cabinets. When a vacancy on the Management Council or on one of the cabinets is upcoming, the President of the Conference will invite all institutions and individuals in the Conference to submit nominations for the vacancy or vacancies to the Executive Committee by a specific date for its consideration. At the annual fall or spring meeting prior to the opening of a position on the Management Council or on a cabinet, the Executive Committee shall then select the individual to fill the vacancy from the list of submitted nominees. If a vacancy occurs prior to a scheduled opening on a cabinet or on the Management Council, the Executive Committee officers shall be notified immediately of the opening and the President of the Conference shall solicit nominations in a timely manner to fill the vacancy. The Executive Committee will fill the vacancy prior to the next meeting of the Management Council or of the cabinet tin question.

10. Each member institution’s Faculty Athletics Representative is expected to attend Executive Committee meetings.

C. Time/Site of Meetings. The Executive Committee may meet prior to Conference meetings or at such time as the President may direct.

Section 3. Conference Meetings.

A. Regular Meetings. 1. Normally, the two regular Conference meetings each year shall be held in the fall and in the spring. Alternative

dates for these meetings may be set by the Executive Committee no later than the last day of the preceding February for the Fall Meeting and no later than the last day of the preceding May for the Spring Meeting. Committee meetings may be held prior to the Conference meeting.

2. All Conference meetings shall be held in executive session unless the Executive Committee decides otherwise. Those present in an executive session would be the Chief Executive Officers, Faculty Athletics Representatives, Athletics Directors, and Senior Woman Administrators.

3. When exceptional circumstances warrant, the Chief Executive Officer may designate, in writing to the Conference Commissioner, an individual to represent the Faculty Athletics Representative at the Conference meeting.

4. Members of the Conference shall be entitled to one vote each. B. Combined Meetings. A combined meeting would consist of Chief Executive Officers, Faculty Athletics

Representatives, Athletics Directors, and Senior Woman Administrators. C. Special Meetings. Special meetings may be called at any time by the chair of the Council of Presidents, the

President of the Conference, or by a majority of the members of either the Council of Presidents or the Executive Committee.

Section 4. Order of Business. The suggested order of business for regular meetings is as follows:

A. Consideration of minutes of the preceding meeting B. Announcements of appointments of members to the Nominating Committee (Spring) C. Reports of the President, Commissioner and Standing and Special committees D. Consideration of proposed amendments E. Old business F. New business G. Appointment of special committees H. Report of Finance and Audit Committees (Fall-Audit/Spring-Budget) I. Report of Nominating Committee (Spring) J. Election of officers (Spring) K. Adjournment

Section 5. Conference Officers.

A. Officers of the Conference. Officers of the Conference shall be elected by ballot to two-year terms at the Spring Meeting, without regard to rotation among members. Term of office shall commence at the conclusion of the Spring Meeting. The Executive Committee shall have an elected President and Vice President who will serve as President and Vice President of the Conference. A vacancy shall be filled for the duration of the term by a majority vote of all voting members of the Executive Committee.

B. Powers and Duties. 1. President

a. The President shall preside at all meetings of the Conference and the Executive Committee. b. The President shall appoint the chair of all committees. The President shall charge each committee with its

responsibilities at the time of appointment. The charge should be reflected in the minutes of the first meeting.

22

c. The President shall serve as an ex-officio member of all standing committees. 2. Vice-President

a. The Vice-President shall perform the duties of the President in the latter’s absence or disability. b. The Vice-President shall serve in the capacity of Parliamentarian. c. The Vice-President shall serve as Chair of the standing Finance Committee, and shall present for approval

an overall conference budget for the subsequent year at the spring meeting. d. The Vice-President shall serve as Chair of the standing Audit Committee and shall submit at the Fall

Meeting an audit statement of all receipts and disbursements of Conference funds. e. The Vice-President shall be a member of the investment committee.

Section 6. Meeting minutes.

A. Minutes of all Conference meetings shall be disseminated in a timely manner both in hard copy form and electronically.

B. The chairs of all other committees are responsible for the placement of meeting minutes on the Southern Conference web page.

Article Two

Organization Section 1. Standing Committees. Standing committees shall be provided as the Conference may consider necessary.

The President shall appoint all committee members. The tenure of any committee member may not exceed six consecutive years. Standing committee members shall serve for three-year terms, effective July 1. A. Administrative Committees. The membership of each committee shall include at least one Faculty Athletics

Representative and one athletics administrator. All administrative committees shall report to the Executive Committee. 1. The following are standing administrative committees:

Audit: Has oversight responsibility of all financial audit matters associated with the Conference’s fiscal year end and is required to present an annual audit for approval by the Conference. This committee is chaired by the Conference Vice President.

Awards: Has responsibility for all aspects of the Conference’s awards programs. Committee on Committees: Serves as a recommendation group to the Conference President for the

appointment of conference members to all standing and sport committees. Constitution and Bylaws Revision: Has the responsibility to monitor the Constitution and Bylaws, to recommend

changes as needed, and to ensure Conference compliance with the Constitution and Bylaws. Equity and Diversity: Shall address all issues associated with the advancement of women and minorities within

the Conference and within intercollegiate athletics. Finance: Has oversight responsibility of all fiscal matters associated with the operation of the Conference and

is required to present an annual budget for approval by the Conference. This committee is chaired by the Conference Vice President.

Graduate Scholarship: Has responsibility for all activities associated with the Conference’s Graduate Scholarship Recognition Program.

Investment: At the direction of the Council of Presidents, the Investment Committee serves to monitor and maintain the management of the conference’s investment portfolio.

Long Range Planning: As requested by the Conference, shall recommend to the membership plans or strategies that shall indicate the direction of the Conference.

Meetings: Shall ensure that meetings are conducted in appropriate venues and planned in ways that meet the membership’s needs and provide the best atmosphere to conduct Conference business.

Men’s and Women’s Officials: Is responsible for the evaluation and financial matters of the Conference’s officiating programs.

Nominating: Prepares slate of candidates for election of Conference officers. Resolutions: Recommends to the Conference formal statements worded to thank, recognize or honor

individuals groups or institutions on appropriate occasions. Sports Medicine: Has oversight responsibility for the medical welfare of the student-athlete and shall work

closely with the Conference’s athletic trainers association. Television: Shall be responsible for consideration of television and digital relationships with various networks

and broadcast entities. 2. Powers and Duties

a. The President of the Conference is responsible for appointing the members and the chair and vice chair of each administrative committee. The committee is responsible for fulfilling its charge. A list of all committee charges is included in an appendix in the back of the Manual.

b. In lieu of Conference office representation, the Chair will appoint a secretary who will furnish minutes of all meetings to the Commissioner in a timely manner.

3. Time/Site of Meetings. All administrative committees shall meet at least annually, either in person or via conference call.

23

4. Committee Chair Responsibilities. Committee chairs are responsible for establishing specific dates, setting an agenda, making appropriate arrangements and presiding at the committee meeting. In the absence of the Chair, these duties shall be performed by the Vice-Chair. It is the responsibility of the chair to report all recommendations to the Executive Committee.

B. Sports Committees. Each Conference sport shall be represented by a sports committee. The membership of each committee shall include at least one Faculty Athletics Representative, one Athletics Director and one Senior Woman Administrator.

1. The following are the standing sports committees:

Baseball Men’s Basketball Women’s Soccer Women’s Basketball Softball Cross Country Track & Field Football Men’s Tennis Men’s Golf Women’s Tennis Women’s Golf Volleyball Men’s Soccer Wrestling

2. Powers and Duties.

a. Each committee shall be responsible for the welfare of the sport it represents. b. The sports committees shall manage all championships within the rules and regulations of the Conference. c. Each committee shall annually review the Sports Policies and Regulations with its respective head

coaches group and make recommendations to the Athletic Directors Association, and through them, to the Executive Committee.

d. The chair of each committee shall be an athletics administrator (athletics director, senior woman administrator, associate/assistant athletic director, etc.), and shall be appointed by the President of the Conference. In lieu of a Conference office staff liaison, the chair of each committee shall appoint a secretary who will furnish a copy of the minutes of all meetings to the Commissioner.

3. Time/Site of Meetings. Each committee will meet annually either in person or via conference call to discuss matters of relevance concerning that sport.

4. Committee Chair Responsibilities. Committee chairs are responsible for establishing specific dates, setting an agenda, making appropriate arrangements and presiding at the committee meeting. The Chair is responsible for reporting recommendations to the Athletics Directors Association.

C. Special Committees. Special committees may be appointed by the President at the President’s discretion. These committees will report to the President.

Section 2. Associations. When appropriate for a specific purpose, Associations, other than those noted below, may be

formed to perform specific duties as approved by the Executive Committee. A. Athletics Directors Association.

1. Composition. a. There shall be an association composed of the Athletics Directors of member institutions. A chair and vice

chair shall be elected. b. For the transaction of business, a quorum shall consist of two-thirds of the members of the Association.

2. Powers and Duties. a. The Association shall review reports from all Athletics Administrator Associations. These associations may

develop and forward recommendations to the Athletics Directors Association, which will review and support, return to the appropriate association for reconsideration, or, at its option, alter or deny recommendations made by an association. The Athletics Directors Association shall seek approval by the Executive Committee of those items it supports.

b. The Association shall review the report of each sports committee and support it, return it to the appropriate committee for reconsideration, or, at its option, alter or deny specific recommendations made by a sports committee. The Athletics Directors Association shall seek approval by the Executive Committee of those items it supports.

c. The Association shall be responsible for recommending amendments to the Sports Policy and Regulations of all sports, and referring them to the Executive Committee for action.

d. The Association may recommend Administrative Regulations which cannot be in conflict with the Constitution and Bylaws and may be appealed for reconsideration at the next association meeting. These administrative regulations will be referred to the Executive Committee for action.

e. In lieu of a Conference office staff liaison, the Association vice chair shall keep minutes of a meeting and furnish a copy to the Commissioner.

3. Time/Site of Meetings. The Association may meet prior to regular or special meetings of the Conference or at the call of the Association chair.

4. Association Chair Responsibilities. The Association chair is responsible for establishing specific dates, setting an agenda, making appropriate arrangements, and presiding at the Association’s meetings. In the absence of the chair, these duties shall be performed by the vice chair. It is the responsibility of the chair to report recommendations to the Executive Committee.

24

5. Each institution’s Athletics Director is expected to attend Association meetings. When exceptional circumstances warrant, the athletics director may designate, in writing to the Association chair, an individual to represent the athletics director at the Association meeting.

B. Senior Woman Administrators Association. 1. Composition.

a. There shall be an association composed of the Senior Woman Administrators from each member institution that sponsors women’s athletics. A chair and vice chair shall be elected.

b. For the transaction of business, a quorum shall consist of two-thirds of the members of the Association. 2. Powers and Duties.

a. The Association shall review all sports committee reports (with the exception of men’s basketball and football) and make recommendations to the Athletics Directors Association.

b. In lieu of a Conference office staff liaison, the Association vice chair shall keep minutes of all meetings and forward a copy to each Athletics Director, and the Commissioner.

3. Time/Site of Meetings. The Association may meet prior to the Fall and Spring Meetings of the Conference and at other times at the call of the Association chair.

4. Association Chair Responsibilities. The Association chair is responsible for establishing specific dates, setting an agenda, making appropriate arrangements, and presiding at the Association’s meetings. In the absence of the chair, these duties shall be performed by the vice chair.

5. Each institution’s Senior Woman Administrator is expected to attend Association meetings. When exceptional circumstances warrant, the senior woman administrator may designate, in writing to the Association chair, an individual to represent the senior woman administrator at the Association meeting.

6. It is the responsibility of the chair to report on the actions of the Association to the Athletics Directors Association, and to the Executive Committee through the Senior Woman Administrators representatives on the Executive Committee.

C. Coaches Associations. 1. Composition.

a. Each Conference sport in which the Conference offers a championship may be represented by a coaches association consisting of the head coaches of the sport at each participating member institution.

b. For the transaction of business, a quorum shall consist of two-thirds of the members of the association. 2. Powers and Duties.

a. Each Coaches Association shall make recommendations to that Sport Committee regarding the enhancement of their respective sport.

b. Each Association will elect a chair and vice chair who, in lieu of a Conference office staff liaison, will furnish a copy of the minutes of all meetings to each Athletics Director, Senior Woman Administrator, and the Commissioner.

3. Time/Site of Meetings. Each Association will meet annually either in person or via conference call to discuss matters of relevance in that sport.

4. Association Chair Responsibilities. Association chairs are responsible for establishing specific dates, setting an agenda, making appropriate arrangements and presiding at the Conference coaches meeting. In the absence of the Chair, these duties shall be performed by the vice chair. It is the responsibility of the chair to report recommendations to the appropriate Sports Committee.

5. Each institution’s coach is expected to attend Association meetings in that coach’s sport. When exceptional circumstances warrant, the coach may designate, in writing to the Association chair, an individual to represent the coach at the Association meeting.

D. Student-Athlete Association. 1. Composition.

a. There shall be an Association composed of two student-athletes, one male and one female, from each member institution. A chair and vice chair shall be elected from within the Association.

b. There shall be a member of the Faculty Athletics Representative’s Association. c. There shall be a member from the Athletics Directors Association. d. There shall be a member from the Senior Woman Administrators Association. e. For the transaction of business, a quorum shall consist of two-thirds of the student-athlete membership. f. The Conference staff liaison will coordinate all committee activities.

2. Powers and Duties. a. The Association will provide insight regarding the student-athlete experience focusing on welfare issues

and providing input on the rules, regulations, and policies that affect student-athletes’ lives on member institution campuses.

b. The Association shall provide information and make recommendations to the Executive Committee and serve in an advisory capacity to the Athletics Directors Association.

3. Time/Site of Meetings. a. The Association may meet annually at the Student-Athlete Leadership Institute and via conference call as

needed during the academic year.

25

Article Three Administration

Section 1. Commissioner. The Commissioner shall direct the activities of the Conference office and shall have the

authority, duties and responsibilities as assigned by the Executive Committee. In the absence of specific direction by the Executive Committee the Commissioner may exercise authority that is in the best interest of the Conference. A. Appointment. The Council of Presidents shall have ultimate responsibility for the selection of the Conference

Commissioner. He or she shall be elected by a vote of at least two-thirds of the full membership of the Council of Presidents.

B. Term of Office. The Commissioner’s contract and its terms shall be approved by the Council of Presidents. C. Powers and Duties. The Commissioner shall:

1. Conduct and supervise all activities of the Conference in the manner and to the extent deemed reasonable and essential to achieve the purposes of the Conference;

2. Interpret and enforce the rules and regulations of the Conference; 3. Direct the activities of the Conference office and staff; 4. Impose penalties in accordance with guidelines suggested by the Executive Committee for adjudged violations

of Conference rules and regulations. A Conference member who disagrees with the Commissioner or an interpretation of a rule or on the imposition of a penalty may appeal to the Commissioner in writing and a hearing of the Executive Committee shall be scheduled. A two-thirds vote of the full Executive Committee shall be required to overrule the Commissioner’s decision;

5. Serve (or have a designee serve) as an ex-officio member of all committees; 6. Publish annually the Conference Manual to be effective August 1st of each year; 7. Maintain and circulate the minutes of all committee meetings as instructed by the President of the Conference. 8. Assemble and distribute material and/or agendas for Conference meetings and special events.

D. Location of the Commissioner’s Office. The Executive Committee shall approve the location of the Commissioner’s office, which shall be located in Conference territory.

Section 2. Commissioner’s Staff. Positions on the Commissioner’s staff are approved by the Executive Committee and

appointed by the Commissioner.

Article Four Membership

Section 1.

A. Members. 1. A Conference member may be suspended or expelled from the Conference only upon two-thirds vote of the full

Executive Committee. 2. A Conference member which is suspended or expelled from the Conference shall not be eligible for any

financial distribution (including the share of Conference equity) except for unpaid team expenses to attend a scheduled Conference championship, meet, or tournament which took place prior to the date of expulsion or withdrawal.

3. Any member that decides to resign from the Conference is expected to give a two-year notice of its intent to leave the Conference. A member that resigns in this manner will continue to receive a share of the annual excess revenue distribution during its last two years in the Conference, but will also be assessed a fee of $300,000, due to the Conference June 30 of the year the member leaves the Conference. A member that resigns with less than a two-year notice, forfeits its share of excess revenue distribution, and will be assessed a financial penalty of $600,000, due to the Conference June 30 of the year the member leaves the Conference. Any exiting member is entitled to no other monies.

B. New Members. 1. An institution desiring to become a full member of the Conference shall:

a. Have admission requirements and academic standards acceptable to current member institutions; b. Be geographically located where it will be feasible to maintain competition with current member

institutions; c. Be able to demonstrate a tradition of having a subsidized program of intercollegiate athletics for men and

women; d. Be in compliance with all the Southern Conference Constitution and Bylaws; e. Adjust schedules expeditiously. A grace period, of not over three years, shall be provided for adjustments

to team schedules; f. Be a Division I member of the NCAA for a minimum of two years immediately prior to approval for

membership; g. Pay the Conference an entry fee agreed upon by the Conference and the new member. This amount must

be at least as much as the prorated institutional net assets of the Conference, as determined by the Audit Committee of the Conference and approved by the Executive Committee.

C. Procedures. When an institution has indicated its desire to become a full member of the Conference the following procedure shall be followed: 1. The institution, through its CEO, shall make application with recommendations from at least three Conference

members;

26

2. The Executive Committee shall, in consultation with the Conference President, appoint a special committee to report on the prospective member’s academic qualifications, admissions requirements, NCAA affiliation, and the institutional commitment to Conference membership. A majority of the committee members shall be faculty athletics representatives. The committee shall also have at least one athletics director and one senior woman administrator. The chair of the committee shall be appointed by the Conference President. This committee will make a visit to the prospective institution and report their findings to the Executive Committee;

3. The Executive Committee shall, in consultation with the Athletics Directors Association and the Conference President, appoint a special committee to report on the prospective member’s suitable geographic location, athletics personnel, athletics policies, athletics facilities, the financial stability of the athletics department, and sports sponsorships. A majority of the committee members shall be athletics directors. The committee shall also have at least one faculty athletics representative and one senior woman administrator. The chair of the committee shall be appointed by the Conference President. This committee will make a visit to the prospective institution and report their findings to the Executive Committee.

4. The Executive Committee, the Athletics Directors Association, and the Senior Woman Administrators Association will discuss a prospective member’s expression of interest in Conference membership prior to the two special committees making their campus visit. After the campus visit, the Executive Committee shall review the reports of the two special committees and shall report to the membership at the next regular (or special) meeting of the Conference.

5. Every effort will be made to ensure that each Conference institution has a member on one of the two special committees.

6. A new member may be accepted by the membership at any Conference meeting. A vote of two-thirds of the full Executive Committee shall be required to accept a new member, subject to approval by the Council of Presidents.

7. Payment of the entry fee (See Article Four, Section 1.B.1.g) will be on a schedule agreed to between the Conference and the new member, with a substantial portion of the entry fee due to the Conference prior to a public announcement.

8. Prior to a public announcement, a new member’s chief executive officer, acting on behalf of the institution’s governing board, shall sign a letter agreeing to comply with the Southern Conference Constitution and Bylaws.

Section 2. A. Associate Members.

1. Associate members are members who compete for Conference championships, but who are not full Conference members.

2. Institutions may be offered an associate membership in the Conference in a particular sport for the sole purpose of competing in the Conference championship for that sport.

3. Associate members will be chosen to participate in a Conference championship only if athletic opportunities for the full Conference members will be enhanced by such participation.

4. Institutions granted associate membership in the Conference are extended voting privileges in matters only relating to the conduct or competition in that sport, and are not entitled to vote on other matters of the Conference which may or may not involve that sport.

5. Associate members will only share in Conference net revenue directly generated by the Conference sport in which the institution participates.

6. When an institution agrees to become an associate member of the Conference, a written contract will define the terms of associate membership.

B. New Associate Members. 1. An institution desiring to become an associate member of the Conference shall:

a. Have admission requirements and academic standards acceptable to current member institutions; b. Be geographically located where it will be feasible to maintain competition with current member

institutions; c. Be in compliance with the Southern Conference Constitution and Bylaws; d. Be a Division I member of the NCAA for a minimum of two years immediately prior to approval for

associate membership. e. Pay the Conference the required dues amount as set forth in the associate member contract. Such

amount, not less than $1,000, should not be less than the cost of the pro-rata share of the respective sport’s championship.

C. Procedures. When an institution has indicated its desire to become an associate member of the Conference, the following procedure shall be followed: 1. The institution, through its CEO, shall make application with recommendations from at least three Conference

members; 2. The Executive Committee shall direct the Athletics Directors Association to report on the prospective associate

member’s suitable geographic location, athletics personnel, athletics policies, athletics facilities, and the general compatibility of the specific sport which will be competing in the Conference.

3. The Executive Committee shall review the report of the Athletic Directors Association, and shall report to the membership at the next regular meeting of the Conference.

4. A new associate member may be accepted by the membership at any Conference meeting. A favorable vote of two-thirds of the full Executive Committee shall be required to accept an associate member, subject to approval by the Council of Presidents.

27

5. Prior to a public announcement, a new associate member shall deposit with the Conference office, a sum agreed upon and specified in the associate member contract.

6. Prior to a public announcement, a new associate member’s chief executive officer, acting on behalf of the institution’s governing board shall sign a contract which outlines the details of the associate member’s participation in the Conference. This contract will include the dues, services, revenue sharing agreements, potential expenses, and the duration of associate member status. The new associate member will also agree in the contract to comply with the Southern Conference Constitution and Bylaws. a. Upon recommendation by the Athletics Directors Association, associate member dues shall be approved

by the Executive Committee, subject to approval by the Council of Presidents. b. Upon recommendation by the Athletics Directors Association, the duration of associate member status as

set forth in the associate member contract shall be approved by the Executive Committee, subject to approval by the Council of Presidents.

D. Current Associate members are:

Institution Sport Campbell University Wrestling Gardner-Webb University Wrestling Southern Illinois University-Edwardsville Wrestling Virginia Military Institute Wrestling

Article Five Eligibility

Section 1. Requirements. Each Conference member will comply with NCAA and Southern Conference eligibility

requirements. A. Academic Requirements.

1. Satisfactory Progress. A student-athlete shall be making satisfactory progress towards a degree as defined by the institution and the NCAA.

B. Transfer Requirements. 1. A student-athlete who transfers from one Conference member to another shall not be eligible to compete in the

same sport until one calendar year has elapsed from the date of enrollment at the certifying institution. 2. Graduate Student Exception. A graduate of one Conference member who enrolls in a graduate or professional

school of a second member institution may participate immediately in the same sport if the student-athlete otherwise fulfills the conditions of the NCAA one-time transfer requirements and has eligibility remaining in that sport.

3. Athletic Aid Exception. Non-recruited student-athletes who do not receive athletically related financial aid may participate immediately in the same sport if the student-athlete otherwise fulfills the conditions of the NCAA one time transfer requirements and has eligibility remaining in that sport.

Section 2. Regulations.

A. Before any student may compete in intercollegiate athletics, a squad list must be filed with the Commissioner. B. Financial Aid Limitations. The Conference shall subscribe to financial aid limitations as defined in the NCAA Rules

and Regulations.

Article Six Competition

Section 1. Required Varsity Sports. Conference members shall field teams in a combined total of not less than fourteen

men’s and women’s varsity sports. A. Women’s Sports. Conference members shall field teams in women’s basketball, volleyball and at least five other

women’s sports in which the Conference conducts championships. 1. The Conference will conduct a championship in any NCAA sport in which a minimum of five members sponsor

teams. 2. The Executive Committee must approve the establishment of new championships and authorize appropriate

funding. B. Men’s Sports. Conference members shall field teams in men’s basketball, football and at least four other sports in

which the Conference conducts championships. 1. The Conference will conduct a championship in any NCAA sport in which a minimum of five members sponsor

teams. The Executive Committee must approve the establishment of new championships and authorize appropriate funding.

C. Scheduling. All Conference institutions will, in each Conference sport they sponsor, conduct a complete schedule of competition within the Southern Conference in that sport as specified in the Sports Regulations for that sport.

D. Waiver. A waiver to a specific provision of Article Six may be granted by a three-fourths vote of the full executive committee, subject to approval by the Council of Presidents. 1. The Citadel has received a waiver of Bylaw Article Six, Section A.

28

2. Davidson College and the University of North Carolina at Greensboro have received a waiver of Bylaw Article Six, Section B.

[Note: A list of all waivers is included in the General Information section of the Manual.] Section 2. Championships

A. Conference. 1. Regular Season Competition. Regular season competition shall determine the Conference champion in

baseball, men’s and women’s basketball, football, men’s and women’s soccer, softball, men’s and women’s tennis, volleyball and wrestling.

2. Tournament or Meet. A Conference tournament or meet shall determine the Conference champion in men’s and women’s cross country, men’s and women’s golf, men’s and women’s indoor track, and men’s and women’s outdoor track. Tournament/meet formats are specified in the Sports Regulations.

B. Post-Season Competition. 1. NCAA Championships.

a. Football 1. The winner of the Conference championship in football shall become the Conference’s automatic

qualifier to the NCAA Division I FCS playoffs. Other member institutions may accept at-large invitations.

2. Each participating member in the NCAA Division I FCS playoffs will receive all per diem allowances and travel expenses associated with the contest(s) that are distributed by the NCAA.

b. Other Sports 1. The winner of the Conference tournament shall become the Conference’s automatic qualifier when

applicable to the NCAA Championships. Other member institutions may accept at-large bids. 2. If a Conference school is invited to participate in an NCAA championship, the per diem allowance and

travel expenses associated with the contest(s) that are distributed by the NCAA will be retained by the institution.

3. Teams that compete in sports in which the Conference does not receive an automatic bid for NCAA championships are required to accept at-large invitations. Teams that compete in sports in which the Conference participates in play-ins will receive up to $5,000 to cover expenses.

2. Other Pre or Post Season Competition. Conference teams and/or individual student-athletes may compete in out-of-season competition within the guidelines of this Constitution and Bylaws and the NCAA.

Section 3. Transition Exception.

A. The Citadel will be granted an exception to Article Six, Section 1, Paragraph A, with an annual review thereafter. B. During this period, member institutions are encouraged to assist The Citadel with the scheduling of regular season

competition, with the understanding that mixed-teams may be required. C. In the sports of Cross Country, Indoor Track and Field, Outdoor Track and Field, Golf, and Tennis, The Citadel may

be permitted to enter eligible female student-athletes representing their institutions as individuals. These individuals would be eligible for individual honors, but their performances would not affect team scoring until the schools provide a full women’s team.

D. This Transition Exception will be reviewed again at the end of its application.

Article Seven Academic and Athletic Awards

Section 1.Academic Awards

A. Barrett-Bonner Academic Award. The Barrett-Bonner Academic Award shall be awarded annually to the Conference member with the highest percentage of its student-athletes on the Southern Conference Academic Honor Roll.

B. Graduation Rate Award. The Graduation Rate Award shall be awarded annually to the Conference member with the highest graduation rate for its student-athletes as compiled in the annual official NCAA Graduation-Rates Report.

C. Southern Conference Honor Roll. The Honor Roll shall consist of all student-athletes who achieve a minimum 3.0 GPA for the academic year while being a member of the final squad list for a varsity sport during its traditional season. To be eligible, student-athletes must have previously passed a minimum of 24 hours over the course of two semesters or its equivalent for other academic calendars. Honor Roll recipients shall be announced during the summer months and certificates shall be issued to member institutions on behalf of each recipient.

D. Southern Conference Academic All-Conference Team. The Academic All-Conference Team shall consist of all student-athletes who achieve a minimum 3.3 cumulative GPA while being a member of the final squad list during its traditional season for a varsity sport sanctioned by the Southern Conference. GPA calculations shall be based upon the student-athlete’s cumulative GPA at the beginning of the semester during which competition takes place. To be eligible, student-athletes must have passed a minimum of 24 hours over the course of two semesters or its equivalent for other academic calendars. Additionally, student-athletes must have participated in a minimum of 50 percent of their team’s contests in the most recent traditional season. Academic All-Conference Teams shall be awarded for fall, winter and spring sports. The teams shall be announced shortly after the conclusion of each season and certificates shall be issued to member institutions on behalf of each recipient.

29

E. Southern Conference Commissioner’s Medal. The Commissioner’s Academic Medal shall be awarded to all student-athletes who achieve a minimum 3.5 GPA for the academic year while being a member of the final squad list for a varsity sport during its traditional season. To be eligible, student-athletes must have previously passed a minimum of 24 hours over the course of two semesters or its equivalent for other academic calendars. Commissioner’s Academic Medal recipients shall be announced during the summer months and medallions shall be issued to member institutions on behalf of each recipient.

Section 2. Graduate Scholarships. Southern Conference Graduate Scholarships shall be awarded annually to senior

student-athletes who are members of the final squad list for any varsity sport sanctioned by the Southern Conference. They shall include: One female (Dorothy Hicks Scholarship), one male (Dave Hart Scholarship), two eligible by either gender (William V. Moore Scholarship and David Knight Scholarship) and additional scholarships as available, for student-athletes who plan to continue their education in graduate or professional school.

Section 3. Athletic Awards. Conference champions shall be properly recognized.

A. Germann Cup 1. The Germann Cup shall be awarded annually to the Conference member who compiles the most points during

the academic year in all women’s sports in which the Conference offers a championship. 2. Points shall be awarded in each sport as follows: The winning team during regular season competition shall

receive (12) points for first place. In sports where there is a post season tournament held the winner of the tournament will be awarded (2) additional points. If a team wins the regular season championship and the season ending tournament, they would receive (12) points for winning the regular season and (2) points for winning the tournament championship for a total of (14). If a team other than the regular season champion wins the season ending tournament, they would receive the additional (2) points. For example, the team that finishes in second place during the regular season competition would receive (11) points for the second place finish and would be awarded (2) additional points for winning the tournament championship for a total of (13) points. The third place team would receive one point less than the second place team (10) points, the fourth place team one point less than the third place team (9) points, etc. In sports where the Conference champion is decided by a season ending meet or tournament and does not designate a regular season champion, such as golf, cross country, and indoor and outdoor track, the points would be (12) for the champion. The second place team would be awarded one point less or (11), the fourth place team one less than the third place team or (10), etc.

3. In sports where not all member institutions compete for the Conference championship, the maximum number of points awarded to the Conference champion will be the same as that awarded in sports that are sponsored by all Conference members.

4. Presentation. Procedures for presentation and display are identical to those criteria used for the Commissioner’s Cup.

B. Commissioner’s Cup. 1. The Commissioner’s Cup shall be awarded annually to the Conference member which compiles the most

points during the academic year in all men’s sports in which the Conference offers a championship. 2. Points shall be awarded in each sport as follows:

a. The team with the best won/loss record during the football season conference versus conference competition shall receive (12) points for finishing in first place during the regular season. The second place team would get (11) and the third place team would get (10), etc.

b. In sports where there is a post season tournament held, the winner of the tournament will be awarded (2) additional points. If a team wins the regular season championship and the season ending tournament they would receive (12) points for the regular season and (2) points for the tournament for a total of (14) points. If a team other than the regular season champion wins the season ending tournament they would receive the additional (2) points. For example, the team that finishes in second place during the regular season competition would receive (11) points for that second place finish and would be awarded (2) additional points for winning the tournament championship for a total of (13) points. The third place team would receive one point less than the second place team (10), the fourth place team one point less than the third place team (9), etc.

c. In sports where the Conference champion is decided by a season ending meet or tournament, and does not designate a regular season champion, such as golf, cross country, and indoor and outdoor track, the points would be (12) for the champion. The second place team would be awarded one point less or (11) points, the third place team one point less or (10), the fourth place team one less than the third place team or (9), etc.

d. Awarding of points for men’s basketball will be as follows: Divisional winners will earn (12) points, second place (10) points, third place (8) points, fourth place (6) points, fifth place (4) points, and sixth place (2) points.

e. In sports where not all member institutions compete for the Conference championship, the maximum number of points awarded to the Conference champion will be the same as that awarded in sports that are sponsored by all Conference members.

3. Trophies a. Permanent Cup. The permanent cup is retained by the winner for one year from the time it is presented.

30

b. Presentation Cup. An appropriately engraved cup is presented by the Conference and retained by the winner.

c. Presentation. Presentation will be made annually at the Spring Meeting of the Conference. 4. In the event of a tie for the Commissioner’s Cup, each team will receive an award and recognition. Both

member institutions names are engraved on the permanent cup. A coin toss determines who gets the trophy first. Both institutions will receive a small cup which they will retain.

5. If a permanent cup is to change hands, it is the obligation of the Athletics Director to bring the cup to the Spring Meeting for presentation to the new winner. Photographers should be on hand for the formal presentation.

6. It is the responsibility of the winner to have the permanent cup appropriately engraved, sending the bill to the Commissioner.

Article Eight

Management of Conference Finances Section 1. Oversight Responsibility. The Southern Conference Finance Committee has oversight of the Conference’s

financial administration. The Finance Committee shall annually review Conference finances prior to the Conference Spring Meeting and shall recommend for approval financial policy and the Conference budget. The committee may also recommend assessments to members for such amounts that may be reasonably necessary to support the Conference.

Section 2. Fiscal Year. The fiscal year for the Conference shall begin July 1 in each calendar year and end June 30 in the

following calendar year. Section 3. Conference Budget. A Conference budget shall be prepared by the Commissioner, reviewed by the Finance

Committee and Council of Presidents and presented to the Executive Committee for approval at the annual Conference Spring Meeting. An annual budget can be changed only by approval of the Executive Committee. A. Budget Process.

1. The Executive Committee-approved Conference strategic goals and principles shall be used to guide any deliberations that may occur related to Conference expenditures.

2. The Conference office staff shall work with Conference committees that have oversight responsibility for budget expenses to ensure that expenditures comply with Conference strategic goals and principles.

3. The Commissioner shall present a proposed budget to the Finance Committee that adheres to the Conference strategic goals and principles.

4. In consideration of the proposed budget, the Finance Committee shall give the highest priority to funding initiatives that align with the Conference strategic goals and principles.

5. In order for budget request to be approved, the requests should include: a. The expenditure’s relationship to the respective Committee’s charge; b. Whether the expenditure is a new or replacement program; c. The expenditure’s cost effectiveness; d. The amount of money that has already been spent on each specific proposal; e. The projects, if any, that are being replaced if funds are being reallocated to support the expenditure; and f. Appropriate supporting data.

B. Conference Revenues. 1. Dues.

a. Present Members. The annual dues for each member of the Conference shall be $25,000 payable before September 30.

b. New Members. Each new member must pay the Conference an entry fee agreed upon by the Conference and the new member (See Article Four, Section 1.B.1.g). Payment of the entry fee will be on a schedule agreed to between the Conference and the new member, with a substantial portion of the entry fee due to the Conference prior to a public announcement.

c. Associate Members. Prior to a public announcement of membership, an associate member shall deposit with the Conference office the current dues figure, as determined by the Conference.

2. Corporate Marketing. Income from corporate marketing. 3. Operating Funds. Income from Operating Funds. Conference monies shall be invested in accordance with the

following guidelines: a. Certificates of Deposit/Deposit Notes. Certificates of deposits (CDs) are obligations of the issuing financial

institution to pay the beneficial holder or bearer the full amount plus interest periodically or at maturity. Certificates of deposit may be purchased directly from the issuing institution or from an approved broker/dealer. Bank deposit notes are similar to corporate medium-term notes and are longer-term CDs. 1. CDs may be purchased from FDIC insured banks or savings and loan associations up to the limit of

FDIC insurance. 2. CDs in excess of FDIC insurance limits may be purchased provided the financial institution meets the

following guidelines: a. The bank’s holding company assets shall be at least $5 billion. b. Investments may be made only in investment grade institutions with the following minimum

ratings: Thomas Bankwatch B, Sheshunoff rating of B or TBW-1 for short term ratings, bond ratings by Moody’s AA, Standard & Poor AA for any of other short term bank deposit notes.

31

b. U.S. Treasury Securities. Treasury securities include Treasury Bills (T-Bills) [original maturities one year or less], Treasury Notes [maturities one to 10 years]. These are negotiable, highly liquid instruments of the U.S. Treasury. Treasury securities carry full faith and backing of the United States government and may be assumed to have no credit risk. U.S. Treasury securities may be purchased from a financial institution or from and approved broker or dealer. The Conference may have 100 percent of its investments in U.S. Treasury obligations if the market conditions are favorable to this type of investment portfolio.

c. Federal Agency Securities. Various federal agencies issue security instruments to provide credit for particular sectors of the economy. Examples include Federal Home Loan Bank, Federal National Mortgage Association, Government National Mortgage Association, Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, Federal Farm Credit Bank, Student Loan Marketing Association, Financing Corporation and Tennessee Valley Authority. Agency securities are negotiable. Liquidity, maturities and other aspects of these securities vary from agency to agency. Agency issues have either “explicit” or “de facto” backing from the U.S. government. Although the credit risk is slightly greater than that of the U.S. Treasury securities, it still is negotiable. The Conference may have 100 percent of its investments in federal agency securities if the market conditions are favorable to this type of investment.

d. Commercial Paper or Corporate Notes. Commercial paper is an unsecured promissory note of a particular corporation issued for a specific amount and maturing on a specific day. All commercial paper is negotiable but because of its short duration, most investors hold their paper to maturity. The maximum maturity for which commercial paper may be sold is 270 days. Almost all commercial paper is rated with respect to credit risk by one or more of several rating services including Moody’s and Standard and Poor’s. As a result of credit risk and less liquidity, yield on commercial paper are higher than those on Treasury obligations of similar maturity. Corporate medium-term notes pick up where commercial paper leaves off on the maturity spectrum. Corporate notes are originally issued with maturities ranging from nine months to 10 years. Corporate notes can be purchased within a year of maturity from financial brokers and are rated by Standard and Poor’s Corporation or Moody’s Investment Service. 1. The Conference may only invest in commercial paper with a Standard and Poor’s rating of A-1 and a

Moody’s rating of P-1. 2. The Conference may only invest in medium-term corporate notes that are investment grade having

credit rating of “A” or better by Standard and Poor’s Corporation or Moody’s Investment Service. e. Savings. Savings accounts may be established at selected financial institutions in amounts as may be

necessary for the transaction of Southern Conference financial affairs. f. Repurchase Agreements and Money Market Accounts. Cash balances maintained in the Conference’s

checking account(s) shall be invested on a daily basis in repurchase agreements or money market mutual funds, limited to U.S. government securities. The objective is to provide an interest avenue for overnight cash. The account will fluctuate based on when cash is received, recorded and invested by the Conference. Any investment yield that is adjusted based on a fixed spread or a specific index rate is prohibited if the yield moves up or down based on market interest rates.

g. Stock Mutual Funds or Bond Mutual Funds. The Conference may invest operating funds in stock or bond mutual funds. These investments should be managed in a way that would avoid a need to liquidate a portion of these investments for short-term cash flow purposes.

h. Maturity of Cash Management. The maturity of the investment portfolio is subject to constraints and conditions. The Conference shall base its investment portfolio on its structure of liabilities. The Conference shall, to the extent possible, minimize market risk by matching investments with liabilities, making it possible to hold investments to maturity. The Conference generally shall pursue a buy-and-hold strategy and avoid selling prior to maturity for short-term profits. However, investments may be sold prior to maturity when conditions warrant.

4. Licensing and Merchandising. Income from licensing and merchandising. 5. Financial Penalties. The Commissioner has the authority to impose fines as necessary and deposit the money

with the Conference. 6. Assessments. Assessments may be imposed by the Conference.

a. When, at the end of the fiscal year (June 30), the expenditures for operations for that year have exceeded the year’s income, the deficit shall be prorated (and shall be payable by the Conference members) on the basis of Conference membership as of June 30 of the said deficit year, provided such pro-rata assessments shall be the lesser amount which will absorb the deficit for that year or shall be needed to restore the value of the retained net assets of the Conference to $350,000 for that year’s end.

b. Conference members will pay several pro-rata assessments not later than January 31 following acceptance of the annual audit report at the Conference Fall Meeting.

7. NCAA Conference Grants. 8. Conference Championships Ticket Revenue. 9. NCAA Championships Income. Revenue received from the net receipts from NCAA Championships, primarily

the Division I Men’s Basketball Championship. 10. Special Assistance Fund for Student-Athletes.

a. Distribution. The Special Assistance Fund for Student-Athletes shall be distributed by the Conference office based upon an NCAA formula to each Conference member institution’s athletics department. These funds are restricted to NCAA guidelines and purposes.

11. Student-Athlete Opportunity Fund.

32

a. Distribution. The Student-Athlete Opportunity Fund shall be distributed by the Conference office based upon an NCAA formula to each Conference member institution’s athletics department. These funds are restricted to NCAA guidelines and purposes.

12. Participation in National Invitation Tournament. a. All net revenues associated with participation in both the men’s and women’s basketball post-season

National Invitation Tournaments, after a participating institution’s actual expenses have been fully reimbursed, shall be retained by the Conference.

C. Expenses. The following categories have been adopted by the Conference, its office and members for use in developing the annual budget. Budget categories have been developed and recommended by the Finance Committee and approved by the Executive Committee. 1. Championships Administration. 2. Communications. 3. Compliance. 4. Eligibility. 5. Fiscal Management. 6. Inter-Institutional Relationships. 7. Interpretations. 8. Legislation (NCAA/Compliance). 9. NCAA Liaison. 10. Office Management. 11. Officiating. 12. Record Keeping. 13. Scheduling. 14. Television Administration. 15. Conference Committee Administration. 16. Enhancement of Intercollegiate Athletics Enterprise (e.g., internships). 17. Honors and Awards. 18. Legal Advice. 19. Insurance. 20. Media and Public Relations. 21. Revenue Generation (e.g., Licensing, Marketing, Merchandising and Promotions). 22. Internet. 23. Research.

Section 4. Audit. An annual audit shall be prepared by a Certified Public Accountant, approved by the Audit Committee and

presented at the Conference Fall Meeting for approval. A. Revenue Sharing. A letter to each CEO announcing the profit sharing check shall be sent at the time the check is

sent to each Athletics Director. B. Copies of Audits. A copy of the audit shall be circulated to all Faculty Athletics Representatives, Athletics Directors

and Senior Woman Administrators prior to the annual Fall Meeting. Section 5. Revenue Sharing. Excess Conference revenue, including income derived from contracts with television

entities, revenue from marketing activities, income from preseason, postseason or special events competition, and income from Conference championships, shall be distributed to the membership. When the audited Conference budget shows net assets (assets minus liabilities) for any given fiscal year that exceeds the subsequent year’s budget plus the value of retained net assets, the Conference must distribute to each member its pro-rata share of the excess. The value of retained net assets is recommended by the investment committee each June 30.

Section 6. Annual Funding. The following describes the annual funding mechanism for the Southern Conference budget:

A. Annually on July 1, the value of retained net assets is invested at the direction of the investment committee. B. Unused Student-Assistance funds from past years’ distributions from the NCAA are kept in investments. C. It is important to note, that historically, revenue exceeds expenses only during the last three months of the fiscal

year after NCAA championship and Southern Conference basketball tournament monies have been received. The cash balance is used for general operating purposes during the first nine months of the fiscal year.

Article Nine

Conference Investments Section 1. Investment Responsibility. The Council of Presidents is responsible for the approval of guidelines and

strategy regarding the Conference’s investments. The Council of Presidents authorizes a Conference Investment Committee to perform the following: A. A portfolio manager shall be selected by the investment committee and be responsible for managing all Southern

Conference investments in accordance with the investment guidelines approved by the executive committee. The investment committee may seek the advice and counsel of investment experts as necessary regarding specific investments and maturities.

B. Authorize day-to-day investment decisions with the approved guidelines and to ensure that control procedures are followed.

33

C. Ensure that all investments have been made in accordance with applicable laws and regulations, as well as in accordance with the approved guidelines.

D. Make recommendations to the Council of Presidents concerning investment policy and strategy, including an annual review of the Conference investment policy and strategy. This review would be forwarded to the executive committee in a timely manner.

E. By March 1, report annually the Conference’s investment activity. (Revised and Approved 6/10) Section 2. General Investment Strategy.

A. It shall be the investment philosophy of The Southern Conference that all investments be managed on a daily basis to provide ready access to sufficient funds to meet the obligations of the Conference in a timely fashion.

B. The highest priority shall be a determination of an appropriate balance between risk and return. C. Any departure from the investment guidelines needs prior approval from the Southern Conference Council of

Presidents. (Revised and Approved 6/10)

Article Ten Meetings

Section 1. Conference Meetings. Normally, the two regular Conference meetings each year shall be held in the fall and in

the spring. Alternative dates for these meetings may be set by the Executive Committee no later than the last day of the preceding February for the Fall Meeting and no later than the last day of the preceding May for the Spring Meeting. A. Executive Session. All Conference meetings shall be held in executive session unless the Executive Committee

decides otherwise. B. Membership Voting. Members of the Conference shall be entitled to one vote each. C. Voting by Proxy. Voting by proxy shall not be allowed. D. Combined Meetings. Combined meetings may consist of any combination of Chief Executive Officers, Faculty

Athletics Representatives, Athletics Directors and Senior Woman Administrators. E. Special Meetings. Special Conference meetings may be called at any time by the chair of the Council of

Presidents, the President of the Conference or by a majority of the members of either group. F. Expenses. The Conference shall not be obligated to pay expenses to committee members attending meetings or to

others carrying out business approved by the President and/or Commissioner. G. Quorum. For the transaction of business at any Conference meeting, a quorum shall consist of two-thirds of the

voting members of the Southern Conference.

Article Eleven Television

Section 1. Television. The Southern Conference Television Committee shall oversee all Conference television activities.

It is a condition and obligation of membership in the Southern Conference that each institution participate in such regular and postseason television programs as the Conference’s members, by majority vote, may approve. A. Property Rights. Institutions shall give the Conference first-right-of-refusal to regular-season Conference games for

television broadcast. After the Conference exercises its first-right-of-refusal, member institutions may function independently to arrange television broadcast and appearances.

B. Syndicator. The Television Committee shall oversee negotiations with television syndicators for the production and syndication of Southern Conference regular-season and championship competition.

C. Revenue. Revenue generated by the syndication of Conference television will be deposited with the Conference.

Article Twelve Amendments

Section 1. Proposed Amendments. The bylaws may be amended at any Conference meeting by a majority vote of the full

Executive Committee. A. Submission of Amendment. Any member institution or the Conference office, may propose an amendment by

submitting it in writing to the Commissioner not less than forty-five days prior to the next Conference meeting. The Commissioner will forward the proposed amendment to the Constitution and Bylaws Revision Committee, which will review the amendment and add any comments or suggestions it deems necessary, and return such to the Commissioner in a timely manner.

B. Circulation of Amendment. The Commissioner shall distribute (via regular mail or electronic mail) a copy of all proposed amendments to the Executive Officer, Faculty Athletics Representative, Athletics Director, and Senior Woman Administrator of each member institution not less than twenty-five days prior to the next Conference meeting.

Section 2. Amendments to Bylaw Amendments. An amendment to the Bylaws may be amended at any meeting. A

majority vote of the full Executive Committee is required for approval of an amendment to Bylaws Amendments. Section 3. Effective Date. All approved amendments become effective August 1st following adoption unless otherwise

specified.

34

Article Thirteen Saving Clause

Section 1. Implied Powers and Authority. In addition to the specific powers and authority set forth by the Articles of

Incorporation of the State of North Carolina and the Conference Constitution and Bylaws, the Conference shall have all further powers and implied authority to conduct its business.

Section 2. Correctable Errors. Failure of literal or complete compliance with the provisions of this Constitution and Bylaws

in respect to the dates and times of notices or send the receipt of same, or errors in phraseology of notices or proposals, which in the judgment of the majority of members present at a Conference meeting do not cause substantial injury to the rights of members, shall not invalidate the actions or proceedings of the meeting.

Article Fourteen Effective Date

These Bylaws were adopted by the Executive Committee, and revised July 1974, May 1990, May 1999, and May 2008.

35

Administrative

Regulations

37

Administrative Regulations

1.0 Institutional Declaration of Compliance. All staff members at each institution involved in recruiting and/or coaching

student-athletes shall sign a form circulated by the Commissioner certifying that they have read the Southern Conference Constitution and Bylaws and specified Articles and Policies of the NCAA Constitution and Bylaws. The NCAA Certification of Compliance form may be used with the necessary insertions.

2.0 National Letter of Intent. The Conference subscribes to the National Letter of Intent program, administered by the

Collegiate Commissioners Association. 3.0 Protests.

3.1 The Conference does not recognize protests in any sport unless the conditions reported to the Commissioner are, in his/her judgment, of such a serious and extraordinary nature that he/she deems action is necessary.

3.2 Protests may only be lodged with the Commissioner by Athletics Directors.

4.0 Rules Violations. 4.1 Athletic Directors are required to report promptly any rules violations that occur on their campus. 4.2 Within the Conference. It is essential that when an Athletics Director receives a report of an alleged Southern

Conference and/or NCAA rules violation by another institution, he/she will communicate said violation via letter to the Athletics Director of the offending institution with a copy to the Commissioner. It is essential that the report contain names, dates, location and facts. After thorough investigation, the Athletics Director of the alleged offending institution will respond to the first Athletics Director, again with a copy to the Commissioner, with an outline of the findings and actions taken, if any. 4.2.1 Should a situation remain unresolved, the Commissioner will then conduct an investigation to settle the

matter. If warranted, violations would be reported to the NCAA. 4.2.2 The Commissioner shall report to the CEO of the institution any alleged violation that is not handled in an

appropriate manner by the athletics department. 4.3 Outside the Conference. Communication should be from Athletics Director to Athletics Director following the same

procedures with a copy to the Southern Conference Commissioner. In unresolved situations of a serious nature, the Southern Conference Commissioner will then communicate with the Commissioner of the involved conference to seek a satisfactory solution. In the event the institution is an independent, the Southern Conference Commissioner will communicate with the NCAA.

5.0 Sportsmanship. It is a principle of the Conference that student-athletes, coaches, and all others associated with

intercollegiate athletics, adhere to such fundamental values as respect, fairness, civility, honesty and accountability. 5.1 Institutional Accountability. Each institution shall:

a. Demonstrate that it is committed to the fundamental values of sportsmanship and ethical conduct b. Formally adopt a written plan that ensures the institution maintains a program that is characterized by

sportsmanship and ethical conduct; and c. Have available information for assessing the status of plans related to sportsmanship and ethical conduct. 5.1.1 Chief Executive Officer Responsibility.

5.1.1.1 At the beginning of each academic year, the CEO of each institution shall ensure a campus awareness of sportsmanship issues by reminding all constituents that athletics is a highly visible part of the institution and that poor sportsmanship is counter-productive to an institution’s mission.

5.1.2 Athletics Director Responsibility. The Athletics Director of each member institution shall have responsibility for game management of all events conducted on campus. The Athletics Director shall ensure that contests are conducted in such a manner that fair and safe competition is possible. The Athletics Director shall report any violation of these sportsmanship regulations to the conference office and the visiting institutions.

5.1.2.1 Mascots/Motorized Vehicles/Explosive Devices. The home Athletics Director has responsibility for the use of explosive devices (cannons, rifles, shotguns, rockets, etc.); live mascots (horses, dogs, buffalos, etc.); and motorized vehicles at their events. Visiting Athletics Directors must request permission for the use of such at least two weeks in advance of the contest and approval or disapproval should be furnished immediately to the visiting Athletics Directors.

5.1.2.2 Noisemakers. Artificial noisemakers (air horns, electronic amplifiers, whistles, etc.) are not permissible in Southern Conference arenas or stadiums except as part of the official band, or as otherwise permitted in individual sports regulations. Such items will be removed immediately from the arena by home management. Cheerleaders may use electronic amplifiers provided the use is limited to giving instructions to the crowd. Bands will not be seated in the arena/stadium quadrant which includes the visiting team bench and will be instructed that they may not play while the game is in

38

progress. (Revised, 5/13) Public address announcers may not speak during times when play is in progress.

5.1.2.3 Signs. Signs of a derogatory nature directed towards an individual opponent, visiting team or game officials are not permitted in Conference facilities. It is the responsibility of game management to remove the signs immediately.

5.1.2.4 Location of Visiting Fans. Areas behind the visiting team bench shall be reserved for visiting fans. A buffer section of seats or empty space must be provided behind visiting team benches and dugouts, as appropriate for the venue. In no case may the home team’s fans, student, or band sections be located immediately behind the visiting team bench.

5.1.2.5 Game Ejections. Any institutional personnel removed from a game for any reason shall be immediately suspended from the next contest* (i.e. coach/player is ejected from final regular season game; suspension would apply to first game of Southern Conference championship). A suspension is to be administered by the Athletics Director with notification to the conference office. A second ejection shall carry a two-game suspension, a third ejection a four-game suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-game suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except as described below: A participant who completes one calendar year without an ejection shall have his/her record cleared and return to a one-game suspension penalty upon the next ejection. 5.1.2.5.1 Appeals of suspensions must be made to the Commissioner in writing by the end of the

second working day of the Conference office after the day of the event in which the participant was ejected. Appeals may be heard only for the student-athletes ejected from a contest and only with indisputable video evidence forwarded by the Athletics Director of the institution in question. There are no appeals permitted for a coach’s ejection.

*5.1.2.5.2 In the sport of BASEBALL, a coach removed from a game for any reason shall be suspended from his team’s next Conference or non-conference game depending upon what type of contest (i.e. if the coach is ejected from a Conference game the suspension will apply to the next Conference game, if the coach is ejected from a non-conference game, the suspension will apply to the next non-conference game). A player removed from a game for any reason shall immediately be suspended from the next contest, regardless of Conference or non-conference.

5.1.2.6 Unsportsmanlike Conduct Fouls. Any participant in an athletic contest who is cited for unsportsmanlike behavior, which does not lead to an ejection, shall be counseled by the Athletics Director within 24 hours of the contest. (e.g.: Basketball player receives a technical foul, the Athletics Director is expected to counsel the student-athlete.)

5.1.2.7 Halted Contest due to Lightning: In all Conference outdoor sports, a host institution’s certified athletic trainer or game management director shall have primary responsibility for halting a contest in the event that lightning is in the vicinity of the contest. (Approved and Effective 6/10)

5.1.3 Coaches Responsibility. Coaches are an extension of the institution and as such are expected to reflect

institutional and conference values. 5.1.3.1 Coaches/Official Policies

5.1.3.1.1 Southern Conference coaches will not discuss officials or officiating in any public forum. 5.1.3.1.2 Coaches are prohibited from visiting the officials’ dressing area prior to, during, or at the

conclusion of a contest. 5.1.3.1.3 Concern about the quality of officiating must be addressed to the Coordinator of Officials

with a copy to the Athletics Director and the Commissioner. Coaches not receiving a reply within five days should notify the Commissioner.

5.1.3.2 Negative Recruiting. Southern Conference coaches shall refrain from negative recruiting. 5.1.3.3 Negative Comments. Southern Conference coaches shall refrain from any negative comments

concerning member schools, the conference and its office personnel, and other coaches, players of other institutions or personnel of the same.

5.2 Unsportsmanlike Behavior. Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct, including but not limited to those

described below, shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference. 5.2.1 Fighting. Any attempt by a person to strike an opponent or contest participant in a combative manner

unrelated to the sport involved or any act that insights an opponent to retaliate by acting in a similar manner shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

5.2.2 Aggressive Behavior. The use of obscene gestures, profane language, or the display of hostile action towards officials, spectators, or opponents shall be described as unsportsmanlike.

5.2.3 Ejection. The removal by an official from a competitive sport activity shall require the ejected participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately.

5.2.4 Suspension. A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the vicinity of the contest suspended from during the time period beginning one hour prior to the scheduled contest until officials have left the playing site at the conclusion of the contest. Suspension does not affect practice opportunities outside of the above time limitations.

5.2.5 Vicinity of Contest. The immediate area/site of the competition extended to include any point or place from which the ejected/suspended individual could observe, supervise, or participate in any manner in the contest

39

from which the participant is being ejected or suspended. The suspended individual must be removed from both sight and sound of the contest.

5.2.6 Competitive Conditions. The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a contest that is safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

5.3 Commissioner Responsibility. Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior brought to the attention of the Commissioner shall

be investigated and adjudicated. 5.4 Annual Awards. An annual award will be presented to the institution judged to have exhibited the highest degree of

sportsmanship, ethics, and courtesy among its players, coaches and spectators during the preceding academic year. The award shall be known as the Colonel D. S. McAlister Sportsmanship Award. 5.4.1 Voting. At the end of the competitive year, each institution shall select the top three institutions in the

conference in terms of overall sportsmanship, ethics and courtesy. Institutions are not allowed to include their own institution in the selection field. The selections will be made by each institution’s athletics director in consultation with their head coaches, student-athletes, senior woman administrator and faculty athletics representative. Selections will be made in order of preference and forwarded to the conference office.

5.4.2 Scores. The conference office shall tabulate each institution’s selections on a 3-2-1 basis, with an institution’s first choice receiving three points, second choice receiving two points and third choice receiving one point. The institution with the highest overall score after all selections have been forwarded to the conference office shall be declared the winner. In the case of ties, all tied institutions shall share in the award.

5.4.3 Reports. All voting, tabulation and awards shall be administered by the conference office. Only the name of the winning institution shall be released publicly. Neither the winning institution’s overall score nor the score of any other institution shall be released publicly.

6.0 Conference Tournaments.

6.1 Participation. All Conference schools shall have access to Conference championship events unless the Southern Conference regulations limit the number of teams participating in a championship.

6.2 NCAA Ineligibility. Any conference school that is not eligible to compete in a specific NCAA championship shall not be eligible to compete in a Southern Conference tournament or championship in that same sport.

6.3 Conference members shall not schedule a contest on the dates of Conference championships in the same sport. (i.e., an institution could not schedule a men’s golf match on the same dates as the conference men’s golf tournament).

7.0 Officiating.

7.1 Assignment of Officials. No institutional representative is allowed to request or exclude a specific game official. 8.0 Tie-Breaker Policy (may be superseded by individual sports policies).

8.1 Regular season champions are the teams posting the best won-loss percentage or points (soccer) against Conference opponents.

8.2 In the event of identical percentages, preference is given to the team playing the most conference games. 8.3 Co-champions are declared if teams post identical conference records. 8.4 Seeding.

8.4.1 In the event of a tie, the first tie-breaking decision is based on head to head competition. If one team has defeated the other team in head to head competition, preference is given to the winner of the competition.

8.4.2 In the event of multiple ties, preference is given to the teams with the best record against the tied teams during regular season competition.

8.4.3 If a tie still remains, competition against the highest placed team not involved in the tie. 8.4.4 If a tie still remains, the process is continued from highest placed team down until the tie is broken. 8.4.5 In all cases, seeding is done by resolving the higher seeds first and working down. 8.4.6 If a tie cannot be resolved as described above, the Commissioner will have a coin toss.

9.0 Amendment of the Administrative Regulations.

9.1 These Administrative Regulations may be amended at any regular or special conference meeting by a majority vote of the full Executive Committee.

9.2 Submission of Amendment. Any member institution may propose an amendment by submitting it in writing to the Commissioner not less than forty-five days prior to the next conference meeting. The Commissioner will forward the proposed amendment to the Constitution and Bylaws Revision Committee, which will review the amendment and add any comments or suggestions it deems necessary, and return such to the Commissioner in a timely manner.

9.3 The Commissioner shall mail (either via regular mail or electronic mail) a copy of the proposed amendment(s) to the Chief Executive Officer, Faculty Athletics Representative, Athletics Director, and Senior Woman Administrator of each institution not less than twenty-five days prior to the next conference meeting.

9.4 Unless otherwise specified, all approved amendments shall become effective on the first day of August following adoption of the amendment.

9.5 Amendments to proposed amendments to Administrative Regulations. A proposed amendment to the Administrative Regulations may be amended at a regular or special conference meeting by a majority of the full Executive Committee.

41

Sport Regulations

43

2014 Baseball

Regular-Season Regulations 1.0 Sponsorship

1.1 The following member institutions sponsor baseball as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University The Citadel Davidson College Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University Samford University University of North Carolina at Greensboro Western Carolina University Wofford College

2.0 Regular-Season Competition

2.1 Scheduling: NCAA policies regarding scheduling requirements are the official policies of the

Southern Conference.

2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: Each school shall play all members of the Conference three times during the regular season (normally in a three-game weekend series or in a three-game, three-day series at the site of one of the competing teams). The Southern Conference office shall produce a league master schedule prior to the start of each season. Conference games shall normally be played on Fridays, Saturdays and Sundays for a three-day series and Saturday and Sunday for a weekend series. A doubleheader shall normally be played on Saturday during a weekend series. Teams reserve the right to make changes to the Conference master schedule as long as participating athletics directors are agreeable to the moves and the moves are approved by the conference office. Teams may play a three-day series only with the approval of both competing athletics directors. (Effective 6/10)

2.1.1.1 Squad Size Restriction: A 27-person roster for both the visiting team and home

teams will be utilized for all Conference games during the 2014 season. The home team shall be allowed to dress non-eligible players (outside of the 27) who may site in the dugout as long as they are designated prior to the first game of the series. The squad restriction form shall be given to both head coaches and the official scorer prior to the first game of the series. (Approved and Effective 10/10)

2.1.2 Non-Division I Opponents: Southern Conference teams are not allowed to play NCAA non-

Division I opponents during the regular season. 2.1.3 Moving Games: Conference games may be moved to alternate or neutral locations if forced

to due to inclement weather or other extenuating circumstances. A Conference series may be moved to alternate days only for extenuating circumstances (exams, holiday, etc.). Once a visiting team has left its campus, games may not be moved to alternate days. Conference games may be moved to alternate days within a regularly scheduled series window in anticipation of bad weather (i.e., play a doubleheader on Saturday if bad weather is forecast on Sunday) and only by agreement of both competing athletics directors. Games that are not able to be played or completed during a regularly scheduled series window (i.e., Friday-Saturday-Sunday or Saturday-Sunday) may not be rescheduled for any other dates during the regular season.

2.2 Championship Determination: The Southern Conference champion shall be the team that finishes

with the best won-loss percentage in Conference games during the regular season. In the case that two or more schools finish with identical won-loss records or percentages, they shall be declared co-champions.

44

2.3 Regular-Season Finish: League rank in the regular season shall determine the seeding position of

teams into the Southern Conference Tournament. League rank shall be determined by each team’s won-loss record in all Conference games during the regular season. Ties for seeding purposes shall be broken using the Southern Conference tie-breaking system.

2.4 Playing Rules: Playing rules as adopted by the NCAA shall be in effect for all Southern Conference

games. 2.5 Game Length: All Southern Conference games shall be nine innings in length with the exception of

doubleheaders forced to be played due to inclement weather. If a game during a series is suspended it shall be carried over and completed the following day prior to the playing of any additional games of the series. If a game is not an official game at the time it is suspended, it shall be declared a halted game and shall be completed the following day prior to the beginning of additional games of the series.

2.6 Halted Games: Games that cannot be completed within a normal series window (i.e., Friday-

Saturday-Sunday or Saturday-Sunday) will be considered “rained out” and will not be made up. If the last game of a series is halted and is an official game according to NCAA Baseball Rules (i.e., five innings) it shall be considered an official game. No more than two game decisions will be allowed to take place on any day of a series. If the last game of a series is not completed and the score is tied after becoming a regulation game, it shall be a complete game/tie. The “tie game rule” shall be waived in all other circumstances.

2.7 Official Ball: The “official” ball of the Southern Conference shall be used in all Conference games. 2.8 Official Scorer: The home team shall provide an official scorer for all Southern Conference games.

The visiting team may provide a scorer for the purpose of improving the accuracy of data collection during a game. The home team scorer shall always be designated the official scorer.

2.9 NCAA Box Score: The home team shall be responsible for recording NCAA statistical information

for both teams and compiling an official NCAA box score. The home stats crew must send a completed final NCAA box score via e-mail to the Southern Conference office on the same day that a Southern Conference game is completed. The visiting head coach should receive a copy of the official NCAA box score after the conclusion of each Conference game.

2.10 Scouting Information: Southern Conference teams shall not share scouting information on other

Southern Conference teams with non-conference or other Conference schools. 2.11 Uniforms: For all Conference series, it is recommended that the home team wear light colored

uniforms and the visiting team wear uniforms of contrasting color on the first day of competition. The home team may wear a colored shirt and the visiting team a contrasting shirt on the following day(s). It is required that a Southern Conference logo be placed on each team’s uniform. The preferred location is the left or right sleeve of the jersey, facing the side, approximately three inches above the bottom of the sleeve. For a sleeveless jersey, the preferred location is on the left chest.

2.12 Complimentary Tickets: The home team shall provide the visiting team with 50 complimentary

tickets for each Conference game, provided that the home team is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival. In accordance with Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations, a buffer section of visiting team seats or empty space must be provided in the area immediately behind the visiting team dugout as it may be appropriate for each particular venue. The 50 complimentary tickets for the visiting team must be located within the buffer zone area. (Revised 5/13)

2.13 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for having all of its student-athletes

eligible prior to the season. All student-athlete eligibility profiles shall be transmitted to the Conference office prior to a school’s first day of competition. This information shall be filed and in accordance with the instructions of the Southern Conference Associate Commissioner for Compliance. If any questions arise, the Conference compliance administrator shall have the details on all student-athletes who are eligible for Conference regular-season and tournament competition.

45

2.14 Start Times: The home team shall set all game times and locations for a Conference series. Night games may not be required for the last day of a series. Games on Sunday shall normally not start prior to 1:00 p.m. Sunday games may start prior to 1:00 p.m. if a doubleheader is needed or both athletics directors of the competing teams are agreeable to starting prior to 1:00 p.m. Games may start after 6:00 p.m. only with the approval of the athletics directors of the competing teams. (Approved 10/11). For the resumption of halted games or a doubleheader on the last day of a series, the resumption or starting time will be agreed upon by the two coaches, and if no agreement is possible, the umpire crew chief for the series shall set the time. (Approved and Effective 6/10)

2.14.1 Between Games: For all Conference doubleheaders, 30 minutes will be used between

games unless otherwise agreed upon by the two head coaches and umpires in advance. 2.15 Weather Decisions: When weather or field conditions require a decision as to whether a game

shall be started, the following procedure shall be used: A. When the visiting team is not on site, the administration of the host institution shall

determine if the game shall start on the day and time scheduled; B. When both teams are on site, the head coach from the host school shall determine if

the game is to start, except for the second game of a doubleheader; C. Should bad weather or unfit conditions prevail during a game, the home plate umpire

shall be the sole judge as to suspension, resumption, or termination of play. The home plate umpire of the first game shall be the sole judge as to whether playing conditions permit the start of the second game of a double header.

2.16 Protests: Head coaches may file game protests in accordance with NCAA Baseball Rules. After

filing a protest, the head coach shall advise his athletics director, who shall then notify the Southern Conference Commissioner of the protest and circumstances involved. The protesting team must forward the protest to the Commissioner within 48 hours of the starting time of the protested game(s). The Commissioner and the Baseball Committee shall decide the course of action to be followed in resolving the protest with the use of NCAA Baseball Rules, precedents from baseball and other sports decisions, and Conference policies.

2.17 10-Run Rule: A Conference game may be stopped after seven innings if one team is ahead by at

least 10 runs. The 10-run rule may be employed only by mutual consent of both head coaches prior to the start of a game. In the event that the 10-run rule is employed, each team must play an equal number of innings.

3.0 Baseball Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Baseball Committee shall consist of at least one athletics directors, one faculty athletics representatives, one senior woman administrator and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties: 3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for baseball; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association as

situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting baseball in the

Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of baseball in the Southern Conference.

4.0 Head Coaches Meetings

4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year (either in-person or via conference call) to address all matters relating to the sport of baseball and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Baseball Committee and to the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association. This meeting shall normally take place in September.

46

5.0 Officiating

5.1 Assignments: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Baseball Officials, under the direction of the Southern Conference Commissioner and with the guidance of the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Officials Committee, shall establish a pool of officials for all Conference games and assign all officials. In accordance with NCAA policy, the Conference office shall maintain oversight of each school’s non-conference officiating assignments. The criteria for the oversight of non-conference officials is as follows: (a) no official may work more than 50 percent of a school’s non-conference games; (b) the Commissioner must approve each school’s non-conference officials’ schedule prior to the start of the season; (c) an agreement shall be signed between the conference and each school’s non-conference assignor; (d) each school’s non-conference assignor must attend the Conference’s annual officiating clinic.

5.2 Evaluation Procedure: An evaluation procedure shall be used to ensure the quality of officials. The

evaluation procedure shall include head coaches’ evaluations and evaluations by the Coordinator of Officials. Coaches shall review each official’s performance through a standard form. These forms shall be sent to the Coordinator of Officials on the first working day following a Conference series.

5.3 Officiating Fees: For 2014, the crew working a Conference series shall be paid a sum of $700 per

umpire. If an umpire departs his home for a Conference series without notification by the home institution of cancellation due to inclement weather or other extenuating circumstances, the institution is responsible for paying a full series fee to the official. If all umpires are notified of a cancellation before they depart for the game, the institution assumes no financial responsibility. If all umpires are notified of a cancellation before their departure from home, then the officials shall be paid a sum of $469 each if two games of a series are completed and $231 each if one game of a series is completed. The home institution shall provide the officials with two complimentary hotel rooms for one night for a two-day Conference series and two complimentary hotel rooms for two nights for a three-day Conference series.

6.0 Game Management

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the game management director

for all Southern Conference series’. It is suggested that the game management director visit briefly with the officials and the visiting head coach prior to a series to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability. The home athletics director and/or game management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.

6.1.1 Game Management Provisions: The following provisions shall be provided to the visiting

team by the home team: A. Bench: One 10-gallon cooler of water, one ice chest with ice and bags, two sleeves of

cups, bench towels, one biohazard box. B. Dressing Room: A dressing room with showers if requested in advance. Shower towels

as needed if requested in advance. 7.0 Public Address Announcer

7.1 Only the designated public address announcer may use a microphone during a Southern Conference game. The public address announcer is responsible for whatever is said over the PA system. The primary function of the announcer is to give specific information to the fans, not to incite them by unnecessary inflection of voice beyond the pre-game introduction of the home team.

8.0 Pre-Game Format

8.1 The home institution shall provide “official” Conference baseballs to be used during Conference games. The host institution shall provide the visiting head coach with a pre-game itinerary and/or time line upon the visiting team’s arrival on site. The visiting team shall be given equal access to batting cages, field space, pitching machines, machine balls, screens and tees as the home team. This policy applies equally to indoor and outdoor facilities.

8.1.1 Time Line: Pre-game activities during a Conference series shall normally adhere to the

following schedule (in order of occurrence). The order of occurrence may be changed by mutual consent of both head coaches.

47

A. 40 minutes of visiting team batting; B. 40 minutes of home team batting; C. 10 minutes of visiting team infield; D. 10 minutes of home team infield; E. 15 minutes to line field; F. 5 minutes of introductions.

9.0 Cheerleaders, Pep Bands, Dance Teams, Mascots

9.1 Cheerleader Responsibilities: Cheerleaders should be encouraged to help maintain good sportsmanship among the students and others in attendance. The head cheerleader should be ready at all times to instigate the most popular cheer in case an unpleasant situation should occur.

9.2 Cheerleader Restrictions: Megaphones may never be turned toward the playing area. Amplified

microphones are prohibited. No pyramids may be performed that are more than two tiers (persons) high. No flips may be conducted other than those made from the ground. Mini-trampolines may not be used. Cheerleaders should never be located behind an opposing team’s dugout.

9.3 Pep Band Restrictions: Bands are allowed to play only during pre-game, between games, post

game and between innings. 9.4 Dance Teams and Mascots: Regulations as they apply to cheerleaders also apply to dance teams

and mascots. 9.5 Travel Restrictions: Cheerleading squads, pep bands and dance teams may travel during baseball

season only on weekends. 10.0 Artificial Noisemakers: Artificial noisemakers (air horns, electronic amplifiers, whistles, etc.) are not

permissible in Southern Conference venues except for those amplifiers that are part of the official home or visiting team pep band or cheerleading squad. Such instruments shall be removed from the facility when discovered. “Thunder sticks” shall be allowed if distributed as part of a game-day promotion conducted by the home institution. (Effective 5/09)

11.0 Signs

11.1 Signs of a derogatory nature directed towards an individual opponent, visiting team or game official

are not permitted in Southern Conference venues. It is the responsibility of the home institution to ensure that such signs are immediately removed.

12.0 Motorized Vehicles, Explosive Devices, Live Mascots

12.1 The home athletics director shall decide the policy regarding the use of explosive devices (cannons, rifles, rocket launchers, etc.), live mascots (horses, birds, etc.), and motorized vehicles in their facility. Visiting athletics directors need to request permission for the use of these items at least two weeks in advance and approval or disapproval of the request must be given immediately by the home athletics director.

13.0 Conduct

13.1 Coaches’ Conduct: All head and assistant coaches are to conduct themselves in such a manner during a game as to ensure or promote good crowd control. They also are responsible for the conduct of the players and other staff on the bench. Coaches (head and assistant) must follow Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations at all times.

13.2 Ejection/Suspension Policy: A coach removed from a game for any reason shall be suspended

from his team’s next Conference or non-conference game (i.e., if a coach is ejected from a Conference game the suspension will apply to the next Conference game, if the coach is ejected from a non-conference game, the suspension will apply to the next non-conference game). A player removed from a game for any reason shall immediately be suspended from the next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-game suspension, a third ejection a four-game suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-game suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-game suspension.

48

13.3 Unsportsmanlike Behavior: Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct including but

not limited to those described below, shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference.

13.3.1 Fighting: Any attempt by a person to strike an opponent or contest participant in a combative

manner unrelated to the sport involved or any act that insights an opponent to retaliate by acting in a similar manner shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

13.3.2 Aggressive Behavior: The use of obscene gestures, profane language, or the display of

hostile action towards officials, spectators, or opponents shall be described as unsportsmanlike. 13.3.3 Ejection: The removal by an official from a competitive sport activity shall require the ejected

participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately. 13.3.4 Suspension: A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the vicinity of the

contest suspended from during the time period beginning one hour prior to the scheduled contest until the conclusion of the contest. Suspension does not affect practice opportunities outside of the above time limitations.

13.3.5 Vicinity of Contest: The immediate area/site of the competition extended to include any point

or place from which the ejected/suspended individual could observe, supervise, or participate in any manner in the contest from which the participant is being ejected or suspended.

13.3.6 Competitive Conditions: The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a contest

that is safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

14.0 Regular-Season Awards

14.1 The following awards shall be provided by the Conference and distributed to the appropriate institution following the conclusion of the Conference regular season:

14.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy, presented to the team with the best won-loss

percentage in Conference games; 14.1.2 All-Conference Team: Twenty-four plaques (12 first-team plaques and 12 second-team

plaques) presented to the members of the All-Conference team. The All-Conference team shall be selected by position including two starting pitchers, one relief pitcher and a designated hitter and voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players; (Clarified 06/09)

14.1.3 Player of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Player of the Year. The

Player of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

14.1.4 Pitcher of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Pitcher of the Year. The

Pitcher of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

14.1.5 Freshman of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Freshman of the Year.

The Freshman of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

14.1.6 Coach of the Year: One plaque presented to the person voted Coach of the Year. The

Coach of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office;

14.1.7 Players of the Week: Eight certificates presented to student-athletes named Player of the

Week during the regular season. The Player of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office;

49

14.1.8 Pitchers of the Week: Eight certificates presented to student-athletes named Pitcher of the Week during the regular season. The Pitcher of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office;

14.1.9 Players of the Month: A Player of the Month award will be selected at the end of every

month during the season. The Player of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office;

14.1.10 Pitchers of the Month: A Pitcher of the Month award will be selected at the end of every

month during the season. The Pitcher of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office;

14.1.11 All-Freshman Team: An All-Freshman Team shall be named consisting of 12 freshmen,

true freshmen, red shirt or otherwise. The members will be selected without regard to position. The freshman receiving the highest number of votes will be named as the Freshman of the Year. Balloting will be done as it is for All-Conference voting. (Approved 10/08)

15.0 Two-Year Moratorium of Approved Sport Regulations: Sport regulations approved by the membership

must be implemented for two full seasons before they may be considered for amendment, except in instances where changes are made to the regulation on a national level (i.e. an NCAA rule or a national governing body policy). Coaches’ recommendations that are not approved by the membership are subject to the moratorium and may not be reconsidered by the membership for two years. A 75% vote of the athletic directors may overrule the two-year moratorium on a case-by-case basis. (Approved and Effective 6/10)

Conference Tournament Regulations 1.0 Tournament Format

1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a Conference tournament shall be conducted to determine the Southern Conference Tournament champion and the recipient of the league’s automatic bid to participate in the NCAA Tournament. All teams that are eligible to compete will participate in the Conference tournament. The tournament will be conducted over six days. The tournament format shall be designed to accommodate a single championship game on the final day of the tournament for television broadcast purposes. If the Conference tournament is not completed due to inclement weather or other extenuating circumstances, the highest seed remaining in the tournament shall receive the NCAA Tournament automatic bid.

2.0 Tournament Dates: The Southern Conference Tournament will be conducted prior to the NCAA

Tournament on the dates recommended by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association. The dates for the 2014 tournament shall be May 20-25.

3.0 Tournament Location

3.1 Bid Process: The location of the tournament shall be determined by a bid process conducted by the Baseball Committee. All bids shall be reviewed and voted on by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association and approved by the Southern Conference Executive Committee.

3.1.1 2014 Tournament Location: The site of the 2014 Southern Conference Tournament shall be

Joseph P. Riley Jr. Park in Charleston, S.C. Alternate sites may be used during the tournament in the event of inclement weather or other extenuating circumstances.

3.1.2 Future Tournament Locations: Joseph P. Riley Jr. Park shall also serve as the site of the

2015 Southern Conference Tournament. The 2016 and 2017 Southern Conference Tournaments are scheduled to be played at Fluor Field in Greenville, S.C.

4.0 Tournament Schedule

4.1 Game Times: All tournament game times shall be set by the Southern Conference Baseball Committee and approved by the Athletics Directors Association. Games may not start before announced times.

50

4.1.1 2014 Tournament Schedule: The bracket and game times shall be set by the Baseball Committee.

4.1.2 Tournament Unable to Reach Conclusion: If necessary, it shall be acceptable for a team

to record three decisions on the final day of the tournament. If it is determined that the tournament cannot be played to completion, the highest seed remaining in the tournament will be declared the champion and receive the Conference’s automatic bid to the NCAA Championships. If the tournament is not able to be played at all, the regular season champion shall advance to the NCAA Championships. All decisions relating to inclement weather shall be made by the Baseball Committee.

5.0 Tournament Administration

5.1 Baseball Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Baseball Committee shall provide general oversight of the tournament. The Baseball Committee shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.

5.2 Games Committee: A Games Committee shall be appointed for the tournament consisting of

Baseball Committee members on site, the Athletics Director of the host institution or his or her designee, the Southern Conference championships administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), the Tournament Director, and the Umpire in Chief. The Games Committee shall:

A. Ensure that the tournament is conducted in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Southern Conference as contained in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations;

B. Make decisions regarding situations that occur where resolution is not covered in the rules and regulations of the NCAA or the Southern Conference as stated in the Tournament Manual or these sport regulations;

C. Inspect the playing facilities prior to the start of the event.

5.3 Tournament Director: The host institution for the tournament shall appoint a tournament director who, along with the Southern Conference staff liaison, shall perform the following functions under the direction of the Baseball Committee:

A. Serve as supervisor of the tournament; B. Plan and coordinate all activities of the tournament in conjunction with the Southern

Conference Baseball Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant tournament information to all coaches, athletics directors, chief

executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, senior woman administrators, and other necessary personnel of competing institutions;

D. Coordinate and supervise the activities of the officials; E. Oversee servicing the needs of the participants and spectators as prescribed in the

tournament manual; F. Delegate duties and responsibilities to tournament personnel; G. Secure a certified trainer and other medical personnel for the tournament.

5.4 Media Coordinator: The tournament director shall appoint a tournament media coordinator, who

shall perform the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the activities of the stats crew and make sure that statistics are made

available to all media after each game. D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the tournament; E. Be responsible for all-tournament balloting; F. Provide seating charts for the media on each day of the tournament; G. Coordinate the installation of phone lines as necessary for radio, television and print

media in the press box and in other media working areas; H. Make sure that all teams and electronic media are provided with pre-game itineraries

and/or time lines at least one hour prior to each game; I. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site.

5.5 Medical Personnel: All medical staff for the tournament shall be appointed by the tournament

director, who shall ensure that the following occurs: A. That a certified trainer is on site for all practices and present at all games; B. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on call for all games;

51

C. That an EMS unit is on site at all times; D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all tournament events;

F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all

head athletic trainers and head coaches prior to their arrival at the tournament site.

5.6 Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Baseball Officials, working in conjunction with the Baseball Committee shall perform the following duties relative to the Conference tournament:

A. Assign a pool of officials to work the tournament and make individual game assignments. The pool of officials should include the top rated officials as rated by the Conference head coaches whenever possible. Coaches do not possess scratch power when it comes to the assigning of any official;

B. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with officials; C. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with press box personnel

5.7 Additional Tournament Personnel: The following additional personnel shall be appointed by the

tournament director and/or tournament media coordinator: A. Stats crew; B. Public address announcer; C. Official scorer; D. Scoreboard and matrix board operators; E. Ball or bat persons (at least one for each team); F. In addition, Southern Conference Baseball Committee members (excluding the head

coach’s representatives) may be assigned specific duties as necessary.

5.8 Promotions Director: The tournament director shall appoint a promotions director that ensures that a marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness and ticket sales to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the tournament is being played in.

6.0 Tournament Manual

6.1 The Southern Conference staff liaison shall send a tournament manual to all Conference chief executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, athletics directors, senior woman administrators, head coaches and sports information directors at least one month prior to the tournament. The following information shall be contained in the manual:

A. Facilities information; B. Telephone numbers and addresses of key tournament personnel; C. Local maps; D. Dates, times and location of the tournament and related activities; E. Information on team and institutional credentials and parking passes; F. A tournament itinerary; G. Medical and training information; H. Media information; I. Information on hospitality and social functions; J. Names and responsibilities of Local Organizing Committee personnel; K. Names and responsibilities of host institution personnel; L. A tournament emergency plan and emergency telephone numbers.

7.0 Tournament Procedures

7.1 Seeding: The seeds for the tournament shall be determined based on each team’s regular-season Conference finish. In the event of a tie for a particular seed, the seed will be determined as follows:

A. If one team has defeated the other team a greater number of times, that team shall be awarded the higher seeded position;

B. If the tied teams split games, the higher position will be awarded to the team that has the best won-loss record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie;

C. If each team has the same record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie, then the won-loss records against the next highest seeded team not involved in the tie would be considered and so on down the line until the tie is broken;

D. If the records are the same against all teams, then the seeded position would be determined by a toss of the coin by the Southern Conference Commissioner;

52

E. In the event of a three-way tie, the won-loss record of the tied teams against each other is first considered;

F. If the teams are still tied, the team’s record against the next highest seeded team after the three-way tie is considered, and so forth until the tie is broken;

G. If there is still a tie, the seeded position of the teams will be determined by a draw conducted by the Southern Conference Commissioner;

H. For multiple ties larger than a three-way tie, the same procedure will be applied as used to break a three-way tie; and

I. For all multiple ties, the tie is broken by first deciding the highest seeded team involved in the tie before deciding other seeding positions.

7.2. Ticket Prices: Prices for the Southern Conference Tournament shall be established by the host

institution and approved by the Baseball Committee.

7.2.1 Complimentary Tickets: Schools shall receive no complimentary tickets for the 2014 Southern Conference Tournament.

7.3 Game Balls: The “official” baseball of the Conference shall be used during all tournament games.

The Conference office shall be responsible for ordering a minimum of 60 dozen new balls for use during the tournament.

7.4 Playing Rules: The playing rules for the Southern Conference Tournament shall conform to those

rules adopted for NCAA Division I Baseball and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations.

7.5 Uniforms: For all tournament games, the designated home team shall wear white or light colored

uniforms. The designated visiting team shall wear grey or contrasting colored uniforms. If a team plays consecutive games, then that team shall wear the same uniforms in the second game and their opponents should wear a contrasting color. All competitors must wear exclusively the official uniform of their institution in competition, warm-up and during the post-tournament awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institutions’ official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributors normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., gloves, shoes) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.

7.6 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for submitting a list of competing

student-athletes to the Conference compliance administrator no later than three (3) days prior to the start of the tournament. The Conference office will verify the eligibility of these student-athletes and will notify an institution if a problem arises with any of its student-athletes. Student-athletes not deemed eligible to compete may not be in uniform during the Conference tournament.

7.7 Head Coaches Conference Call: A Southern Conference head coaches conference call will be

held prior to the start of competition. The Baseball Committee Chair will conduct the call and review information pertinent to the tournament. The head coach of each institution is required to be on the call. Head coaches who do not participate on the call are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Baseball Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.

7.8 Pre-Game Format: The following items address the issue of pre-game format:

A. Games shall not begin prior to their announced start times; B. Each team shall be allowed a minimum of 10 minutes of warm-up time on the field

prior to their game unless the grounds are too wet and work is necessary to make it suitable for play. The home team shall always take infield practice first;

C. Batting practice shall be conducted on practice fields or in batting cages, but shall not be conducted on the tournament field;

D. A national anthem shall be played prior to the first game each day and prior to the last game on each of the first two days;

7.8.1 Player Introductions: Pre-game player introductions for the tournament shall be as follows:

53

A. Prior to each team’s first game in the tournament, and prior to the championship game, all players and coaches shall be introduced to the crowd. For all other games, only the starting lineups will be announced;

B. As each player is introduced for their first game and for the championship game, participants will line up on the foul line nearest to their dugout as they are introduced.

7.9 Squad Size Restrictions: On the field, including the practice field, bullpen, bench and dugout, each

team is limited to four official coaches in uniform (head coach, assistant coaches, restricted coach and volunteer coach), 27 eligible student-athletes in uniform, and undergraduate assistant coaches. Only uniformed personnel, including coaches and eligible student-athletes, may be permitted between the white lines and in the bullpens. Other non-uniformed personnel (up to the maximum limit of 35 individuals) in the dugout should be performing official team functions that they have performed during the season. Non-uniformed personnel in proper attire may participate in pregame warm-ups. Once a game begins, the athletics trainer or manager is permitted on the field only to perform his/her appropriate duty (e.g., warming up a pitcher is not considered an appropriate duty). (Approved 10/09)

7.10 Practice Policies: It is the policy of the Southern Conference to make as many practice

opportunities as possible available to competing teams during the Southern Conference Tournament. For all practices, teams will be assigned practice times based upon their regular-season finish (i.e., higher seeded teams will have first choice of practice times). The host institution shall secure off-site practice facilities for teams to utilize during the tournament.

7.11 Home Team Determination: The higher seeded team shall be the home team for the first two

rounds of the tournament. After that, the home team shall be determined by using the following formula (in order):

A. The institution that has been the home team the fewer number of times during the tournament;

B. If two teams are equal in the number of times they have been the home team, but unequal in the number of times they have been visitor, then the team that has been the visitor more times shall be designated the home team;

C. If two teams are equal in the number of times they have been home and visitor, then the team that was the visitor in its preceding game shall be the home team;

D. If two teams are equal in the number of times they have been home and visitor and each team was the visitor in its preceding game, then, if the teams have met previously in the tournament, the visitor from the preceding game between the teams shall be the home team for the game in question;

E. If the above procedures do not resolve the matter, the home team shall be determined by lot;

7.12 Dugouts: The home team shall occupy the third-base dugout. A team playing back-to-back games

shall have the option of moving dugouts or remaining in their present dugout.

7.12.1 Dugout Supplies: The host institution shall provide towels, ice, cups, water and isotonics in each dugout during the tournament.

7.13 Media Policies: All coaches and student-athletes shall be available for interviews with the media

following each game after a 10-minute cooling off period has been observed.

7.13.1 Cooling Off Period: The cooling off period will begin when all coaches and players have left the dugout following a game. The cooling off period will not be extended to allow coaches or players to do interviews with a broadcasting television network. In the event that these interviews take place, the cooling off period will begin when the majority of a team’s players and coaches have left the dugout.

7.13.2 Dressing Rooms: The dressing rooms (if utilized) of teams competing in the Southern

Conference Tournament will be open to all media members following the 10-minute cooling off period.

7.14 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Baseball Rules. As

per the policy of the Collegiate Commissioner’s Association, no gifts shall be provided for officials that work the Southern Conference Tournament.

54

8.0 Tournament Awards

8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the championship game, a tournament awards ceremony shall be held on the infield. The head coach and student-athletes of the winning team shall remain in their dugout for the awards ceremony. The head coach and student-athletes of the losing team shall have the option of immediately exiting the field following the game or remaining for the awards ceremony. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony:

8.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the

winning team; 8.1.2 Runner-up Trophy: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the runner-up

team; 8.1.3 All-Tournament Team: Twelve plaques presented to members of the All-Tournament team.

The All-Tournament team will be selected by position, including two starting pitchers, a relief pitcher and a designated hitter, and shall be selected by a committee of voters appointed by the Tournament Media Coordinator. The balloting shall be conducted by the Tournament Media Coordinator; (Approved 10/08)(Clarified 06/09)

8.1.4 Most Outstanding Player: One plaque presented to the player selected as the Most

Outstanding Player of the tournament. The Most Outstanding Player shall be selected by a committee of voters appointed by the Tournament Media Coordinator. The balloting shall be conducted by the Tournament Media Coordinator;

8.1.5 NCAA Automatic Bid: One certificate presented to the athletics director of the winning

school, signifying their institution’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament.

8.2 Other Awards: Other awards presented in conjunction with the Southern Conference Tournament are as follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Twenty-five individual plaques will be presented

to the head coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the championship team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.

9.0 Institutional Passes

9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Hospitality passes for use during the Southern Conference Tournament, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Baseball Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director.

9.2 VIP Parking Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Parking passes for use during the

Southern Conference Tournament. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Baseball Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director.

9.3 Team Bus Parking Passes: Each competing team shall be awarded bus passes as needed for use

during the Southern Conference Tournament. The bus passes shall be distributed by the Tournament Director and are non-transferable.

55

2013-14 Men’s Basketball


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor men’s basketball as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University The Citadel Davidson College Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University Samford University University of North Carolina at Greensboro University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Western Carolina University Wofford College


2.1 Scheduling: NCAA policies regarding scheduling requirements are the official policies of the Southern Conference.

2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: Each school shall play six other members of the conference twice

and four other members of the conference once during the regular season for a 16-game conference schedule. The Conference office shall produce a league master schedule prior to the start of each season. Conference games shall normally be played on Thursdays and Saturdays. No changes shall be made to the conference master schedule without approval from the conference office. Changes are normally allowed only to accommodate institutional academic restrictions, to facilitate non-conference scheduling opportunities, or due to pre-existing facility conflicts. Game start times and locations shall be the prerogative of the home institution. (Updated 8/13)

2.1.2 Non-Division I Opponents: Each Southern Conference school may play a maximum of four

NCAA non-Division I opponents during the regular season. (Effective 3/13)

2.2 Championship Determination: The Southern Conference champion shall be the team that finishes with the best won-loss percentage in Conference games during the regular season. In the case that two or more schools finish with identical won-loss records, they shall be declared co-champions. (Updated 8/13)

2.3 Regular-Season Finish: League rank in the regular season shall determine the seeding position

of teams into the Southern Conference Tournament. League rank shall be determined by each team’s won-loss record in all Conference games during the regular season. Ties for seeding purposes shall be broken using the Southern Conference tie-breaking system. (Updated 8/13)

2.4 Playing Rules: Playing rules as adopted by the NCAA shall be in effect for all Southern

Conference games.

2.5 Official Basketball: The “official” basketball of the Southern Conference shall be used in all Conference games unless a school has notified the Conference office of its desire to utilize a different ball prior to the start of the season.

2.6 Official Scorer: The home team shall provide an official scorer for all Southern Conference

games. The visiting team may provide a scorer for the purpose of improving the accuracy of data collection during a game. The home team scorer shall always be designated the official book.

56

2.7 NCAA Box Score: The home team shall be responsible for recording NCAA statistical information for both teams and compiling an official NCAA box score. The home institution must send a completed final NCAA box score via e-mail to the Southern Conference office on the same day that a Southern Conference game is completed. The visiting head coach should receive a copy of the official NCAA box score at halftime and after each Conference game.


Southern Conference teams with non-conference or other Conference schools.

2.9 Film Exchange: Each Southern Conference institution shall exchange conference game films via the conference’s internet video exchange program. All conference and non-conference regular season games will be available on an open exchange basis. Game files must be uploaded in a DVD-R format. When games are filmed, the entire game should be filmed, including dead ball situations. All videos will have audio and should run continuously through dead ball situations. Videos can be stopped during a timeout but must be restarted after the first horn sounds. The scoreboard should be shown at all timeouts and prior to all first free throw attempts. Conference game videos cannot be shared with a non-conference team. (Revised and Effective 09/09)

2.9.1 Uploading Deadlines: For conference games, game files must be uploaded by the home

team by 10:00 a.m. (Local time) of the following day. For NON-conference games played on the road, game films must be uploaded within 24 hours after returning to campus. NON-conference home games must be uploaded by 10:00 a.m. (Local time) of the following day. (Approved and Effective 09/09).

2.9.2 On-Site DVDs: After conference games, the home team shall provide the visiting team with a

DVD copy of the game video prior to the visiting team leaving the site. If there is a problem with the copy, or the home team cannot duplicate DVDs, then the visiting team will be provided with the original and shall copy it and return the original to the home team. (Approved and Effective 07/09).

2.10 Uniforms: For all Conference games, the home team must wear light colored uniforms and the

visiting team must wear contrasting dark uniforms. It is required that a Southern Conference logo be placed on each team’s uniform or shorts as permissible by NCAA Rules. The preferred location is high on the left side or high on the right side on the game jersey. (Revised 4/12)


tickets for each Conference game. In accordance with Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations, a buffer section of visiting team seats or empty space must be provided in the area immediately behind the visiting team bench as it may be appropriate for each particular venue. The 50 complimentary tickets for the visiting team must be located within the buffer zone area. (Revised 5/13)

2.12 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for having all of its student-athletes

eligible prior to the season. All student-athlete eligibility profiles shall be transmitted to the Conference office prior to a school’s first day of competition. This information shall be filed and in accordance with the instructions of the Southern Conference Associate Commissioner for Compliance. If any questions arise, the Conference compliance administrator shall have the details on all student-athletes who are eligible for Conference regular-season and tournament competition.

2.13 Electronic Media Timeouts: In all Conference games involving a commercial radio or television

broadcast, NCAA electronic media timeout policies shall be utilized.

2.14 Pre-Game Format: The court area shall be available at least one hour (with the exception of doubleheaders where 30 minutes shall be required) prior to a game to allow for warm-ups. Warm-ups may be conducted prior to one hour if the court is available. The court must be made available to both teams for the same duration of time. The home institution shall provide at least six “official” Conference basketballs (or other brand of game ball if a school is using a different ball during the season) to both teams for use during warm-ups. Ball persons should be reminded to extend the same courtesies to the visiting team as they do for the home team during warm-ups. The host institution shall provide the visiting head coach with a pre-game itinerary and/or time line upon the visiting team’s arrival on site.

57

2.15 Practices and Shootarounds: One month before each Conference game, the home team will confirm an available practice and shootaround time to the visiting team. If there should be changes necessitated by the availability of facilities that is beyond the control of the host institution, revision to the stated times would be acceptable. It is to be understood that times cannot be changed for the mere convenience of the home team. Practice and shootaround times will be confirmed through use of a standard form administered through the home game management director and the visiting head coach.

2.16 Regular-Season Use of Conference Tournament Venue: Schools shall be limited to one

practice or shootaround at the venue of the Conference tournament for each game it is scheduled to play at that site during the regular season. No practices or shootarounds shall take place at the Conference tournament venue that is not connected to a scheduled contest. (NOTE: This regulation would not apply if the tournament venue is the home court of a conference institution).

3.0 Men’s Basketball Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Men’s Basketball Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one faculty athletics representatives, one senior woman administrator and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for men’s basketball; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association as

situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting men’s basketball

in the Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of men’s basketball in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year (either in-person or via conference call) to address all matters relating to the sport of men’s basketball and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Men’s Basketball Committee and/or the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association.

5.0 Officiating

5.1 Coordinator of Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Men’s Basketball Officials,

under the direction of the Southern Conference Commissioner and with the guidance of the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Officials Committee, shall establish a pool of officials for all Southern Conference games and assign all officials.


evaluation procedure shall include head coaches’ evaluations and evaluations by the coordinator of officials. Coaches shall review each official’s performance through a standard form. The form should be sent to the coordinator of officials on the first working day following a Southern Conference game.

5.3 Officiating Fees: At the discretion of the Coordinator of Officials and the Commissioner, officials will

be paid a flat fee of either $1,200, $950 or $900 per game for all regular season games during the 2013-14 season. Officials shall be paid a flat fee of $600 for working exhibition games. (Revised 10/11)

6.0 Game Management

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the game management director for all Southern Conference games. It is suggested that the game management director visit briefly with the game officials and the visiting head coach prior to the game to answer any questions and

58

inform them of his or her availability during the game. The home athletics director and/or game management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations. 6.1.1 Game Management Provisions: The following provisions shall be provided to the visiting

team from the home team: A. Sideline: One 10-gallon cooler of water, one three-gallon cooler of ice with bags, one

biohazard box, one sleeve of cups, 12 bench towels. B. Dressing Room: One 3-gallon cooler of water, one cooler chest full of isotonics (24

drinks), one sleeve of cups, bath towels (as requested) and soap. C. Practice: One five-gallon cooler of water, one five-gallon cooler of ice with bags, one

sleeve of cups, bench towels. 7.0 Public Address Announcer




8.2 Cheerleader Restrictions: Megaphones may never be turned toward the playing court or banged

on the floor while a game is in progress. Amplified microphones are prohibited. No pyramids may be performed that are more than two tiers (persons) high. No flips may be conducted other than those made from the floor. Mini-trampolines may not be used.

8.3 Pep Band Restrictions: Bands are allowed to play only during pre-game, halftime, post game and

during timeouts. 8.4 Dance Teams and Mascots: Regulations as they apply to cheerleaders also apply to dance teams

and mascots. 8.5 Travel Restrictions: Cheerleading squads, pep bands and dance teams may travel during

basketball season only on weekends. 9.0 Conduct


9.2 Ejection/Suspension Policy: A coach or player removed from a contest for any reason shall be

immediately suspended from their teams’ next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-game suspension, a third ejection a four-game suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-game suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-game suspension.

9.3 Unsportsmanlike Behavior: Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct, including but

not limited to those described below, shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference.

9.3.1 Fighting. Any attempt by a person to strike an opponent or contest participant in a combative


59

9.3.2 Aggressive Behavior. The use of obscene gestures, profane language, or the display of hostile action towards officials, spectators, or opponents shall be described as unsportsmanlike.

9.3.3 Ejection. The removal by an official from a competitive sport activity shall require the ejected

participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately. 9.3.4 Suspension. A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the vicinity of the


9.3.5 Vicinity of Contest. The immediate area/site of the competition extended to include any point or

place from which the ejected/suspended individual could observe, supervise, or participate in any manner in the contest from which the participant is being ejected or suspended.

9.3.6 Competitive Conditions. The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a contest that

is safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior. 10.0 Regular-Season Awards


10.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy, presented to the team with the best won-loss

percentage in Conference games (in case of a tie, all tied teams shall receive a trophy); 10.1.2 All-Conference Team: Ten plaques presented to the members of the All-Conference

Team. The All-Conference Team shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players;

10.1.3 Player of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Player of the Year. The

Player of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;


The Freshman of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

10.1.5 Defensive Player of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Defensive Player

of the Year. The Defensive Player of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the Conference office shall conduct the balloting. Coaches are not allowed to voter for their own player;



10.1.7 Players of the Week: Twelve certificates presented to student-athletes named Player of

the Week during the regular season. The Player of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office;

10.1.8 All-Freshman Team: Five certificates presented to student-athletes named to the All-

Freshman Team. The All-Freshman Team shall be voted on by the men’s basketball head coaches and balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players;

10.1.9 Player of the Month: A Player of the Month award shall be selected at the end of every

month during the season. The Player of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office;

60

10.2 Sports Media Association Awards: In addition to the above mentioned awards, the Southern Conference Sports Media Association shall select a first team All-Conference Team (five members), a second team All-Conference Team (five members), a third team All-Conference Team (five members), a Player of the Year, a Freshman of the Year, and a Coach of the Year upon the conclusion of the regular season. The Southern Conference Sports Media Association is responsible for producing and mailing plaques or certificates to commemorate these awards.




1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a single-elimination Conference tournament shall be conducted to determine the Southern Conference Champion and the recipient of the league’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament. All eligible teams will participate in the Conference tournament. The tournament will be conducted over four days.

2.0 Tournament Dates

The Southern Conference Tournament will be conducted prior to the NCAA Tournament on the dates recommended by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association. The traditional date of the Southern Conference Tournament is two weeks prior to the start of the NCAA Tournament.


3.1 Bid Process: The location of the tournament shall be determined by a bid process conducted by the Men’s Basketball Committee. All bids shall be reviewed and voted on by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association and approved by the Southern Conference Executive Committee.

3.1.1 2014 Tournament Location: The site of the 2014 Southern Conference Tournament shall

be the U.S. Cellular Center in Asheville, N.C. 3.1.2 Future Tournament Locations: The site of the 2015, 2016 and 2017 Southern

Conference Tournaments shall be the U.S. Cellular Center in Asheville, N.C. 3.1.3 Use of Tournament Venue: During the regular season, schools shall be limited to one

practice or shootaround at the Conference tournament venue for each game it is scheduled to play at the venue during the regular season. No practices or shootarounds should take place at the tournament venue that is not part of a scheduled contest. (NOTE: This regulation would not apply if the tournament venue is the home of a conference institution).


4.1 Game Times: All tournament game times shall be set by the Southern Conference Men’s

Basketball Committee and approved by the Athletics Directors Association. Games may not start before announced times.

4.1.1 2014 Tournament Schedule: The 2014 Southern Conference Tournament shall be played

March 7-10. The bracket and game times shall be set by the Men’s Basketball Committee. 5.0 Tournament Administration

5.1 Men’s Basketball Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Men’s Basketball

Committee shall provide general oversight of the tournament.

61

5.1.1 Men’s Basketball Committee Responsibilities: The Men’s Basketball Committee shall: A. Conduct the tournament in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Southern

Conference as contained in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations;

B. Discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations, and;


5.2 Tournament Director: The Southern Conference Senior Associate Commissioner shall serve as the director of the Men’s Basketball Tournament, and shall perform the following duties under the direction of the Men’s Basketball Committee:

A. Serve as supervisor of the tournament; B. Plan and coordinate all activities of the tournament in conjunction with the Men’s

Basketball Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant tournament information to all coaches, athletics directors, chief

executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, senior woman administrators and other necessary personnel of competing institutions;


tournament manual; F. Delegate duties and responsibilities to other Conference office staff members; G. Secure a certified trainer and other medical personnel for the tournament.

5.3 Media Coordinator: The tournament media coordinator shall be the Southern Conference Assistant

Commissioner for Media Relations. The media coordinator shall perform the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the activities of the stats crew and make sure that statistics are made

available to all media and teams at halftime and after each game; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the tournament; E. Be responsible for all-tournament balloting; F. Provide seating charts for the media on each day of the tournament; G. Coordinate the installation of phone lines as necessary for radio, television and print

media on press row and in other media working areas; H. Make sure that all teams and electronic media are provided with pre-game itineraries

and/or time lines at least one hour prior to each game; I. Organize the Conference sports information directors’ coordination of the tournament

media operation.

5.4 Medical Personnel: All medical staff for the tournament shall be appointed by the tournament director, who shall ensure that the following occurs:

A. That a certified trainer is present for all practices and at all games; B. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on site at all games; C. That EMS services are available during all games; D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all tournament events; F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all

head athletic trainers and head coaches prior to their arrival at the tournament site. 5.5 Coordinator of Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Men’s Basketball Officials shall

perform the following duties relative to the Conference tournament: A. Assign a pool of officials to work the tournament and make individual game

assignments. The pool of officials should include a minimum of six of the top officials as rated by the Conference head coaches and six additional officials assigned at the discretion of the Coordinator of Officials;

B. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with officials; C. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with scorer’s table

personnel; D. Assign a standby official for all tournament games.


tournament director and/or tournament media coordinator: A. Stats crew;

62

B. Public address announcer; C. Official scorer; D. Clock, scoreboard and matrix board operators; E. Ball persons (at least two at each end of the floor); F. Dressing room attendants; G. Band/cheerleader coordinator; H. Television timeout coordinator; I. In addition, Men’s Basketball Committee members (excluding the head coach

representatives), athletics directors and sports information directors may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the event.

5.7 Promotions Director: The tournament director shall appoint a promotions director that ensures that

a marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness and ticket sales to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the tournament is being played in.


6.1 The tournament director shall send a tournament manual to all Conference chief executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, athletics directors, senior woman administrators, head coaches and sports information directors at least one month prior to the tournament. The following information shall be contained in the manual:



7.1 Seeding: The seeds for the tournament shall be determined based on each team’s regular-season Conference finish. In the event of a tie for a particular seed, the seed will be determined as follows: :


B. If each team has won the same number of games against each other, the higher position will be awarded to the team that has the best won-loss record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie (example, Team A is 1-0 against the highest seeded team not involved and team B is 1-1, Team A receives higher seed);

C. If each team has the same won-loss percentage against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie, then the won-loss percentage against the next highest seeded team would be considered and so on down the line until the tie is broken;

D. If the won-loss percentages are the same against all teams, then the tie would be broken by comparing each team’s Ratings Percentage Index (RPI) as published by RPIRatings.com after the completion of the regular season;

E. In the event of a three-way tie, the won-loss percentage of the tied teams against each other is first considered;

F. If the teams are still tied, the teams’ won-loss percentage against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie would be considered, and so forth until the tie is broken;

G. If there is still a tie, then the tie would be broken by comparing each team’s Ratings Percentage Index (RPI) as published by RPIRatings.com after the completion of the regular season;


I. For all multiple ties, the tie is broken by first deciding the highest seeded team involved in the tie before other seeded positions are determined;

63

J. For ties to determine the No. 1 seed from each division, the head to head records of the tied teams are first considered;

7.2 School Ticket Responsibilities: Each member institution shall be responsible for $12,000 worth of

book tickets or individual session tickets to the Southern Conference Tournament.

7.2.1 Ticket Prices: Ticket prices for the 2014 Southern Conference Tournament shall be set by the Men’s and Women’s Basketball Committees and approved by the Athletics Directors Association.

7.2.2 Ticket Allocation: Schools shall indicate to the Conference office prior to the season how

they would like their $12,000 worth of tickets allocated in terms of single session, general admission book or reserved book tickets. Seating plans and seating locations for the tournament will be determined by the conference office in consultation with the Athletics Directors Association and host entity.

7.2.3 Complimentary Tickets: Schools shall receive no complimentary tickets for the Southern

Conference Tournament. 7.2.4 Student Tickets: Student tickets shall be available for each school to sell prior to the

Southern Conference Tournament on a consignment basis or schools may elect to sell student tickets out of their original ticket allotments.

7.3 Game and Practice Balls: The “official” basketball as adopted by the Southern Conference shall be

used during all tournament games and practices. The Conference office shall provide at least one dozen balls for all practices and games.


rules adopted for NCAA Division I Men’s Basketball and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations.

7.5 Uniforms: For all tournament games, the higher seeded team shall wear home or light colored

uniforms. The visiting team shall wear road or dark colored uniforms. All competitors must wear exclusively the official uniform of their institution in competition, warm-up and during the post-tournament awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institutions’ official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributor’s normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.

7.6 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for submitting a list of competing

student-athletes to the Conference compliance administrator no later than three (3) days prior to the start of the tournament. The Conference office will verify the eligibility of these student-athletes and will notify an institution if a problem arises with any of its student-athletes. Student-athletes not deemed eligible to compete may not be in uniform during the Conference tournament.

7.7 Head Coaches Teleconference: A Southern Conference Head Coaches teleconference will be

held prior to the start of tournament competition. The Men’s Basketball Committee chair will conduct the call and review information pertinent to the tournament. The head coach of each institution is required to be on call. Head coaches who do not join the call are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Men’s Basketball Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.


A. The court shall be available for both teams to utilize for warm-ups 30 minutes prior to each game;

B. For the first game of a session, teams may begin warm-ups prior to 30 minutes provided the court is available for use;

C. Depending on which game of a session is being conducted, the official time line and pre-game clock countdown shall begin either 60 or 30 minutes prior to tip-off;

D. Both teams should be prepared for player introductions no later than three minutes prior to tip-off;

64

E. Teams shall warm-up to begin a game at the basket opposite of their bench; F. A national anthem shall be played prior to the first game of each session.

7.9 Squad Size Restrictions: Travel squads to the tournament are limited to 15 student-athletes in

uniform and 22 persons in the bench area. Student-athletes, coaches, trainers and managers will need a valid participant credential to enter the tournament venue. Each institution will receive participant credentials (not to exceed 22 in number) as needed prior to the tournament.

7.10 Practice Policies: It is the policy of the Southern Conference to make as many practice

opportunities as possible available to competing teams during the Southern Conference Tournament.

7.10.1 Open Practices: Each team will be granted a practice opportunity on the day prior to its first

tournament game at the competition venue. These practices are not mandatory. These practices shall be designated as “open” practices. Coaches and student-athletes are required to make themselves available to the media immediately following their practice. Local member institutions shall be required to utilize the earlier practice times. Other practice times will be assigned based on each school’s travel distance to the tournament site (i.e., teams with greater travel distances shall have the latest practice times.)

7.10.2 Closed Practices: All practices other than the practices conducted on the day prior to a

team’s first game will be considered closed practices unless opened to the media or general public by that school’s head coach or sports information director. If a practice is opened to any member of the media or general public, it shall then be declared open to all members of the media or general public.

7.11 Halftimes: All halftimes will be 15 minutes in length. The halftime clock will begin when both teams

have cleared the court area, or as instructed by the Conference television coordinator. At least five minutes will be provided for warm-ups for both teams prior to the start of the second half.


following each game.

7.12.1 Dressing Rooms: The dressing rooms of teams competing in the Southern Conference Tournament will be open to all members of the media following a mandatory 10-minute cooling off period.

7.12.2 Cooling Off Period: The cooling off period will begin when all coaches and players have

entered the dressing room following a game. The cooling off period will not be extended to allow coaches or players to do interviews with a broadcasting television network. In the event that these interviews take place, the cooling off period will begin when the majority of a team’s players and coaches have entered the dressing room.

7.12.3 Interview Room Policies: Each head coach shall bring at least two members of his team to

the designated tournament interview area following the 10-minute cooling off period. The winning head coach and two players shall report to the interview area first, followed by the losing head coach and two players. The interview session with the winning team shall not exceed 20 minutes in length. The interview session with the losing team shall not exceed 10 minutes in length.

7.13 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Men’s Basketball

Rules. 7.14 Bench Assignments: Bench assignments for all tournament games shall be made by the

Tournament Director.


8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the championship game, a tournament awards ceremony shall be held near midcourt. The head coach and student-athletes of the winning team shall remain on the floor for the awards ceremony. The head coach and student-athletes of the runner-up team shall have the option of immediately exiting the court following the game or

65

remaining on their bench for the awards ceremony. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony:

8.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the

winning team; 8.1.2 Runner-up Trophy: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the runner-up

team; 8.1.3 All-Tournament Team: Ten plaques (five second team plaques and five first team plaques)

presented to members of the All-Tournament Team. The All-Tournament Team shall be selected by the media immediately following the conclusion of the championship game;


Outstanding Player of the tournament. The Most Outstanding Player shall be selected by the media immediately following the conclusion of the championship game;

8.1.5 NCAA Tournament Automatic Bid: One certificate presented to the athletics director of the

winning school. The certificate shall signify the school’s earning of the Southern Conference’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament.

8.2 Other Awards: Other awards presented in conjunction with the Southern Conference Tournament

are as follows: 8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Fifteen individual plaques will be presented to the

head coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the championship team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.


9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: Each member institution shall receive 20 VIP Hospitality passes for use during the Southern Conference Tournament. These passes shall be distributed at the discretion of the school’s athletics director.

9.2 VIP Parking Passes: Each member institution shall receive 20 VIP Parking passes for use during

the Southern Conference Tournament. These passes shall be distributed at the discretion of the school’s athletics director.

9.3 Team Bus Parking Passes: Each competing team shall be awarded one bus pass for use during

the Southern Conference Tournament. The bus pass shall be distributed by the tournament director and is non-transferable.

9.4 Coaches’ Parking Passes: The coaching staffs of the competing teams shall be awarded two

individual parking passes for the Southern Conference Tournament to allow easy access to the tournament venue for game, media interview or scouting purposes. The passes shall be distributed by the tournament director and are non-transferable.

10.0 Pep Bands and Cheerleaders

10.1 Pep Bands: Each pep band shall be limited to a maximum of 30 members during the Southern Conference Tournament. Pep bands shall be issued parking passes for the tournament as needed. These passes shall be distributed by the tournament director and are non-transferable.

10.2 Cheerleaders: Each cheerleading squad shall be limited to a maximum of 13 members (including

one uniformed mascot) during the Southern Conference Tournament. Cheerleading squads shall be issued parking passes for the tournament as needed. These passes shall be distributed by the tournament director and are non-transferable.

67

2013-14 Women’s Basketball


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor women’s basketball as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University Davidson College Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University Samford University University of North Carolina at Greensboro University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Western Carolina University Wofford College



2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: Each school shall play all other members of the Conference twice

during the regular season (once at home and once on the road). The Southern Conference office shall produce a league master schedule prior to the start of each season. Conference games shall be played on Saturdays and Mondays. No changes shall be made to the conference master schedule without approval from the conference office. Changes are normally allowed only to accommodate institutional academic restrictions, to facilitate non-conference scheduling opportunities or due to pre-existing facility conflicts. Game start times and locations shall be the prerogative of the home institution. (Updated 6/11)

2.1.2 Non-Division I Opponents: Each Southern Conference school may play a maximum of two NCAA

non-Division I opponents during the regular season.

2.2 Championship Determination: The Southern Conference champion shall be the team that finishes with the best won-loss percentage in Conference games during the regular season. In the case that two or more schools finish with identical won-loss records, they shall be declared co-champions.

2.3 Regular-Season Finish: League rank in the regular season shall determine the seeding position of teams

into the Southern Conference Tournament. League rank shall be determined by each team’s won-loss record in all Conference games during the regular season. Ties for seeding purposes shall be broken using the Southern Conference tie-breaking system.


games.

2.5 Official Basketball: The “official” (Anaconda’s The Rock) basketball of the Southern Conference shall be used during regular-season Southern Conference games, unless a school has notified the Conference Office of an existing contract with a different ball company prior to the start of the season.

2.6 Official Scorer: The home team shall provide an official scorer for all Southern Conference games. The

visiting team may provide a scorer for the purpose of improving the accuracy of data collection during a game. The home team scorer shall always be designated the official book.

2.7 NCAA Box Score: The home team shall be responsible for recording NCAA statistical information for both

teams and compiling an official NCAA box score. The home institution must send a completed final NCAA box score via e-mail to the Southern Conference office on the same day that a Southern Conference game

68

is completed. The visiting head coach should receive a copy of the official NCAA box score at halftime and after each Conference game.


Southern Conference teams with non-conference or other Conference schools.

2.9 Video Exchange Policies: Each Southern Conference institution shall exchange conference game films via the conference’s internet video exchange program. All conference and non-conference regular season games will be available on an open exchange basis. Game files must be uploaded in a DVD-R format. When games are filmed, the entire game should be filmed, including dead ball situations. All videos will have audio and should run continuously through dead ball situations. Videos can be stopped during a timeout but must be restarted after the first horn sounds. The scoreboard should be shown at all timeouts and prior to all first free throw attempts. Conference game videos cannot be shared with a non-conference team. (Revised and Effective 09/09)

2.9.1 Uploading Deadlines: For conference games, game files must be uploaded by the home team by

10:00 a.m. (Local time) of the following day. For NON-conference games played on the road, game films must be uploaded within 24 hours after returning to campus. NON-conference home games must be uploaded by 10:00 a.m. (Local time) of the following day. (Approved and Effective 09/09).

2.9.2 On-Site DVDs: After conference games, the home team shall provide the visiting team with a

DVD copy of the game video prior to the visiting team leaving the site. If there is a problem with the copy, or the home team cannot duplicate DVDs, then the visiting team will be provided with the original and shall copy it and return the original to the home team. (Approved and Effective 07/09).

2.10 Uniforms: For all Conference games, the home team must wear light colored uniforms and the visiting

team must wear contrasting dark uniforms. It is required that a Southern Conference logo be placed on each team’s uniform. The preferred location is high on the left side or high on the right side of the game jersey. (Revised 4/12)

2.11 Complimentary Tickets: The home team shall provide the visiting team with 50 complimentary tickets for

each Conference game. In accordance with Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations, a buffer section of visiting team seats or empty space must be provided in the area immediately behind the visiting team dugout as it may be appropriate for each particular venue. The 50 complimentary tickets for the visiting team must be located within the buffer zone area. (Revised 5/13)

2.12 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for having all of its student-athletes eligible

prior to the season. All student-athlete eligibility profiles shall be transmitted to the Conference office prior to a school’s first day of competition. This information shall be filed and in accordance with the instructions of the Southern Conference Associate Commissioner for Compliance. If any questions arise, the Conference compliance administrator shall have the details on all student-athletes who are eligible for Conference regular-season and tournament competition.

2.13 Electronic Media Timeouts: In all Conference games involving a commercial radio or television

broadcast, NCAA electronic media timeout policies shall be utilized.

2.14 Pre-Game Format: The court area shall be available at least one hour (with the exception of doubleheaders where 30 minutes shall be required) prior to a game to allow for warm-ups. Warm-ups may be conducted prior to one hour if the court is available. The court must be made available to both teams for the same duration of time. The home institution shall provide at least six “official” (Anaconda’s The Rock) Conference basketballs (or other brand of game ball if a school is using a different ball during the season) to both teams for use during warm-ups. Ball persons should be reminded to extend the same courtesies to the visiting team as they do for the home team during warm-ups. The host institution shall provide the visiting head coach with a pre-game itinerary and/or time line upon the visiting team’s arrival on site.

3.0 Women’s Basketball Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Women’s Basketball Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one senior woman administrator, one faculty athletics representative and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

69

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for women’s basketball; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators

Association, and Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting women’s basketball

in the Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of women’s basketball in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year (either in-person or via conference call) to address all matters relating to the sport of women’s basketball and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Women’s Basketball Committee, Senior Woman Administrators Association and/or the Athletics Directors Association.

5.0 Officiating

5.1 Coordinator of Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Women’s Basketball Officials, under the direction of the Southern Conference Commissioner and with the guidance of the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Officials Committee, shall establish a pool of officials for all Southern Conference games and assign all officials.


evaluation procedure shall include head coaches’ evaluations, evaluations by the coordinator of officials, and evaluations by appointed and qualified neutral observers. Coaches and observers shall review each official’s performance through a standard form. Coaches’ forms should be sent to the Coordinator of Officials on the first working day following a Southern Conference game.

5.3 Officiating Fees: At the discretion of the Coordinator of Officials and the Commissioner, officials will be

paid a flat fee of either $750, $600 or $500 per game for all regular season games during the 2013-14 season. Officials shall be paid a flat fee of $250 for working exhibition games. (Revised 10/11)

6.0 Game Management

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the game management director for all

Southern Conference games. It is suggested that the game management director visit briefly with the game officials and the visiting head coach prior to the game to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability during the game. The home athletics director and/or game management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.

6.1.1 Game Management Provisions: The following provisions shall be provided to the visiting team

from the home team: A. Sideline: One 10-gallon cooler of water, one three-gallon cooler of ice with bags, one

biohazard box, one sleeve of cups, 12 bench towels. B. Dressing Room: One 3-gallon cooler of water, 1 cooler chest full of isotonics (24

drinks), one sleeve of cups, bath towels (as requested) and soap. C. Practice: One five-gallon cooler of water, 1 five-gallon cooler of ice with bags, one

sleeve of cups, bench towels. 7.0 Public Address Announcer



70

8.1 Cheerleader Responsibilities: Cheerleaders should be encouraged to help maintain good sportsmanship

among the students and others in attendance. The head cheerleader should be ready at all times to instigate the most popular cheer in case an unpleasant situation should occur.

8.2 Cheerleader Restrictions: Megaphones may never be turned toward the playing court or banged on the

floor while a game is in progress. Amplified microphones are prohibited. No pyramids may be performed that are more than two tiers (persons) high. No flips may be conducted other than those made from the floor. Mini-trampolines may not be used.

8.3 Pep Band Restrictions: Bands are allowed to play only during pre-game, halftime, post game and during

timeouts.

8.4 Dance Teams and Mascots: Regulations as they apply to cheerleaders also apply to dance teams and mascots.

8.5 Travel Restrictions: Cheerleading squads, pep bands and dance teams may travel during basketball

season only on weekends. 9.0 Conduct



immediately suspended from their team’s next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-game suspension, a third ejection a four-game suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-game suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-game suspension.

9.3 Unsportsmanlike Behavior: Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct, including but not

limited to those described below, shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference.

9.3.1 Fighting. Any attempt by a person to strike an opponent or contest participant in a combative manner unrelated to the sport involved or any act that insights an opponent to retaliate by acting in a similar manner shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

9.3.2 Aggressive Behavior. The use of obscene gestures, profane language, or the display of hostile

action towards officials, spectators, or opponents shall be described as unsportsmanlike. 9.3.3 Ejection. The removal by an official from a competitive sport activity shall require the ejected

participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately. 9.3.4 Suspension. A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the vicinity of the contest

suspended from during the time period beginning one hour prior to the scheduled contest until the conclusion of the contest. Suspension does not affect practice opportunities outside of the above time limitations.



9.3.6 Competitive Conditions. The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a contest that is

safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

10.0 Regular-Season Awards 10.1 The following awards shall be provided by the Conference and distributed to the appropriate institution

following the conclusion of the Conference regular season:

71

10.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy, presented to the team with the best won-loss percentage in

Conference games (in case of a tie, each team shall receive a trophy); 10.1.2 All-Conference Team: Ten plaques presented to the members of the All-Conference Team. The

All-Conference Team shall be voted on by the head coaches and the Conference office shall conduct the balloting. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players;

10.1.3 Player of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Player of the Year. The Player of

the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the Conference office shall conduct the balloting. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

10.1.4 Freshman of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Freshman of the Year. The

Freshman of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the Conference office shall conduct the balloting. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

10.1.5 Defensive Player of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Defensive Player of

the Year. The defensive player of the year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the Conference office shall conduct the balloting. Coaches are not allowed to voter for their own player;

10.1.6 Coach of the Year: One plaque presented to the person voted Coach of the Year. The Coach of

the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the Conference office shall conduct the balloting;

10.1.7 Players of the Week: Twelve certificates presented to student-athletes named Player of the

Week during the regular season. The Players of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office;

10.1.8 All-Freshman Team: Five certificates presented to student-athletes named to the All-Freshman

Team. The All-Freshman Team shall be voted on by the head coaches and balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

10.10.9 Player of the Month: A Player of the Month award will be selected at the end of every month

during the season. The Player of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office; 10.1.10 Ann Lashley Inspiration Award: An award honoring a student-athlete or coach for outstanding

courage or service shall be selected by the head coaches.

10.2 Sports Media Association Awards: In addition to the above mentioned awards, the Southern Conference Sports Media Association shall select a first team All-Conference team (five members), a second team All-Conference Team (five members), a Player of the Year, a Freshman of the Year, and a Coach of the Year upon the conclusion of the regular season. The Southern Conference Sports Media Association is responsible for producing and mailing plaques or certificates to commemorate these awards.

11.0 Two-Year Moratorium of Approved Sport Regulations: Sport regulations approved by the membership must

be implemented for two full seasons before they may be considered for amendment, except in instances where changes are made to the regulation on a national level (i.e. an NCAA rule or a national governing body policy). Coaches’ recommendations that are not approved by the membership are subject to the moratorium and may not be reconsidered by the membership for two years. A 75% vote of the athletic directors may overrule the two-year moratorium on a case-by-case basis. (Approved and Effective 6/10)


1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a single-elimination Conference tournament shall be conducted to determine the Southern Conference Tournament champion and the recipient of the league’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament. All eligible teams will participate in the Conference tournament. The tournament will be conducted over four days.

72


2.1 The Southern Conference Tournament will be conducted prior to the NCAA Tournament on the dates recommended by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association. The traditional date of the Southern Conference Tournament is two weeks prior to the start of the NCAA Tournament. The dates of the 2014 tournament shall be March 7-10.


3.1 Bid Process: The location of the tournament shall be determined by a bid process conducted by the

Women’s Basketball Committee. All bids shall be reviewed and voted on by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association and approved by the Southern Conference Executive Committee.

3.1.1 2014 Tournament Locations: The sites of the 2014 Southern Conference Tournament shall be

Kimmel Arena on the campus of UNC Asheville (first & quarter rounds) and the U.S. Cellular Center (semifinal and final games) in Asheville, N.C.

3.1.2 Future Tournament Locations: Asheville, N.C. will be the host city for the 2015, 2016, 2017

Southern Conference Women’s Basketball Championship Tournaments. Host sites beyond 2017 shall be determined by a bid process.


4.1 Game Times: All tournament game times shall be set by the Southern Conference Women’s Basketball

Committee and approved by the Athletics Directors Association. Games may not start before announced times.

4.1.1 2013 Tournament Schedule: The 2014 Women’s Basketball Tournament will be played on March

7-10. The bracket and game times shall be set by the Women’s Basketball Committee. 5.0 Tournament Administration

5.1 Women’s Basketball Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Women’s Basketball Committee shall provide general oversight of the tournament.

5.1.1 Women’s Basketball Committee Responsibilities: The Tournament Committee shall:

A. Conduct the tournament in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Southern Conference as contained in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations;

B. Discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations, and;


5.2 Tournament Director: The Southern Conference Senior Associate Commissioner shall serve as the director of the Women’s Basketball Tournament, and shall perform the following duties under the direction of the Women’s Basketball Committee:

A. Serve as supervisor of the tournament; B. Plan and coordinate all activities of the tournament in conjunction with the Women’s Basketball

Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant tournament information to all coaches, athletics directors, senior woman

administrators, chief executive officers, faculty athletics representatives and other necessary personnel of competing institutions;

D. Coordinate and supervise the activities of the officials; E. Oversee servicing the needs of the participants and spectators as prescribed in the tournament

manual; F. Delegate duties and responsibilities to other Conference office staff members; G. Secure a certified trainer and other medical personnel for the tournament.

5.3 Media Coordinator: The tournament media coordinator shall be the Southern Conference Assistant

Commissioner for Media Relations. The media coordinator shall perform the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas;

73

B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the activities of the stats crew and make sure that statistics are made available to

all media and teams at halftime and after each game; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the tournament; E. Be responsible for all-tournament balloting; F. Provide seating charts for the media on each day of the tournament; G. Coordinate the installation of phone lines as necessary for radio, television and print media on

press row and in other media working areas; H. Make sure that all teams and electronic media are provided with pre-game itineraries and/or

time lines at least one hour prior to each game; I. Organize the Conference sports information directors’ coordination of the tournament media

operation.


A. That a certified trainer is present for all practices and at all games; B. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on site at all games; C. That EMS services are available during all games; D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all tournament events; F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all head

athletic trainers and head coaches prior to their arrival at the tournament site.

5.5 Coordinator of Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Women’s Basketball Officials shall perform the following duties relative to the Conference tournament:

A. Assign a pool of officials to work the tournament and make individual game assignments. The pool of officials should include a minimum of six of the top officials as rated by the Conference head coaches and six additional officials assigned at the discretion of the Coordinator of Officials;

B. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with officials; C. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with scorer’s table personnel; D. Assign a standby official for all tournament games.


tournament director and/or tournament media coordinator: A. Stats crew; B. Public address announcer; C. Official scorer; D. Clock, scoreboard and matrix board operators; E. Ball persons (at least two at each end of the floor); F. Dressing room attendants; G. Band/cheerleader coordinator; H. Television timeout coordinator; I. In addition, Women’s Basketball Committee members (excluding the head coach

representatives), senior woman administrators and sports information directors may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the event.

5.7 Promotions Director: The tournament director shall appoint a promotions director that ensures that a

marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness and ticket sales to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the tournament is being played in.


6.1 The tournament director shall send a tournament manual to all Conference chief executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, athletics directors, senior woman administrators, head coaches and sports information directors at least one month prior to the tournament. The following information shall be contained in the manual:

A. Facilities information; B. Telephone numbers and addresses of key tournament personnel; C. Local maps; D. Dates, times and location of the tournament and related activities;

74

E. Information on team and institutional credentials and parking passes; F. A tournament itinerary; G. Medical and training information; H. Media information; I. Information on hospitality and social functions; J. Names and responsibilities of Local Organizing Committee personnel; K. Names and responsibilities of host institution personnel; L. A tournament emergency plan and emergency telephone numbers.



A. If one team has defeated the other team twice, that team shall be awarded the higher seeded position;

B. If each team has won one game against the other, the higher position will be awarded to the team that has the best won-loss record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie;

C. If each team has the same record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie, then the won-loss record against the next highest seeded team not involved in the tie would be considered and so on down the line until the tie is broken;

D. If the records are the same against all teams, then the tie will be broken by comparing each team’s Ratings Percentage Index (RPI) as published by RPIRatings.com after completion of the regular season;


F. If the teams are still tied, the team’s record against the next highest seeded team after the three-way tie is considered, and so forth until the tie is broken;

G. If there is still a tie then the tie will be broken by comparing each team’s Ratings Percentage Index (RPI) as published by RPIRatings.com after completion of the regular season;



7.2 Ticket Prices: Ticket prices for the 2014 Southern Conference Tournament shall be set by the Men’s and

Women’s Basketball Committees and approved by the Athletics Directors Association.

7.2.1 Complimentary Tickets: Schools shall receive no complimentary tickets for the Southern Conference Tournament.

7.3 Game and Practice Balls: The “official” (Anaconda’s The Rock) basketball as adopted by the Southern

Conference shall be used during all tournament games and practices. The Conference office shall provide at least one dozen balls for all practices and games.

7.4 Playing Rules: The playing rules for the Southern Conference Tournament shall conform to those rules

adopted for NCAA Division I Women’s Basketball and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations.

7.5 Uniforms: For all tournament games, the higher seeded team shall wear home or light colored uniforms.

The visiting team shall wear road or dark colored uniforms. All competitors must wear exclusively the official uniform of their institution in competition, warm-up and during the post-tournament awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institutions’ official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributors normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.

7.6 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for submitting a list of competing student-

athletes to the Conference compliance administrator no later than three (3) days prior to the start of the tournament. The Conference office will verify the eligibility of these student-athletes and will notify an

75

institution if a problem arises with any of its student-athletes. Student-athletes not deemed eligible to compete may not be in uniform during the Conference tournament.

7.7 Head Coaches Teleconference: A Southern Conference head coaches teleconference will be held prior

to the start of tournament competition. The Women’s Basketball Committee chair will conduct the call and review information pertinent to the tournament. The head coach of each institution is required to be on the call. Head coaches who do not join the call are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Women’s Basketball Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.


A. The court shall be available for both teams to utilize for warm-ups 30 minutes prior to each game; B. For the first game of a session, teams may begin warm-ups prior to 30 minutes provided the

court is available for use; C. Depending on which game of a session is being conducted the official time line and pre-game

clock countdown shall begin either 60 or 30 minutes prior to tip-off; D. Both teams should be prepared for player introductions no later than three minutes prior to tip-off; E. Teams shall warm-up to begin a game at the basket opposite of their bench; F. A national anthem shall be played prior to the first game of each session.

7.9 Squad Size Restrictions: Travel squads to the tournament are limited to 15 student-athletes in uniform

and 22 persons in the bench area. Student-athletes, coaches, trainers and managers will need a valid participant credential to enter the tournament venue. Each institution will receive participant passes (not to exceed 22 in number) as needed prior to the tournament.

7.10 Practice Policies: It is the policy of the Southern Conference to make as many practice opportunities as

possible available to competing teams during the Southern Conference Tournament.

7.10.1 Open Practices: Each team will be granted a practice opportunity on the day prior to its first tournament game at the competition venue. These practices are not mandatory. These practices shall be designated as “open” practices. Coaches and student-athletes are required to make themselves available to the media immediately following their practice. Local member institutions shall be required to utilize the earlier practice times. Other practice times will be assigned based on each school’s travel distance to the tournament site (i.e., teams with greater travel distances shall have the latest practice times.)

7.10.2 Closed Practices: All practices other than the practices conducted on the day prior to a team’s

first game will be considered closed practices unless opened to the media or general public by that school’s head coach or sports information director. If a practice is opened to any member of the media or general public, it shall then be declared open to all members of the media or general public. Closed practices will be assigned by seed.

7.11 Halftimes: All halftimes will be 15 minutes in length. The halftime clock will begin when both teams have

cleared the court area, or as instructed by the Conference television coordinator. At least five minutes will be provided for warm-ups for both teams prior to the start of the second half.

7.12 Media Policies: All coaches and student-athletes shall be available for interviews with the media following

each game after a mandatory 10-minute “cooling off” period.

7.12.1 Dressing Rooms: The dressing rooms of teams competing in the Southern Conference Tournament will be closed to all members of the media unless a member of the media states a desire to enter the dressing room prior to the conclusion of a game. This request must be made to the tournament media coordinator or the sports information director of the participating team.


entered the dressing room following a game. The cooling off period will not be extended to allow coaches or players to do interviews with a broadcasting television network. In the event that these interviews take place, the cooling off period will begin when the majority of a team’s players and coaches have entered the dressing room.

7.12.3 Interview Room Policies: Each head coach shall bring at least two members of their team to

the designated tournament interview area following the 10-minute cooling off period. The winning head coach and two players shall report to the interview area first, followed by the

76

losing head coach and two players. The interview session with the winning team shall not exceed 20 minutes in length. The interview session with the losing team shall not exceed 10 minutes in length.

7.13 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Women’s Basketball Rules.

7.14 Bench Assignments: The higher seeded team shall be assigned the bench to the right hand side of the

official scorer for all games. 8.0 Tournament Awards

8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the championship game, a tournament awards ceremony shall be held near midcourt. The head coach and student-athletes of the winning team shall remain on the floor for the awards ceremony. The head coach and student-athletes of the runner-up team shall have the option of immediately exiting the court following the game or remaining on their bench for the awards ceremony. If the runner-up team exits the court following the game, it is expected that the team will return to the court when it is time for the awards ceremony to take place. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony:

8.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the winning

team;

8.1.2 Runner-up Trophy: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the runner-up team; 8.1.3 All-Tournament Team: Ten plaques (five second team plaques and five first team plaques)

presented to members of the All-Tournament Team. The All-Tournament Team shall be selected by the media immediately following the conclusion of the championship game;

8.1.4 Most Outstanding Player: One plaque presented to the player selected as the Most Outstanding

Player of the tournament. The Most Outstanding Player shall be one of the ten members of the All-Tournament team and is selected by the media immediately following the conclusion of the championship game;

8.1.5 NCAA Tournament Automatic Bid: One certificate presented to the athletics director or senior

woman administrator of the winning school. The certificate shall signify the school’s earning of the Southern Conference’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament.

8.2 Other Awards: Other awards presented in conjunction with the Southern Conference Tournament are as

follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Fifteen individual plaques will be presented to the head coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the championship team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.


9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: Each member institution shall receive 20 VIP Hospitality passes for use during the Southern Conference Tournament. These passes shall be distributed at the discretion of the school’s athletics director.

9.2 VIP Parking Passes: Each member institution shall receive 20 VIP Parking passes for use during the

Southern Conference Tournament. These passes shall be distributed at the discretion of the school’s athletics director.

9.3 Team Bus Parking Passes: Each competing team shall be awarded one bus pass for use during the

Southern Conference Tournament. The bus pass shall be distributed by the tournament director and is non-transferable.

9.4 Coaches’ Parking Passes: The coaching staffs of the competing teams shall be awarded two individual

parking passes for the Southern Conference Tournament to allow easy access to the tournament venue for game, special interview or scouting purposes. The passes shall be distributed by the tournament director and are non-transferable.

77

10.0 Pep Bands and Cheerleaders

10.1 Pep Bands: Each pep band shall be limited to a maximum of 30 members during the Southern Conference Tournament. Pep bands shall be issued parking passes for the tournament as needed. These passes shall be distributed by the tournament director and are non-transferable.

10.2 Cheerleaders: Each cheerleading squad shall be limited to a maximum of 13 members (including one

uniformed mascot) during the Southern Conference Tournament. Cheerleading squads shall be issued parking passes for the tournament as needed. These passes shall be distributed by the tournament director and are non-transferable.

79

2013 Cross Country


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor cross country as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University The Citadel Davidson College Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University (women only) Samford University University of North Carolina at Greensboro University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Western Carolina University Wofford College



2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: There are no scheduling requirements relative to competition between

Conference institutions during the regular season. Southern Conference institutions hosting cross country events during the regular season are encouraged to extend invitations of participation to other Conference schools.

2.2 Championship Determination: Southern Conference team or individual champions shall not be determined

during regular-season competition. Team and individual champions shall be determined at the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Cross Country Championships.

2.3 Playing Rules: Playing rules as adopted by the NCAA shall be in effect for all Southern Conference cross

country events during the regular season. 2.4 Results Reporting: Conference institutions shall update all results information of regular season events to

the Conference ranking list by 5:00 PM ET on Monday of each week. It is mandatory that the Conference ranking list be completed by 5:00 PM ET of the Monday prior to the indoor and outdoor track & field championships in preparation for seeding purposes. Those student-athletes who have not been added to the Conference ranking list by that time will not be allowed to have times or marks used for seeding into the championships. (Approved 10/09)

2.5 Scouting Information: Southern Conference teams shall not share scouting information on other Southern

Conference teams with non-conference or other Conference schools. 2.6 Complimentary Tickets: Conference institutions hosting regular season meets shall provide Conference

visiting institutions with 50 complimentary tickets for the meet, provided that the home institution is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival.

2.7 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for having all of its student-athletes eligible prior

to the season. Completed squad lists shall be transmitted to the Conference office prior to a school’s first day of competition. This information shall be filed and in accordance with the instructions of the Southern Conference Associate Commissioner for Compliance. If any questions arise, the Conference compliance administrator shall have the details on all student-athletes who are eligible for Conference regular-season and post-season competition.

2.8 Signs: Signs of a derogatory nature directed toward an individual opponent, visiting team or an official are

not permitted at events being hosted by Southern Conference institutions. It is the responsibility of the meet

80

management director to see that derogatory signs are confiscated. 2.9 Course Inspection: It is recommended that Southern Conference institutions hosting regular-season meets

make the competition course available for inspection by all participating teams on the day prior to the meet. Each institution should be allowed the same amount of inspection time and/or practice opportunities.

2.10 Lineups, Substitutions: Southern Conference institutions shall adhere to NCAA policies regarding team

lineups and substitutions. 3.0 Cross Country Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Cross Country Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one faculty athletics representative, one senior woman administrator and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for men’s and women’s cross country: 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association and

Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant: 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting men’s and women’s cross

country in the Southern Conference: 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.: 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of men’s and women’s cross country in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year to address all matters relating to the sports of men’s and women’s cross country and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Cross Country Committee. This meeting shall normally take place in the month of August.

5.0 Meet Officials

5.1 Home Institution Responsibilities: Southern Conference institutions hosting meets during the regular season are responsible for contracting a qualified head referee and starter.

6.0 Meet Management

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the meet management director for all events being hosted by Southern Conference institutions. It is suggested that the meet management director visit briefly with the officials and the visiting head coaches prior to the meet to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability. The home athletics director and/or meet management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.

7.0 Public Address Announcer

7.1 Only the designated public address announcer may use a microphone during a meet hosted by a Southern Conference institution. The public address announcer is responsible for whatever is said over the PA system. The primary function of the announcer is to give specific information to the fans, not to incite them by unnecessary inflection of voice beyond the pre-meet introduction of the home team.

8.0 Conduct

8.1 Coaches’ Conduct: All head and assistant coaches are to conduct themselves in such a manner during a meet as to ensure or promote good crowd control. They also are responsible for the conduct of their student-athletes and staff. Coaches (head and assistant) must follow Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations at all times.

8.2 Ejection/Suspension Policy: A coach or player removed from a competition for any reason shall be

immediately suspended from their team’s next competition. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-competition suspension, a third ejection a four-competition suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-competition suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a

81

participant who completes one calendar year with an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-competition suspension.

8.3 Unsportsmanlike Behavior: Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct including but not limited

to those described below shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference.




participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately. 8.3.4 Suspension. A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the vicinity of the contest

suspended from during the time period beginning one hour prior to the scheduled contest until the conclusion of the contest. Suspension does not affect practice opportunities outside of the above time limitations.



8.3.6 Competitive Conditions. The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a contest that is

safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior. 9.0 Two-Year Moratorium of Approved Sport Regulations: Sport regulations approved by the membership must


Conference Championship Meet Regulations 1.0 Tournament Format

1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a Conference championship meet shall be conducted to determine men’s and women’s team and individual champions. All teams eligible to compete shall participate in the Conference championship meet. The length of the men’s championship course shall be 8,000 meters. The length of the women’s championship course shall be 5,000 meters.

2.0 Championships Dates: The Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Cross Country Championships shall

be conducted two weeks prior to the NCAA Regionals. The date of the 2013 Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Cross Country Championships is November 2, 2013.

3.0 Championships Location

3.1 Rotation: The location of the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Cross Country Championships shall be determined by a rotational system among Conference schools. Samford University will be inserted in the championship rotation for 2013 and then the established rotation will resume in 2014 with Davidson College. (Approved 06/09). A school that cannot secure an adequate course, or is not interested in hosting in a given year, shall forfeit its turn in the rotation.

3.1.1 2013 Championship Location: The site of the 2013 Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Cross

Country Championships shall be Veteran’s Park in Birmingham, Alabama and hosted by Samford University.

3.1.2 Future Championships Locations: Host schools for the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Cross Country Championships in future years are as follows: 2014 – Furman University; 2015 – UNCG; 2016 – Chattanooga; 2017 – Western Carolina University; 2018 – Wofford College

82

4.0 Championships Schedule

4.1 Start Times: All championships start times shall be set by the Southern Conference Cross Country Committee. The start time for the 2013 Southern Conference Men’s Championship shall be 10 a.m. The start time for the 2013 Southern Conference Women’s Championship shall be 10:45 a.m. Adjustments to start times may be made by the Games Committee in case of inclement weather. Men’s and women’s race times shall alternate each year (the women will race first on even-numbered years).


5.1 Cross Country Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Cross Country Committee shall provide general oversight of the men’s and women’s championships. The Cross Country Committee shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.

5.2 Games Committee: A Games Committee shall be appointed for the men’s and women’s championships

consisting of Cross Country Committee members on site, the athletics director of the host institution or his or her designee, the Southern Conference championships administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), and the championships director. The Games Committee shall: A. Ensure that the championships are conducted in accordance with the rules and regulations of the

Southern Conference as contained in the Southern Conference Championships Manual and these sport regulations:

B. Make decisions regarding situations that occur where resolution is not covered in the rules and regulations of the NCAA or the Southern Conference as stated in the Championships Manual or these sport regulations:

C. Inspect the meet facilities prior to the start of the event.

5.3 Championships Director: The host institution for the championships shall appoint a championships director who will work with the Assistant Commissioner for Championships and shall perform the following functions under the direction of the Cross Country Committee: A. Serve as supervisor of the championships: B. Plan and coordinate all activities of the championships in conjunction with the Cross Country Committee

and local organizing committee(s): C. Provide relevant championships information to all coaches, athletics directors, chief executive officers,

faculty representatives, senior woman administrators and other necessary personnel of competing institutions:

D. Coordinate and supervise the activities of the officials: E. Oversee servicing the needs of the participants and spectators as prescribed in the championships

manual: F. Delegate duties and responsibilities to championships personnel: G. Secure a certified trainer and other medical personnel for the championships.

5.4 Media Coordinator: The championships director shall appoint a championships media coordinator, who

shall perform the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas: B. Process all media requests for working credentials: C. Coordinate the activities of the stats crew and make sure that statistics are made available to all media

and head coaches as soon as possible after the conclusion of each meet: D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the championships: E. Be responsible for awards balloting: F. Coordinate the installation of phone lines for the media: G. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site.

5.5 Medical Personnel: All medical staff for the championships shall be appointed by the championships

director, who shall ensure that the following occurs: A. That a certified trainer is available for all practices and that three certified trainers are present during all

competitions: B. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on call during competitions: C. That an EMS unit is on site during all competitions: D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities: E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all championship events: F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all head athletic

trainers and head coaches prior to their arrival at the championships site.

83

5.6 Officials: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Rules. The Southern Conference staff liaison,

working in conjunction with the Cross Country Committee, shall contract all officials to work the championships and shall: A. Assign a pool of officials to work the championships. The pool of officials shall include the following:

(1) Head referee: (2) Four judges of the finish: (3) Starter: (4) Quick scorers (as many as teams entered):

B. Conduct pre-event and post-event meetings as necessary with officials: C. Oversee the selection and training of all other meet officials with the championships director and ensure

that a training session is conducted for these officials prior to competition: D. Ensure that the head referee remains at the championships site for at least 30 minutes after the final

results are posted and ensure that the head referee makes a written report before departing of all actions, protests, and controversial decisions that may have affected the meet (the report shall be made available to all coaches at the site upon request).


championships director and/or championships media coordinator: A. Official timer: B. Public address announcer: C. Clock, scoreboard and matrix board operators: E. Chute workers: F. Finish line video camera personnel: G. In addition, Southern Conference Cross Country Committee members (excluding the head coach

representatives), may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the championships.

5.8 Promotions Director: The championships director shall appoint a promotions director that ensures that a

marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the championships are being held in.

6.0 Championships Manual

6.1 The Southern Conference staff liaison shall send a championships manual to all Conference chief executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, athletics directors, senior woman administrators, head coaches and sports information directors at least one month prior to the championships. The following information shall be contained in the manual: A. Facilities information: B. Telephone numbers and addresses of key championships personnel: C. Local maps: D. Maps of men’s and women’s competition courses: E. Dates, times and location of the championships and related activities: F. Information on team and institutional credentials and parking passes: G. A championships itinerary: H. Medical and training information: I. Media information: J. Information on hospitality and social functions: K. Names and responsibilities of Local Organizing Committee personnel: L. Names and responsibilities of host institution personnel: M. A championships emergency plan and emergency telephone numbers.

7.0 Championships Procedures

7.1 Scoring: Each team in the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Cross Country Championships may run nine competitors. First place shall score one point, second place two points, third place three points, etc. The first seven runners from each team who finish the course shall be ranked and tallied in this manner. The team score shall then be determined by totaling the points scored by the first five runners of each team to finish. The team scoring the lowest number of points shall be declared the winner. If fewer than five runners finish for an institution, the places of all members of that team shall be disregarded except for individual awards purposes.

7.2 Tie-Breaking Procedures: In case of a tie for first place in the team or individual championships, the tying

teams or individual shall be considered co-champions.

84

7.3 Travel Squads: Travel squads to the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Cross Country Championships shall be limited to nine student-athletes per team.

7.4 Rules: The rules for the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Cross Country Championships shall

conform to those rules adopted by the NCAA for the Division I Cross Country Championships, and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Championships Manual and these sport regulations.

7.5 Uniforms: All competitors must wear exclusively the official uniform of their institution in competition, warm-

up and during the post-championships awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institution’s official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributors normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes, bags) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.

7.6 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for submitting a list of competing student-athletes

to the Conference compliance administrator no later than three (3) days prior to the start of the championships. The Conference office shall compare the list to previously submitted institutional squad lists and will notify an institution if a problem arises with any of its student-athletes. Student-athletes not deemed eligible to compete may not be in uniform during the Conference championships.

7.7 Head Coaches Meeting: A Southern Conference head coaches meeting will be held at the championships

site prior to the start of competition. The Cross Country Committee chair will conduct the meeting and review information pertinent to the championships. The head coach of each institution is required to attend this meeting. Head coaches who do not attend the meeting are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Cross Country Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.

7.8 Entries and Final Declarations: The following items address the issues of team entries and final

declarations: A. The Conference office shall provide an official entry form to the head coach at each institution at least

14 days prior to the championships; B. Entry forms shall allow a maximum of 12 entries per team; C. Entry forms shall be faxed or e-mailed to the Conference office no later than noon ET on the Monday

prior to the championships; D. The Conference office shall confirm receipt of entry forms for each institution by e-mail, fax or phone

prior to 1 p.m. on the Monday prior to the championships; E. Each team shall make a final declaration of a maximum of nine runners at the coaches’ meeting on the

evening prior to the championships. Final declarations can be made by a team’s head coach or a designate;

F. Final declarations may also be made by phone or fax prior to the coaches’ meeting.

7.9 Start Line Procedures: NCAA Cross Country Rules and Regulations shall be followed at all times by the starter. The location and width of the starting line shall conform to NCAA Rules and Regulations. The starting boxes shall be numbered from left to right. Team starting positions shall be drawn by lot. Each team shall be allotted 10 feet or more if possible in the starting box. There shall be a minimum of 200 meters between the starting line and the first turn on the course. A recall starter shall be located at the 200-meter mark.

7.10 Finish Line Procedures: A videotape of the finish line shall be made from an elevated side view to

determine order of finish in case of protest. The finish line shall be at least 10 meters wide and should narrow to a single person funnel in a length of between 15 and 25 meters from the line. An area should be roped off a distance of 100 feet from the finish line out toward the course on each side for crowd control purposes at the finish area.

7.10.1 Chute Construction: The finish chute shall be constructed of rope, banners and stakes (padded if

sharp or dangerous edges protrude). The chute should be a minimum of 100 feet long from the official finish to the end where the student-athletes exit the chute.

7.11 Course Markings: The “course” is defined as the ground lying between the starting line and finish line,

assigned as the legal path of the runner while in the race. The course shall be properly measured. It must be marked by a continuous, clearly visible, unbroken line (or suitable flag system) on the running surface from start to finish. The inside edge of the course extending from the inside edge of the first box, position or alignment on the starting line to the first turn shall be laid in a straight line.

85

7.11.1 Direction Changes: All changes of direction on the course shall be indicated by the use of some

type of directional system, i.e. colored flags, arrows or markers. Signs and directional boundaries can be used to augment course directions. The construction and placement of these markings on the course are provided as an aid for the runner and shall act as a curb toward the entire distance of the course.

7.12 Course Inspection: The competition course shall be made available for inspection and/or practice for all

institutions on the afternoon prior to the championships. The course will be open for a minimum of two hours. Times when the course shall be available will be designated in the Championships Manual.


their respective meets. Interviews with the media may take place following a 10-minute “cooling off” period, which shall begin when the final competitor has completed the course.

7.14 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Cross Country Rules and

Regulations. 7.15 Intermediate Times: Intermediate times shall be given at the mile marks during the championships. 7.16 Protests: Protests relating to matters which develop during the conduct of the championships should be

made at once and not later than 30 minutes after the results of the meet in question have been posted. Any such protest should be made in writing by a head coach and submitted to the head referee, who will render a decision.

7.17 Disqualifications: Competitors, who fail to complete the prescribed course as defined by the legal

marking system, thereby gaining on advantage, shall be disqualified if detected by an official of the meet. 7.18 Numbers: One number large enough for identification shall be worn by each competitor. The number

shall be securely pinned on the front of each contestant’s shirt to allow for plain visibility. 7.19 Equipment: The following equipment and/or arrangements shall be provided by the host institution:

A. Stopwatches: B. Chronomix type timing clock: C. Clerk of the course system and qualified manpower to operate it: D. A large scoreboard for the posting of results: E. An awards presentation area: F. Public address system: G. Starting pistol and blanks: H. Automated equipment for results (copier, word processor): I. A communication system for the course (walkie-talkies): J. Pins and number for competitors.

8.0 Championship Awards

8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the men’s championship meet, an awards ceremony shall be held at the awards presentation area. The head coaches and student-athletes of all teams should remain for the awards ceremony. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony:

8.1.1 Championship Trophies: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the men’s winning

team, and one trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the women’s winning team: 8.1.2 Runner-Up Trophies: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the men’s runner-up

team, and one trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the women’s runner-up team: 8.1.3 Second-10th Place Finisher Plaques: Plaques shall be presented to each individual finishing in

second thru 10th place in the men’s and women’s championships: 8.1.4 Individual Champion Plaques: A large plaque shall be presented to the individual winners of the

men’s and women’s championships: 8.1.5 First & Second Team All-Conference Plaques: Fourteen plaques shall be presented to those

individuals earning men’s All-Conference honors and fourteen plaques shall be presented to those

86

individuals earning women’s All-Conference honors. First team All-Conference shall be bestowed upon the individuals finishing first through 7th place. Second team All-Conference shall be bestowed upon the individuals finishing 8th through 14th place. (Approved 10/08)

8.1.6 Runner of the Year Plaques: One plaque shall be presented to the person winning the Men’s Runner

of the Year award, and one plaque shall be presented to the person winning Women’s Runner of the Year award. The Runner of the Year awards shall be presented to the individual winners of the men’s and women’s championships.

8.1.7 Freshman of the Year Plaques: One plaque shall be presented to the person winning the Men’s

Freshman of the Year award, and one plaque shall be presented to the person winning Women’s Freshman of the Year award. The Freshman of the Year awards shall be presented to the first true freshmen to finish the men’s and women’s championships.

8.1.8 Coach of the Year Plaques: One plaque shall be presented to the person winning the Men’s Coach

of the Year award (Dave Walker Award), and one plaque shall be presented to the person winning Women’s Coach of the Year award. The Coach of the Year awards shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championships site. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office.

8.2 Other Awards: Other awards presented in conjunction with the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s

Cross Country Championships are as follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Nine individual plaques will be presented to the head coach of the men’s championship team and nine individual plaques will be presented to the head coach of the women’s championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of those squads. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion::

8.2.2 Performers of the Week: Eight certificates (four men’s and four women’s) will be presented to the

persons selected as Men’s and Women’s Performers of the Week during the regular season. These awards shall be selected by the Conference Office.

8.2.3 Performers of the Month: A men’s and women’s Performer of the Month shall be selected at the end

of every month during the season. These awards shall be selected by the Conference office.

8.2.4 All-Freshman Team: An All-Freshman Team shall be named consisting of the top 7 freshmen finishers, true freshmen, red shirt or otherwise, in both the men’s and women’s championships. (Approved 10/08)


9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Hospitality passes for use during the Southern Conference Championships, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Cross Country Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.

9.2 VIP Parking Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Parking passes for use during the Southern

Conference Championships. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Cross Country Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.

9.3 Team Bus Parking Passes: If necessary, each competing team shall be awarded bus passes as needed

for use during the Southern Conference Championships. The bus passes shall be distributed by the Championships Director and are non-transferable.

87

2013 Football


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor football as a varsity intercollegiate sport and participate in the Southern Conference:

Appalachian State University The Citadel Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University Samford University University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Western Carolina University Wofford College



2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: Each school shall play all members of the Conference once during the

regular season (eight Conference games). The Southern Conference office shall produce a league master schedule at least eighteen months prior to the start of each season. Teams reserve the right to make changes to the Conference master schedule as long as participating athletics directors are agreeable to the moves. Game start times and locations shall be the prerogative of the home institution.

2.1.2Suspended Game: When a football game is suspended by the referee before the end of the fourth period and cannot be resumed, there are four possible options:

1. Resume the game at a later date; 2. Terminate the game with a determined final score; 3. Declare a no contest; 4. Declare a forfeited game.

When a suspended game between a SoCon team and a non-conference opponent is unable to be

completed, the directors of athletics for the two institutions must agree on one of the four options. If the suspended game is a league contest between two Southern Conference institutions, the Commissioner shall communicate with both directors of athletics (or his or her designee) in an expedient manner after the game is suspended. After conferring with both ADs and collecting all pertinent factors related to the matter, the Commissioner shall determine which option shall be followed. Notification of the decision shall be shared by the conference office with the participating institutions, the remaining conference membership and the general public (media), in that order (Effective 8/10).

2.2 Championship Determination: The Southern Conference champion shall be the team eligible for the

NCAA FCS Playoffs that finishes with the best won-loss percentage in Conference games during the regular season. In the case that two or more schools finish with identical won-loss records, they shall be declared co-champions.

2.3 NCAA Automatic Bid: The Conference champion shall be awarded an automatic bid to the NCAA

FCS Playoffs. In the event that co-champions are declared, the automatic bid will be awarded as follows:

88

A. In the case of a two-way tie, the automatic bid will be awarded to the winner of the game between the tied teams during the regular season;

B. In the event of a three-way tie, the won-loss records of the tied teams against each other is first considered (i.e., head to head concept). If the teams are still tied, then each team’s record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie is considered. If the tie is still not broken, the teams’ won-loss record against the next highest seeded team not involved in the tie is considered and so on down the line until the tie is broken. If the tie is still not broken, the team with the fewest points allowed among the tied teams shall be considered. If this does not resolve the tie, then the automatic bid will be determined by a random draw conducted by the Commissioner;

C. In the event of multiple ties after a three-way tie, the same procedure as used to break a three-way tie will be applied until the tie is broken.

2.4 Playing Rules: Playing rules as adopted by the NCAA for Division I FCS football and this manual shall

be in effect for all Southern Conference games.

2.5 Official Football: The brand of football to be used during regular-season Southern Conference games shall be the Wilson F1005, F1003 or F1001 unless a school has notified the conference office of its desire to utilize a different ball prior to the start of the season.

2.6 Game Clock Operator and Play Clock Operator: The home team shall provide a game clock

operator and a play clock operator for all Southern Conference games and shall be responsible for the payment of those persons. It is recommended, but not required, that the game clock operator by assigned by the Southern Conference Coordinator of Officials. In this instance, the game clock operator will be a member of the Southern Conference officiating staff and shall also serve as an alternate official. If assigned by the Coordinator of Officials, the game clock operator shall be paid a flat fee of $200.

2.7 Ball Persons: Host institutions shall provide a minimum of three ball persons on each sideline for each

Southern Conference game. Al ball persons should be at least 16 years of age unless approved by the officiating crew. (Revised 5/13)

2.8 Other Personnel: Other personnel to be provided by the host institution for all Conference games are

a timeout liaison (for all games), a five-member chain crew (two persons for the end stakes, one for the down marker, one “clip-man”, and one person for the auxiliary down marker for the sideline opposite the chains). (Revised 6/11)

2.9 NCAA Box Score: The home team shall be responsible for recording NCAA statistical information for

both teams and compiling an official NCAA box score. The home stats crew must send a completed final NCAA box score via e-mail to the Southern Conference office on the same day that a Southern Conference game is completed. The visiting head coach should receive a copy of the official NCAA box score at halftime and after each Conference game.


Southern Conference teams with non-conference or other Conference schools. Conference game videos of current or previous years shall not be sent to non-conference schools unless a team is a scheduled non-conference opponent for the upcoming season. The number of games shared, in this instance, shall be agreed upon by the two head coaches.

2.11 Video Exchange: Southern Conference institutions shall utilize an “open” exchange system for all

game videos (Conference or non-conference) as part of the Conference’s video exchange program. All game videos shall be exchanged via the Conference’s internet videotape exchange program, DragonFly Storm. All game files must be completely uploaded in continuous DVD format and original ODK format to the internet exchange system by 8:00 a.m. Eastern time each Sunday.

Each game exchanged shall consist of the following videos: A. An intercut video for offense; B. An intercut video for defense; C. An intercut video for special teams and kicking;

Coaches may exchange both a “sideline tight” and “end zone” video if agreed upon in advance. The end zone or sideline tight copy may be intercut if both coaches are agreeable in advance. If requested,

89

each team should provide flip cards and play by play sheets via either email or fax. If necessary, the home team is required to provide the visiting team a continuous “sideline” and “end zone” copy of that particular game prior to the time the visiting team leaves the stadium. These arrangements should be coordinated prior to the visiting team’s arrival on site; otherwise the host school should provide a space in their stadium for the visiting team to shoot their own “sideline” and “end zone” copies. (Revised 6/10)

2.12 Uniforms: For all Conference games, the home team must inform the visiting team at least five

days(Monday prior to a Saturday game) in advance of the game as to the color of uniform it is planning to wear (i.e., light or dark). The visiting team must then wear uniforms of contrasting color. If the home team wears colored jerseys, it is permissible for the visiting team to also wear colored jerseys, provided that the teams have agreed in writing prior to the game and the conference office certifies prior to the game that the jerseys of the visiting team are of a contrasting color. The Southern Conference logo is required to be placed on each member institution’s game jersey. The recommended placement of the logo is high on the left or right side of the jersey top, just below the shoulder pad, facing front, or on the left sleeve of the jersey.


tickets for each Conference game. In accordance with Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations, a buffer section of visiting team seats or empty space must be provided in the area immediately behind the visiting team bench as it may be appropriate for each particular venue. The 300 complimentary tickets for the visiting team must be located within the buffer zone area. (Revised 5/13)


prior to the season. All student-athlete eligibility profiles shall be transmitted to the Conference office prior to a school’s first day of competition. This information shall be filed and in accordance with the instructions of the Southern Conference Associate Commissioner for Compliance. If any questions arise, the Conference compliance administrator shall have the details on all student-athletes who are eligible for Conference regular-season and post-season competition.

2.15 Media Timeouts: In all Conference games involving a television broadcast, the producing network or

station shall determine the timeout policy. In non-televised games, officials will allow a minimum of 90 seconds following any combination of the first two PAT’s, successful or unsuccessful field goals, or team called time outs in each quarter. In the event that one of these instances does not occur before the 10:00 and 5:00 marks, then the first change of possession following those marks will be recognized as the 90 second media timeout. In addition, the break at the end of the first quarter and the third quarter shall be 90 seconds in length. (Revised 6/11)

2.16 Pre-Game Format: A pre-game time line and a schematic of team warm-up areas shall be provided in

each team’s locker room upon their arrival on site. The field must be made available for warm-ups for both teams for the same duration of time. The visiting institution shall provide its own footballs for use during warm-ups. Ball persons should be reminded to extend the same courtesies to the visiting team as they do for the home team during warm-ups. The following is a pre-game countdown format:

A. Kickers shall be allowed to kick at both ends of the field until 60 minutes prior to kickoff; B. At 60 minutes prior to kickoff, the field shall be divided into an “L” shaped configuration with

the 30-yard lines forming the “L”; C. At 40 minutes prior to kickoff, the field shall be divided at the 45-yard lines (leaving a 10-

yard buffer zone for the teams between the 45-yard lines) until the teams leave the field after warm-ups.

2.17 Medical Arrangements: The host institution shall have an ambulance and a medical doctor available

at the site of the Conference game beginning at kickoff and concluding through the duration of the contest.

2.18 Field Phones: The home team shall provide access to 25 “dry line pairs” and a minimum standard of

field phone service for the visiting team, regardless of whether the visiting team elects to bring their own phone system. Minimum standards shall consist of two press box lines with headsets (one for offense and one for defense), connecting two lines and three headsets on the sidelines (one for offense, one for defense and one for the head coach). The head coach head set must be equipped to connect with the offensive or defensive line as the head coach desires through the use of a switching device.

90

2.18.1 Head Set System Malfunctions (Home Team System in Use for Both Teams): If either team’s head set system malfunctions, the nearest game official will be notified by the head coach. The official will then signal a timeout and advise the referee. The referee will then advise the opposing coach to remove all headsets on the sidelines. The game management director will then be notified of the problem before play is resumed. Once the system is restored, the game management director will notify the nearest official, who will notify the referee, who will notify both coaches that they can again use their field phones. Non-compliance with this policy would be considered a violation of the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code. The malfunction of an individual headset is not sufficient cause to stop play. Game management should be notified and the problem resolved as soon as possible.

2.18.2 Visiting Team Provides System: The visiting team may elect to provide its own system. If the

visiting team system is installed without interruption of the existing facility system, the home team must insure that the minimum standards are available and can be addressed immediately in the event of a visiting team system failure. This is accomplished by notifying the game management director and is done without interruption of the game. If the visiting team system is installed with interruption of the facility system, the home team is not obligated to provide service in the event of the visiting team’s system failure and the home team is not required to quit using their head sets if the visiting team experiences failure. Institutions are encouraged to always provide the same courtesies that they would expect from a Conference member.

2.19 Game Tie-Breakers: The NCAA tie-breaking system shall be used in all Conference games as

necessary. The following are the NCAA tie-breaking procedures:

A. In an overtime period, one end of the field is used and each team gets an offensive series beginning at the 25-yard line;

B. Each team shall have possession until it has scored, failed to gain a first and 10 by running out of downs or has lost possession through an intercepted pass, recovered backward pass, fumble or an unsuccessful field goal attempt;

C. The team scoring the greater number of points after the completion of both possessions is declared the winner;

D. If, after both possessions, there is no score or the score is tied, there will be subsequent overtime periods until a winner can be declared;

E. The final score will be the total of all points by each team in regulation and overtime periods. 2.20 Halftimes: All halftimes during conference versus conference games shall be 20 minutes in length.

Halftimes can be extended past the normal 20 minutes only by agreement of both competing institutions and with approval in advance by the Southern Conference office.

3.0 Football Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Football Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one faculty athletics representative, one senior woman administrator and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for football; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association as

situations warrant;

3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting football in the Southern Conference;

3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of football in the Southern Conference; 3.1.6 The head coaches’ representative shall be present and represent the Southern Conference at

the annual FCS Executive Committee meeting in June.

91


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year, either in-person or via conference call, to address all matters relating to the sport of football and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Football Committee and/or to the Athletics Directors Association.

5.0 Officiating

5.1 Coordinator of Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Football Officials, under the direction of the Southern Conference Commissioner and with the guidance of the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Officials Committee, shall establish a pool of officials for all Southern Conference games and assign all officials.


evaluation procedure shall include head coaches’ evaluations, evaluations by the coordinator of officials, and evaluations by appointed and qualified neutral observers. Coaches and observes shall review each officials’ performance through a standard form. The form should be sent to the coordinator of officials on the first working day following a Southern Conference game.

5.3 Crews: Southern Conference officials shall work within a “crew” system during the 2013 season. The

Southern Conference shall utilize seven-man crews during all Conference games.

5.4 Officiating Fees: The head referee shall be paid a flat fee of $900 per game in the 2013 season. Other officials shall be paid a flat fee of $875 per game. (Revised 11/11)

6.0 Game Management

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the game management director for all Southern Conference games. It is suggested that the game management director visit briefly with the game officials and the visiting head coach upon their arrival on site to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability during the game. The game management director, along with the game clock operator, play clock operator, and timeout liaison, shall then meet with the officiating crew in their dressing room approximately 105 (1:45) minutes prior to kickoff. The home athletics director and/or game management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.

6.1.1 Game Management Provisions: The following game management provisions shall

be provided for the visiting team by the home team: A. Sideline: Running water to bench, two 10-gallon coolers, two five-gallon coolers,

one ice chest, 500 hundred cups, one table for trainers’ use, 300 pounds of ice. B. Dressing Room: Minimum of 150 bath (not hand) towels, five cases of isotonics

(120 drinks) iced down, two treatment tables. C. Pre-Game Workouts: Two 10-gallon coolers with cups, bath towels to be provided

if home team notified in advance.


7.1 Only the designated public address announcer may use a microphone during a Southern Conference game. The only exception to this policy will be a microphone for use by cheerleaders when giving instructions to the crowd. The public address announcer is responsible for whatever is said over the PA system. The primary function of the announcer is to give specific information to the fans, not to incite them by unnecessary inflection of voice beyond the pre-game introduction of the home team.



8.2 Cheerleader Restrictions: No pyramids may be performed that are more than two tiers (persons)

high. No flips may be conducted other than those made from the ground. Mini-trampolines may not be used. Cheerleader megaphones should always be turned toward the crowd and never toward the field.

92

8.2.1 Cheerleader Microphones: Cheerleading squads may utilize a microphone and electronic amplifier while giving instructions to the crowd. The amplifier may not be directed toward the area of competition and may not be utilized during live ball situations. A live ball situation for these purposes shall be construed as the time when the offensive team breaks its huddle until the completion of the current play, or for teams that do not utilize a huddle, when the offensive team is becoming set at the line of scrimmage until the completion of the current play.

8.3 Band Restrictions: Bands are allowed to play only during pre-game, halftime, post game and during

dead ball situations (including timeouts). Bands are prohibited from playing during live ball situations. A live ball situation for these purposes shall be construed as the time when the offensive team breaks its huddle until the completion of the current play, or for teams that do not utilize a huddle, when the offensive team is becoming set at the line of scrimmage until the completion of the current play.

8.4 Dance Teams and Mascots: Regulations as they apply to cheerleaders also apply to dance teams

and mascots.

8.5 Visiting Team Courtesies: All visiting cheerleaders, pep bands, dance teams and official mascots (all in uniform) shall be admitted to Conference games at no cost and shall be permitted to perform during games in accordance with Conference rules. Visiting cheerleaders, pep bands, dance teams and official mascots must notify the host institution as to their intended presence at a particular game at least two weeks in advance. Performances on the playing field shall be the determination of the host game management director. All Conference institutions shall attempt to extend the same courtesies to the visiting institution’s representatives as it does to the host institution.

9.0 Conduct


9.2 Ejection/Suspension Policy: A coach or player removed from a game for any reason shall be

immediately suspended from their team’s next game. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-game suspension, a third ejection a four-game suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-game suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-game suspension.

9.3 Unsportsmanlike Behavior: Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct, including but not

limited to those described below, shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference.



9.3.2 Aggressive Behavior: The use of obscene gestures, profane language, or the display of hostile

action towards officials, spectators, or opponents shall be described as unsportsmanlike. 9.3.3 Ejection: The removal by an official from a competitive sport activity shall require the ejected


contest suspended from during the time period beginning one hour prior to the scheduled contest until the conclusion of the contest. Suspension does not affect practice opportunities outside of the above time limitations. (Updated 8/13)

9.3.5 Vicinity of Contest: The immediate area/site of the competition extended to include any point or


9.3.6 Competitive Conditions: The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a contest that

is safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

93

10.0 Artificial Noisemakers

10.1 Artificial noisemakers (air horns, electronic amplifiers, whistles, etc.) are not permissible in Southern Conference venues except for those amplifiers that are part of the official home or visiting band or cheerleading squad. Such instruments shall be removed from the facility when discovered. “Thunder Sticks” shall be allowed if distributed as part of a game-day promotion conducted by the home institution.

11.0 Signs

11.1 Signs of a derogatory nature directed towards an individual opponent, visiting team or game official are not permitted in Southern Conference stadiums. It is the responsibility of the home institution to ensure that such signs are immediately removed.


12.1 The home athletics director shall decide the policy regarding the use of explosive devices (cannons, rifles, rocket launchers, etc.), live mascots (horses, birds, etc.), and motorized vehicles in their facility. Visiting athletics directors need to request permission for the use of these items at least two weeks in advance and approval or disapproval of the request must be given immediately by the home athletics director.


13.1 The following awards shall be provided by the Conference and distributed to the appropriate institution following the conclusion of the regular season:

13.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy presented to the team with the best won-loss

percentage in Conference games;

13.1.2 All-Conference Team: Fifty plaques presented to the members of the All-Conference Team. Twenty-five plaques shall be presented to the members of the All-Conference First Team and 25 plaques shall be presented to the members of the All-Conference Second Team. The All-Conference Team shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players;

13.1.3 Offensive Player of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Offensive Player

of the Year. The Offensive Player of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

13.1.4 Defensive Player of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Defensive Player

of the Year. The Defensive Player of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;


The Freshman of the Year award shall be presented to the highest vote getter on the All-Freshman Team voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player; (Effective 5/08)



13.1.7 Players of the Week: Thirty-six certificates presented to student-athletes named Player of

the Week during the regular season. An Offensive, Defensive and Freshman Player of the Week shall be selected for all 12 weeks of the regular season. All Players of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office;

94

13.1.8 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Seventy (70) individual plaques will be presented to the head coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the championship team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion;

13.1.9 Players of the Month: An Offensive and Defensive Player of the Month shall be awarded at

the end of every month during the regular season. The Players of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office;

13.1.10 All-Freshman Team: An All-Freshman Team shall be named consisting of freshmen, red

shirt or otherwise. The coaches will vote for a 25 member All-Freshman Team consisting of 11 offensive players, 11 defensive players and 3 special teams players. The Freshman of the Year will be the highest vote getter on the All-Freshman Team. Balloting will be done as it is for All-Conference voting.

13.2 Sports Media Association Awards: In addition to the above mentioned awards, the Southern

Conference Sports Media Association shall select an All-Conference First Team (25 members), All-Conference Second Team (25 members), an Offensive Player of the Year, a Defensive Player of the Year, a Freshman of the Year, and a Coach of the Year upon the conclusion of the regular season. The Southern Conference Sports Media Association is responsible for producing and mailing plaques or trophies to commemorate these awards.

14.0 Two-Year Moratorium of Approved Sport Regulations: Sport regulations that have been approved

for amendment must be implemented for a total of two full seasons prior to being changed, except in instances where changes are made by a sport’s national governing body (i.e. an NCAA rule or policy). A 75% vote (9 of 11) of the athletic directors may override this policy on a case by case basis. (Approved and Effective 6/10)

95

2014 Men’s Golf


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor men’s golf as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University Davidson College Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University Samford University University of North Carolina at Greensboro University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Western Carolina University Wofford College




Conference institutions during the regular season. Southern Conference institutions hosting golf events during the regular season are encouraged to extend invitations of participation to other Conference schools.

2.2 Championship Determination: Southern Conference team or individual champions shall not be

determined during regular-season competition. Team and individual champions shall be determined at the Southern Conference Men’s Golf Championship.

2.3 Playing Rules: Playing rules as adopted by the NCAA and United States Golf Association (USGA)

shall be in effect for all Southern Conference golf events during the regular season. 2.4 Results Reporting: Conference institutions shall be responsible for reporting all results information of

regular season events to the Conference office. Institutions must send complete results (or have the host institution send) via fax or e-mail to the Conference office no later than the day following the completion of the event.


Southern Conference teams with non-conference or other Conference schools. 2.6 Complimentary Tickets: Conference institutions hosting regular season events shall provide

Conference visiting institutions with 50 complimentary tickets for the event, provided that the home institution is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival.


prior to the season. All student-athlete eligibility profiles shall be transmitted to the Conference office prior to a school’s first day of competition. This information shall be filed and in accordance with the instructions of the Southern Conference Associate Commissioner for Compliance. If any questions

96

arise, the Conference compliance administrator shall have the details on all student-athletes who are eligible for Conference regular-season and post-season competition.

2.8 Signs: Signs of a derogatory nature directed toward an individual opponent, visiting team or an official

are not permitted at events being hosted by Southern Conference institutions. It is the responsibility of the event management director to see that derogatory signs are confiscated.

2.9 Prior to Competition: It is recommended that Southern Conference institutions hosting regular-

season events make the competition course and host site driving range available for all participating teams on the day prior to the event. Each institution should be allowed the same amount of practice time and/or practice opportunities.

2.10 Lineups, Substitutions: Southern Conference institutions shall adhere to NCAA policies regarding

team lineups and substitutions. 3.0 Men’s Golf Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Men’s Golf Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one faculty athletics representative, one senior woman administrator and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for men’s golf; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association

and Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting men’s golf in the

Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sports of men’s golf in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall normally meet once a year to address all matters relating to the sport of men’s golf and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Men’s Golf Committee. Usually this meeting shall take place in July or August.

5.0 Officials

5.1 Home Institution Responsibilities: Southern Conference institutions hosting events during the regular season are responsible for contracting qualified USGA officials. It is recommended that a minimum of one qualified USGA official be present at all events.

6.0 Event Management

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the event management director for all events being hosted by Southern Conference institutions. It is suggested that the event management director visit briefly with the officials and the visiting head coaches prior to the event to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability. The home athletics director and/or event management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.


7.1 Only the designated starter or public address announcer may use a microphone during an event hosted by a Southern Conference institution. The starter or public address announcer is responsible for whatever is said over the PA system and must obey the rules of golf decorum at all times.

8.0 Conduct

97

8.1 Coaches’ Conduct: All head and assistant coaches are to conduct themselves in such a manner

during a competition as to ensure or promote good crowd control. They also are responsible for the conduct of their student-athletes and staff. Coaches (head and assistant) must follow Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations at all times.


immediately suspended from their team’s next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-contest suspension, a third ejection a four-contest suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-contest suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-contest suspension.

8.3 Unsportsmanlike Behavior: Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct including but not

limited to those described below shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference.




participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately. 8.3.4 Suspension. A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the vicinity of the




8.3.6 Competitive Conditions. The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a contest that

is safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior. 9.0 Two-Year Moratorium of Approved Sport Regulations: Sport regulations approved by the membership


Conference Championship Regulations 1.0 Tournament Format

1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a Conference championship shall be conducted to determine team and individual champions. All teams eligible to compete shall participate in the Conference championship. The length of the tournament shall be 54 holes, played over three days (normally either Friday, Saturday, Sunday or Sunday, Monday, Tuesday), except in cases of inclement weather. If teams and/or individuals are tied for first place at the completion of 54 holes, the Games Committee will do everything possible to complete a play-off. If it is not possible to complete a playoff on the final scheduled day of competition, the team and/or individual champion to represent the conference in the NCAA Championship will be determined by whichever team and/or individual tied for the lead has the highest Golfstat ranking just prior to the start of the Conference Championship. At least 36 holes of conference tournament play are required for the Conference Championship to be used to determine the conference champion and represent the conference during NCAA championship play. (Effective 10/09)

98

1.2 In the event that 54 holes cannot be completed by the last scheduled day of the championship, the following procedures will be used by the Games Committee to determine the team and individual conference champions and the automatic qualifiers to represent the conference during the NCAA Championship:

1.2.1 If 36 holes of the championship have been completed, the team and individual champion will be

determined using the scores of those 36 holes. If teams and/or individuals are tied for first place, the Games Committee will do everything possible to complete a play-off. If it is not possible to complete a playoff on the final scheduled day of competition, the team and/or individual champion to represent the conference in the NCAA Championship will be determined by whichever team and/or individual tied for the lead has the highest Golfstat ranking. In the event that the team and/or individuals in question are tied in the Golfstat rankings the conference champion will be determined first by head to head competition of the teams and/or individuals during the year. If there is still a tie at this point, stroke differential will be used to determine the conference champion. If a conference champion cannot be determined by the methods listed above, the conference champion will be determined by coin toss between the team(s) and/or individuals. The team and/or individual deemed the winner by this process will be declared the conference champion and will represent the conference in NCAA championship play;

1.2.2 In the event that 36 holes cannot be completed or conditions are such that the championship cannot

commence, the highest ranking team and individual as determined by Golfstat, just prior to the start of the Conference Championship, will be declared the conference champion and will represent the conference during NCAA championship play. That ranking shall be distributed to the coaches prior to the first round of the conference championship. In the event two or more teams and/or individuals enter the championship tied in the Golfstat rankings and the championship is cancelled due to inclement weather prior to the start of or before the completion of 36 holes, the conference champion will be determined first by head to head competition of the teams and/or individuals during the year. If there is still a tie at this point, stroke differential will be used to determine the conference champion. If a conference champion cannot be determined by the methods listed above, the conference champion will be determined by coin toss. The team and individual deemed the winner by this process will be declared the conference champion and will represent the conference in NCAA championship play;

1.2.3 In the event all teams have completed at least 9 holes of a round and play is suspended due to

inclement weather, the remaining holes will be completed as soon as the storm moves out of the area and presents no danger to the teams and spectators or commenced the next day if the round cannot be completed as scheduled. If 9 holes of the round are not completed by all teams, the Games Committee will convene to determine the appropriate course of action. (Effective 10/09)

2.0 Championship Dates The Southern Conference Men’s Golf Championship shall be conducted prior to the NCAA Regional Tournament on the dates recommended by the Men’s Golf Committee and approved by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association. The dates of the 2014 Southern Conference Championship shall be April 20-22. The championship will be held on the Sunday-Tuesday three weeks prior to the second Thursday-Saturday prior to Memorial Day so that the championship is 3 ½ weeks prior to the NCAA Regionals. (Approved 10/11)

3.0 Championship Location 3.1 2014 Championship Location: The site of the 2014 Southern Conference Men’s Golf Championship

shall be the National Golf Club in Pinehurst, N.C. 3.2 Future Championship Sites: Host sites for future Southern Conference Men’s Golf Championships

shall be determined at a later date. (Effective 06/11).

4.0 Championship Schedule

4.1 Start Times: All championship tee times shall be set by the Southern Conference Men’s Golf Committee.

99


5.1 Men’s Golf Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Men’s Golf Committee shall provide general oversight of the championship. The Men’s Golf Committee shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.

5.2 Games Committee: A Games Committee shall be appointed for the championship consisting of

Men’s Golf Committee members on site, the athletics director of the host institution or his or her designee, the Southern Conference championship administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), and the tournament director. The Games Committee shall:

A. Ensure that the championship is conducted in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Southern Conference as contained in the Southern Conference Championship Manual and these sport regulations;

B. Make decisions regarding situations that occur where resolution is not covered in the rules and regulations of the NCAA, USGA or the Southern Conference as stated in the Championship Manual or these sport regulations;


5.3 Tournament Director: The Southern Conference liaison on site shall serve as the tournament director, and shall perform the following functions under the direction of the Men’s Golf Committee:

A. Serve as supervisor of the championship; B. Plan and coordinate all activities of the championship in conjunction with the Southern

Conference Men’s Golf Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant championship information to all coaches, athletics directors, chief executive

officers, faculty athletics representatives, senior woman administrators and other necessary personnel of competing institutions;


championship manual; F. Delegate duties and responsibilities to championship personnel; G. Secure a certified trainer and other medical personnel for the championship.

5.4 Media Coordinator: The tournament director shall appoint a tournament media coordinator, who shall

perform the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the dissemination of results and make sure that results are made available to all

media as soon as possible after the conclusion of each round; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the championship; E. Be responsible for awards balloting; F. Coordinate the installation of phone lines for the media; G. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site.

5.5 Medical Personnel: All medical staff for the tournament shall be appointed by the tournament director

with approval of the Sports Medicine committee, who shall ensure that the following occurs: A. That a certified trainer is present for all practices and during all competitions; B. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on call during all competitions; C. That an EMS unit is on call during all competitions; D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all championship events; F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all head

athletic trainers and head coaches prior to their arrival at the championship site. 5.6 Officials: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA and USGA Rules. The tournament

director, working in conjunction with the Men’s Golf Committee, shall: A. Contract all officials to work the championship. The pool of officials shall include at least one

USGA certified official; B. Conduct pre-event and post-event meetings as necessary with officials; C. Oversee the selection and training of all other officials with the tournament director and

ensure that a training session is conducted for these officials prior to competition.

100

5.7 Additional Tournament Personnel: The following additional personnel shall be appointed by the tournament director and/or tournament media coordinator:

A. Tournament desk personnel; B. Starter; C. Scoreboard operator; E. Course spotters; F. In addition, Southern Conference Men’s Golf Committee members (excluding the head

coach representative), may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the championship.


marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community in which the championship are being held.

6.0 Championship Manual

6.1 The Southern Conference staff liaison shall send a championship manual to all Conference chief executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, athletics directors, senior woman administrators, head coaches and sports information directors at least one month prior to the championship. The following information shall be contained in the manual:

A. Facilities information; B. Telephone numbers and addresses of key championship personnel; C. Local maps; E. Dates, times and location of the championship and related activities; F. Information on team and institutional credentials and parking passes; G. A tournament itinerary; H. Medical and training information; I. Media information; J. Information on hospitality and social functions; K. Names and responsibilities of Local Organizing Committee personnel; L. Names and responsibilities of host institution personnel; M. A championship emergency plan and emergency telephone numbers.


7.1 Scoring: The tournament field shall be comprised of at least four and a maximum of five players from each institution. The team scores shall be determined by adding the four lowest scores of each team from each round. Players should return their scorecards to the tournament desk as soon as possible following the conclusion of each round. Individual scorecards shall be kept in strict accordance with Rule 6-6 of the USGA rulebook addressing “Scoring in Stroke Play”.

7.2 Tie-Breaking Procedures: Team ties shall be broken by a sudden death playoff counting the low four

scores relative to par on each hole. Play shall continue with new scoring on each successive hole until a winner is determined. The Games Committee will determine the starting holes. If a playoff involves more than two teams, a shotgun format shall be used. The team playoff will be conducted first with the playoff for individual spots to follow immediately after the conclusion of the team playoff. Once the shotgun sudden death format is started, that format shall be used until a winner is determined.

7.2.1 Sudden Death Playoff Procedures: Teams will draw for positions. For a two-team playoff, the

winner of the draw shall have the option of the A or B positions set forth below. For a playoff involving more than two teams, the teams shall assume the drawn letter position (A, B, C, etc.) set forth below. 7.2.1.1 Two-team Playoff: (A&B; tee off alternately)

#5A, #5B, #4A, #4B, #3A playoff hole #1 #3B, #2A, #2B, #1A, #1B playoff hole #1

7.2.1.2 Shotgun Format:

Three Teams: A#5 B#5 C#5 playoff hole 5 A#4 B#4 C#4 playoff hole 4 A#3 B#3 C#3 playoff hole 3

101

A#2 B#2 C#2 playoff hole 2 A#1 B#1 C#1 playoff hole 1 Four Teams: A#5 B#5 C#5 D#5 playoff hole 5 A#4 B#4 C#4 D#4 playoff hole 4 A#3 B#3 C#3 D#3 playoff hole 3 A#2 B#2 C#2 D#2 playoff hole 2 A#1 B#1 C#1 D#1 playoff hole 1 Five Teams: A#5 B#5 C#5 D#5 E#5 playoff hole 5 A#4 B#4 C#4 D#4 E#4 playoff hole 4 A#3 B#3 C#3 D#3 E#3 playoff hole 3 A#2 B#2 C#2 D#2 E#2 playoff hole 2 A#1 B#1 C#1 D#1 E#1 playoff hole 1 Players will play the numbered position they held at the start of the tournament. The format in pairings for six teams or more shall be consistent with the foregoing format as determined by the Games Committee.

7.2.2 Non-Sudden Death Tie Breaking Procedures: For the purpose of ranking teams for second

and third round pairings, and for situations where a sudden-death playoff cannot be completed, the following system shall be used to break ties, except as provided elsewhere when ties need not be broken at the championship:

Teams A. Cumulative total of the non-counting scores; B. Highest cumulative individual total; C. Second highest cumulative individual total; D. Third highest cumulative individual total; E. Fourth highest cumulative individual total; F. Lowest cumulative individual total; G. Committee decision. Individual A. That round’s score; B. Score from previous round(s); C. Coin Toss. When a tie exists within a team, the individual with the lowest team position will be given the later tee time. The foregoing procedure will also be used if a cut becomes necessary at any time after the completion of the second round of play at the championship.

7.3 Travel Squads: Travel squads to the championship shall be limited to eligible student-athletes of which only five can be designated to compete. Designation shall occur prior to the team’s first grouping tee time on day one. Only five student-athletes shall be permitted to play in the practice round at the championship course. (Clarified 6/10)

7.4 Rules: The rules for the championship shall conform to those rules adopted by the NCAA for the

Division I Men’s Golf Championship, the USGA, and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Championship Manual and these sport regulations.

7.5 Uniforms: All competitors must wear exclusively the official uniform of their institution in competition,

warm-up and during the post-championship awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institution’s official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (t-shirts, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributors’ normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes, bags, clubs, etc.) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.

102

7.6 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for submitting a list of competing student-athletes to the Conference compliance administrator no later than three (3) days prior to the start of the championship. The Conference office will verify the eligibility of these student-athletes and will notify an institution if a problem arises with any of its student-athletes. Student-athletes not deemed eligible to compete may not be in uniform during the Conference championship.

7.7 Head Coaches Meeting: A head coaches meeting will be held at the championship site prior to the

start of competition. The Men’s Golf Committee chair will conduct the meeting and review information pertinent to the championship. The head coach of each institution is required to attend this meeting. Head coaches who do not attend the meeting are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Men’s Golf Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.

7.8 Team Entries: The following items address the issues of team entries:

A. The Conference office shall provide an official entry form to the head coach at each institution at least 14 days prior to the championship;

B. Entry forms shall allow a maximum of five entries per team; C. Entry forms shall be faxed to the tournament director and the Conference office by a

specified time prior to the championship; D. The Conference office shall confirm receipt of entry forms for each institution by e-mail, fax

or phone prior to the championship; E. Each team has until its first tee time on the first day of competition to make a final

declaration of a maximum of five players to participate in the championship. Final declarations can be made by a team’s head coach or a designate.

7.9 Tee Times: Tee times on the first day of competition shall be determined based on each team’s finish

in the championship from the previous year. Teams finishing lower in the standings from the previous year shall have the earliest tee times on the first day. Tee times on the second and third days of competition shall be based on each team’s finish after the previous day’s competition, with the teams having the highest scores having the earlier tee times. (Effective 10/07)

7.9.1 Warm-Ups: Players shall not begin play prior to their announced tee times. A practice range

and putting green will be available to all teams beginning one hour prior to the first scheduled tee time each day.

7.9.2 Reporting To Tee: Players are recommended to be at the starting tee approximately five

minutes prior to their assigned starting time. It is the policy of the Southern Conference not to search for players who are late to the tee. The penalty for competitors that are late to the tee is two strokes at the first hole of stroke play or disqualification.

7.10 Practice Rounds: Tee times will be made available for all teams for one 18-hole practice round on the

day prior to the first day of tournament competition. All five players on each team shall play in one group but must not slow the pace of play on the course. Teams shall be assigned tee times based upon their finish from the previous year’s championship. The team that finished first shall have the first choice of practice time. The team that finished second shall the have the next choice, etc.

7.10.1 Practice Restrictions: Southern Conference teams or team members shall not be permitted to

play the selected championship course for two weeks (14 days) prior to the first official practice round of the championship. Any team members playing the course during the time period mentioned above shall be declared ineligible to compete in the tournament.

7.10.2 Practice Restrictions at a Neutral Site Championship Course: Southern Conference teams

or team members shall not be permitted to play at a neutral championship site subsequent to the start of an institution’s academic year during which the Conference Championship will be conducted other than those team members who are members of the course or those teams who are competing in sanctioned events of the state’s amateur or professional golf associations or collegiate events and the PGA. Any team members playing the course during the time period mentioned above shall be declared ineligible to compete in the tournament. (Approved 10/08)


following each round of the championship. Interviews with the media may take place following a 10-

103

minute cooling off period, which shall begin for competitors when they have finished their round, and for coaches when the final competitor of his team has finished the course.

7.12 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the official rules of the NCAA and

USGA. 7.13 Conduct: A warning, two-stroke penalty or disqualification may be assessed by a USGA certified

official or the Games Committee for conduct unbecoming to a collegiate golfer. The conduct shall include but not be limited to:

A. Club throwing, defined as releasing the club in a manner to cause harm to any person or the course;

B. Use of abusive language; C. Willful acts that damage property or equipment on the course; D. Other unbecoming conduct as determined by the USGA official or the Games Committee.

7.14 Lineups/Substitutions: All policies regarding team lineups and substitutions in effect during the

regular season shall also be in effect for the championship. 8.0 Awards

8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the final round, an awards ceremony shall be held at the awards presentation area. The head coaches and student-athletes of all teams should remain for the awards ceremony. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony:


team; 8.1.2 Runner-Up Trophy: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the runner-up

team; 8.1.3 Second-Fifth Place Finisher Plaques: Plaques shall be presented to each individual finishing

in second thru fifth place in the championship; 8.1.4 Individual Champion Plaque: A large plaque shall be presented to the individual winner of the

championship; 8.1.5 All-Conference Plaques: Ten plaques shall be presented to those individuals earning All-

Conference honors. The All-Conference Team shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championship site. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

8.1.6 Player of the Year Plaque: One plaque shall be presented to the person winning the Player of

the Year award. The Player of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championship site. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

8.1.7 Freshman of the Year Plaque: One plaque shall be presented to the person winning the

Freshman of the Year award. The Freshman of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championship site. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

8.1.8 Coach of the Year Plaques: One plaque shall be presented to the person winning the Coach of

the Year award. The Coach of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championship site. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office.

8.2 Other Awards: Other awards presented in conjunction with the championship are as follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Five individual plaques will be presented to the head

coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the winning team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.

104

8.3 Players of the Week: Eight certificates shall be presented during the course of the regular season to

those players selected as Players-of-the-Week. The-Players-of-the-Week shall be selected by the Conference Office.

8.4 Player of the Month: A Player of the Month award shall be selected at the end of every month during

the fall and spring seasons. The Player of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office. 8.5 All-Freshman Team: An All-Freshman Team shall be named consisting of five freshmen, true

freshmen, red shirt or otherwise. The coaches will vote to select the 5-member team. Balloting will be done as it is for All-Conference voting. (Approved 10/08)


9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Hospitality passes for use during

the championship, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Men’s Golf Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director.


championship. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Men’s Golf Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director.

105

2014 Women’s Golf


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor women’s golf as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University The Citadel Elon University Furman University Samford University University of North Carolina at Greensboro

University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Western Carolina University Wofford College




Conference institutions during the regular season. Southern Conference institutions hosting golf events during the regular season are encouraged to extend invitations of participation to other Conference schools.

2.2 Championship Determination: Southern Conference team or individual champions shall not be

determined during regular-season competition. Team and individual champions shall be determined at the Southern Conference Women’s Golf Championships.

2.3 Playing Rules: Playing rules as adopted by the NCAA and United States Golf Association (USGA) shall

be in effect for all Southern Conference golf events during the regular season. 2.4 Results Reporting: Conference institutions shall be responsible for reporting all results information of

regular season events to the Conference office. Institutions must send complete results (or have the host institution send) via fax or e-mail to the Conference office no later than the day following the completion of the event.


Southern Conference teams with non-conference or other Conference schools. 2.6 Complimentary Tickets: Conference institutions hosting regular season events shall provide Conference

visiting institutions with 50 complimentary tickets for the event, provided that the home institution is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival.


prior to the season. All student-athlete eligibility profiles shall be transmitted to the Conference office prior to a school’s first day of competition. This information shall be filed and in accordance with the instructions of the Southern Conference Associate Commissioner for Compliance. If any questions arise, the Conference compliance administrator shall have the details on all student-athletes who are eligible for Conference regular-season and post-season competition.

106

2.8 Signs: Signs of a derogatory nature directed toward an individual opponent, visiting team or an official are not permitted at events being hosted by Southern Conference institutions. It is the responsibility of the event management director to see that derogatory signs are confiscated.

2.9 Prior To Competition: It is recommended that Southern Conference institutions hosting regular-season

events make the competition course and host site driving range available for all participating teams on the day prior to the event. Each institution should be allowed the same amount of practice time and/or practice opportunities.

2.10 Lineups, Substitutions: Southern Conference institutions shall adhere to NCAA policies regarding team

lineups and substitutions. 3.0 Women’s Golf Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Women’s Golf Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one faculty athletics representative, one senior woman administrator, and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for women’s golf; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association and

Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting women’s golf in the

Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of women’s golf in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year to address all matters relating to the sport of women’s golf and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Women’s Golf Committee. This meeting shall normally take place in the month of August.

5.0 Officials

5.1 Home Institution Responsibilities: Southern Conference institutions hosting events during the regular

season are responsible for contracting qualified USGA officials. It is recommended that a minimum of one qualified USGA official be present at all events.

6.0 Event Management

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the event management director for all events being hosted by Southern Conference institutions. It is suggested that the event management director visit briefly with the officials and the visiting head coaches prior to the event to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability. The home athletics director and/or event management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.


7.1 Only the designated starter or public address announcer may use a microphone during an event hosted by a Southern Conference institution. The starter or public address announcer is responsible for whatever is said over the PA system and must obey the rules of golf decorum at all times.

8.0 Conduct

8.1 Coaches’ Conduct: All head and assistant coaches are to conduct themselves in such a manner during a

competition as to ensure or promote good crowd control. They also are responsible for the conduct of their

107

student-athletes and staff. Coaches (head and assistant) must follow Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations at all times.


immediately suspended from their team’s next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-contest suspension, a third ejection a four-contest suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-contest suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-contest suspension.



8.3.1 Fighting: Any attempt by a person to strike an opponent or contest participant in a combative manner unrelated to the sport involved or any act that insights an opponent to retaliate by acting in a similar manner shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.



participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately. 8.3.4 Suspension: A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the vicinity of the contest

suspended from during the time period beginning one hour prior to the scheduled contest until one hour after the contest is completed. Suspension does not affect practice opportunities outside of the above time limitations.



8.3.6 Competitive Conditions: The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a contest that is

safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior. 9.0 Two-Year Moratorium of Approved Sport Regulations: Sport regulations approved by the membership must


Conference Championships Regulations 1.0 Championships Format

1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a Conference championship shall be conducted to determine team and individual champions. All teams eligible to compete shall participate in the Conference championships. The length of the tournament shall be 54 holes, played over three days (normally either Friday, Saturday, Sunday or Sunday, Monday, Tuesday), except in cases of inclement weather.

1.2 In the case of inclement weather and the postponement of tournament play, the Games Committee, with

the availability of the host golf course, can allow 36 holes to be played in one day in an effort to ensure that all 54 holes are played and the tournament is concluded in full. (Effective 10/07)

2.0 Championships Dates

The Southern Conference Women’s Golf Championships shall be conducted prior to the NCAA Regional Tournament on the dates recommended by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association. The dates of the 2014 Southern Conference Championships shall be April 13-15.

108


3.1 The location of the Southern Conference Women’s Golf Championships after 2014 shall be determined by a bid process conducted by the conference office. 3.1.1 2014 Championships Location: The site of the 2014 Southern Conference Women’s Golf

Championships shall be the North Course at Moss Creek Golf Club in Hilton Head Island, S.C. 3.1.2 Future Championships Sites: The dates of the 2015 women’s golf championship will be April 19-

21 at a location to be determined. 3.1.3 Hosting Rotation: When the conference golf championship is held at a neutral site, a three-member

hosting rotation will be in effect to assist in the staffing of the event. (Approved 10/08) The hosts for the 2014 championship will be UNCG and Furman.


4.1 Start Times: All championships tee times shall be set by the Southern Conference Women’s Golf Committee.


5.1 Women’s Golf Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Women’s Golf Committee shall provide general oversight of the championships. The Women’s Golf Committee shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.

5.2 Games Committee: A Games Committee shall be appointed for the championships consisting of

Women’s Golf Committee members on site, the athletics director of the host institution or his or her designee, the Southern Conference championships administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), and the tournament director. The Games Committee shall:

A. Ensure that the championships are conducted in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Southern Conference as contained in the Southern Conference Championships Manual and these sport regulations;

B. Make decisions regarding situations that occur where resolution is not covered in the rules and regulations of the NCAA, USGA or the Southern Conference as stated in the Championships Manual or these sport regulations;


5.3 Tournament Director: The Southern Conference Assistant Commissioner for Championships shall serve as the tournament director. The tournament director shall perform the following functions under the direction of the Women’s Golf Committee:

A. Serve as supervisor of the championship; B. Plan and coordinate all activities of the championship in conjunction with the Southern

Conference Women’s Golf Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant championship information to all coaches, athletics directors, chief executive

officers, faculty athletics representatives, senior woman administrators and other necessary personnel of competing institutions;


championships manual; F. Delegate duties and responsibilities to championships personnel; G. Secure a certified trainer and other medical personnel for the championship through the

existing Southern Conference Sports Medicine committee. 5.4 Media Coordinator: The tournament director shall appoint a tournament media coordinator, who shall

perform the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the dissemination of results and make sure that results are made available to all

media as soon as possible after the conclusion of each round; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the championships; E. Be responsible for awards balloting;

109

F. Coordinate the installation of phone lines for the media; G. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site.

5.5 Medical Personnel: All medical staff for the tournament shall be appointed by the tournament director

with the approval of the Sports Medicine Committee, who shall ensure that the following occurs: (Effective 5/08)

A. That a certified trainer is present for all practices and during all competitions; B. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on call during all competitions; C. That an EMS unit is on call during all competitions; D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all championships events; F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all head

athletic trainers and head coaches prior to their arrival at the championships site.

5.6 Officials: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA and USGA Rules. The tournament director, working in conjunction with the Women’s Golf Committee, shall:

A. Contract all officials to work the championships. The pool of officials shall include at least one USGA certified official;

B. Conduct pre-event and post-event meetings as necessary with officials; C. Oversee the selection and training of all other officials with the tournament director and ensure

that a training session is conducted for these officials prior to competition.


A. Tournament desk personnel; B. Starter; C. Scoreboard operator; D. Course spotters; E. In addition, Southern Conference Women’s Golf Committee members (excluding the head

coach representative), may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the championships.


marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the championships are being held in.


6.1 The Southern Conference staff liaison shall send a championships manual to all Conference chief

executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, athletics directors, senior woman administrators, head coaches and sports information directors at least one month prior to the championships. The following information shall be contained in the manual:

A. Facilities information; B. Telephone numbers and addresses of key championships personnel; C. Local maps; D. Dates, times and location of the championships and related activities; E. Information on team and institutional credentials and parking passes; F. A tournament itinerary; G. Medical and training information; H. Media information; I. Information on hospitality and social functions; J. Names and responsibilities of Local Organizing Committee personnel; K. Names and responsibilities of host institution personnel; L. A championships emergency plan and emergency telephone numbers.


7.1 Scoring: The tournament field shall be comprised of at least four and a maximum of five players from each institution. The team scores shall be determined by adding the four lowest scores of each team from each round. Players should return their scorecards to the tournament desk as soon as possible following the conclusion of each round. Individual scorecards shall be kept in strict accordance with Rule 6-6 of the USGA rulebook addressing “Scoring in Stroke Play”.

110

7.2 Tie-Breaking Procedures: Team ties shall be broken by a sudden death playoff counting the low four

scores relative to par on each hole. Play shall continue with new scoring on each successive hole until a winner is determined. The Games Committee will determine the starting holes. If a playoff involves more than two teams, a shotgun format shall be used. The team playoff will be conducted first with the playoff for individual spots to follow immediately after the conclusion of the team playoff. Once the shotgun sudden death format is started, that format shall be used until a winner is determined.

7.2.1 Sudden Death Playoff Procedures: Teams will draw for positions. For a two-team playoff, the

winner of the draw shall have the option of the A or B positions set forth below. For a playoff involving more than two teams, the teams shall assume the drawn letter position (A, B, C, etc.) set forth below. 7.2.1.1 Two-team Playoff: (A&B; tee off alternately)

#5A, #5B, #4A, #4B, #3A playoff hole #1 #3B, #2A, #2B, #1A, #1B playoff hole #1

7.2.1.2 Shotgun Format:

Three Teams: A#5 B#5 C#5 playoff hole 5 A#4 B#4 C#4 playoff hole 4 A#3 B#3 C#3 playoff hole 3 A#2 B#2 C#2 playoff hole 2 A#1 B#1 C#1 playoff hole 1 Four Teams: A#5 B#5 C#5 D#5 playoff hole 5 A#4 B#4 C#4 D#4 playoff hole 4 A#3 B#3 C#3 D#3 playoff hole 3 A#2 B#2 C#2 D#2 playoff hole 2 A#1 B#1 C#1 D#1 playoff hole 1 Five Teams: A#5 B#5 C#5 D#5 E#5 playoff hole 5 A#4 B#4 C#4 D#4 E#4 playoff hole 4 A#3 B#3 C#3 D#3 E#3 playoff hole 3 A#2 B#2 C#2 D#2 E#2 playoff hole 2 A#1 B#1 C#1 D#1 E#1 playoff hole 1 Players will play the numbered position they held at the start of the tournament. The format in pairings for six teams or more shall be consistent with the foregoing format as determined by the Games Committee.

7.2.2 Non-Sudden Death Tie Breaking Procedures: For the purpose of ranking teams for second and

third round pairings, and for situations where a sudden-death playoff cannot be completed, the following system shall be used to break ties, except as provided elsewhere when ties need not be broken at the championships:

Teams A. Cumulative total of the non-counting scores; B. Highest cumulative individual total; C. Second highest cumulative individual total; D. Third highest cumulative individual total; E. Fourth highest cumulative individual total; F. Lowest cumulative individual total; G. Committee decision. Individual A. That round’s score; B. Score from previous round(s); C. Coin Toss. When a tie exists within a team, the individual with the lowest team position will be given the later tee time. The foregoing procedure will also be used if a cut becomes necessary at any time after the completion of the second round of play at the championships.

111

7.3 Travel Squads: Travel squads to the championship shall be limited to eligible student-athletes of which

only five can be designated to compete. Designation shall occur prior to the team’s first grouping tee time on day one. Only five student-athletes shall be permitted to play in the practice round at the championship course. (Clarified 6/10)

7.4 Rules: The rules for the championship shall conform to those rules adopted by the NCAA for the Division I

Women’s Golf Championships, the USGA, and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Championships Manual and these sport regulations.


warm-up and during the post-championships awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institutions’ official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (t-shirts, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributor’s normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes, bags, clubs, etc.) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.


athletes to the Conference compliance administrator no later than three (3) days prior to the start of the championship. The Conference office will verify the eligibility of these student-athletes and will notify an institution if a problem arises with any of its student-athletes. Student-athletes not deemed eligible to compete may not be in uniform during the Conference championship.

7.7 Head Coaches Meeting: A head coaches meeting will be held at the championships site prior to the start

of competition. The Women’s Golf Committee chair will conduct the meeting and review information pertinent to the championships. The head coach of each institution is required to attend this meeting. Head coaches who do not attend the meeting are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Women’s Golf Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.

7.8 Team Entries: The following items address the issues of team entries:

A. The Conference office shall provide an official entry form to the head coach at each institution at least 14 days prior to the championship;

B. Entry forms shall allow a maximum of five entries per team; C. Entry forms shall be faxed to the tournament director and the Conference office at a specified

time prior to the championship; D. The Conference office shall confirm receipt of entry forms for each institution by e-mail, fax or

phone prior to the championship; E. Each team has until its first tee time on the first day of competition to make a final declaration

of a maximum of five players to participate in the championship. Final declarations can be made by a team’s head coach or a designate;

7.9 Tee Times: Tee times on the first day of competition shall be determined based on each team’s finish in

the championships from the previous year. Teams finishing lower in the standings from the previous year shall have the earliest tee times on the first day. Tee times on the second and third days of competition shall be based on each team’s finish after the previous day’s competition.

7.9.1 Warm-Ups: Players shall not begin play prior to their announced tee times. A practice range and

putting green will be available to all teams beginning one hour prior to the first scheduled tee time each day.

7.9.2 Reporting To Tee: Players are recommended to be at the starting tee approximately five minutes

prior to their assigned starting time. It is the policy of the Southern Conference not to search for players who are late to the tee. The penalty for competitors that are late to the tee is two strokes at the first hole of stroke play or disqualification.

7.10 Practice Rounds: Tee times will be made available for all teams for one 18-hole practice round on the

day prior to the first day of tournament competition. All five players on each team shall play in one group but must not slow the pace of play on the course. Teams shall be assigned tee times based upon their finish from the previous year’s championship. The team that finished first shall have the first choice of practice time. The team that finished second shall the have the next choice, etc.

112

7.10.1 Practice Restrictions: Southern Conference teams or team members shall not be permitted to play

the selected championship course for two weeks (14 days) prior to the first official practice round of the championship. Any team members playing the course during the time period mentioned above shall be declared ineligible to compete in the tournament.

7.10.2 Practice Restrictions at a Neutral Site: Southern Conference teams or team members shall not be

permitted to play the selected championship course subsequent to the beginning of each institution’s academic year prior to the first official practice round of the championship. Any team members playing the course during the time period mentioned above shall be declared ineligible to compete in the tournament. (Approved 10/08)


each round of the championships. Interviews with the media may take place following a 10-minute cooling off period, which shall begin for competitors when they have finished their round, and for coaches when the final competitor of his or her team has finished the course.

7.12 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the official rules of the NCAA and

USGA. 7.13 Conduct: A warning, two-stroke penalty or disqualification may be assessed by a USGA certified official

or the Games Committee for conduct unbecoming to a collegiate golfer. The conduct shall include but not be limited to:

A. Club throwing, defined as releasing the club in a manner to cause harm to any person or the course;

B. Use of abusive language; C. Willful acts that damage property or equipment on the course; D. Other unbecoming conduct as determined by the USGA official or the Games Committee.

7.14 Lineups/Substitutions: All policies regarding team lineups and substitutions in effect during the regular

season shall also be in effect for the championships.

7.15 Determination of Conference Champion due to Inclement Weather: In the event conditions are such that the championship cannot be resumed, the following procedures will be used in order to determine the conference champion and the automatic qualifier who will represent the conference during NCAA Championship play: (Effective 10/07)

7.15.1 In the event the tournament cannot be played due to inclement weather, the highest ranking team

as determined by Golfstat (not Division Rating) will be declared the conference champion and will represent the conference during the NCAA championship play;

7.15.2 In the event two or more teams enter the tournament tied in the Golfstat rankings (not Division

Rating) and the tournament is cancelled due to inclement weather prior to the start of or the completion of an entire round, the conference champion will be determined by coin toss between the highest ranking team(s) if there is a two team tie for the highest ranking. In the event there are more than two teams tied for the highest ranking, the conference champion will be determined by a coin toss elimination process. The team deemed the winner by this process will be declared the conference champion and will represent the conference in NCAA championship play;

7.15.3 In the event the tournament has commenced, but the first round cannot be completed and the

tournament is subsequently cancelled, the highest ranked team entering the tournament as determined by Golfstat (not Division Rating) will be declared the conference champion and will represent the conference during NCAA championship play. In the event of a tie, the conference will follow the coin toss procedure listed under item 2 above;

7.15.4 In the event half the field has completed 9 holes of a round and play is suspended, the remaining

holes will be completed as soon as conditions allow. If nine (9) holes of the round cannot be completed by half the field on that day, the round will be cancelled and no scores will count; and (Clarified 08/09)

7.15.5 In the event the tournament has commenced and the first round has been completed or any

subsequent rounds have been completed, the tournament champion will be determined based

113

upon the conference tournament rankings. The team who is leading the tournament at the time play is suspended or subsequently cancelled will be declared the conference champion and will represent the conference during NCAA championship play. In the event that there is a tie between two teams, the conference champion will be determined by comparing the scores of the 5th players on the last day of competition. In the event that a champion cannot be determined using the last day scores of the 5th player, the conference will determine the champion using the 5th player’s total scores for the tournament. In the event that a champion cannot be determined using the two methods mentioned above, the conference will resort to head to head competition of the teams during the year. Finally, if a conference champion cannot be determined by the methods listed above, the conference will follow the coin toss procedure listed under item 2 above.

8.0 Awards

8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the final round, an awards ceremony shall be held at the awards presentation area. The head coaches and student-athletes of all teams should remain for the awards ceremony. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony: 8.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the winning team; 8.1.2 Runner-Up Trophy: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the runner-up team; 8.1.3 Second-Fifth Place Finisher Plaques: Plaques shall be presented to each individual finishing in

second thru fifth place in the championship; 8.1.4 Individual Champion Plaque: A large plaque shall be presented to the individual winner of the

championships; 8.1.5 All-Conference Plaques: Ten plaques shall be presented to those individuals earning All-

Conference honors. After the conclusion of the season and prior to the Championship, Golf Stat will provide the Southern Conference with the rankings, which include adjusted averages. From that list, the top 5 from the rankings are automatically on the All-Conference team. Coaches will then vote for players 6-10 on a 5-4-3-2-1 point system. Those ballots will be due by the end of the final round at the Championship. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

8.1.6 Player of the Year Plaque: One plaque shall be presented to the person winning the Player of the

Year award. The Player of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championships site. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

8.1.7 Freshman of the Year Plaque: One plaque shall be presented to the person winning the Freshman

of the Year award. The Freshman of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championships site. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

8.1.8 Coach of the Year Plaques: One plaque shall be presented to the person winning the Coach of the

Year award. The Coach of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championships site. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office.

8.2 Other Awards: Other awards presented in conjunction with the championships are as follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Five individual plaques will be presented to the head

coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the winning team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.

8.2.2 Players of the Week: Eight Player of the Week awards shall be selected during the regular season.

The Players of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office.

114

8.2.3 Player of the Month: A Player of the Month award shall be selected at the end of every month during the fall and spring seasons. The Player of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office.

8.2.4 All-Freshman Team: An All-Freshman Team shall be named consisting of five freshmen, true

freshmen, red shirt or otherwise. The head coaches will vote to select the five-member team. Balloting will be done as it is for All-Conference voting. (Approved 10/08)


9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Hospitality passes for use during the championships, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Women’s Golf Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.


championships. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Women’s Golf Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.

115

2013 Men’s Soccer


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor men’s soccer as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University Davidson College Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University University of North Carolina at Greensboro Wofford College


2.1 Scheduling: NCAA policies regarding scheduling requirements are the official policies of the Southern Conference. 2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: Each school shall play all members of the Conference once during the

regular season (seven Conference matches). The Southern Conference office shall produce a league master schedule prior to the annual coaches meeting. Conference games shall be scheduled to be played on Tuesdays and Saturdays. Teams reserve the right to make changes to the Conference master schedule as long as participating athletics directors are agreeable to the moves and the moves are approved by the conference office. The game start times and locations shall be the prerogative of the home institution.

2.1.2 Non-Division I Opponents: Each Southern Conference school may play one NCAA non-

Division I opponent during the regular season.

2.2 Championship Determination: The Southern Conference champion shall be determined by a points system. The champion shall be the school that accumulates the greatest number of points in conference matches during the regular season where three points are awarded for a win and one point for a tie. In the case that two or more schools finish with identical points, they shall be declared co-champions.

2.3 Regular-Season Finish: League rank, based on the regular season points system, shall determine

the seeding position of teams into the Southern Conference Tournament. Ties for seeding purposes shall be broken using the Southern Conference tie-breaking system.


matches. 2.5 Field Dimensions: The recommended field size for all Southern Conference matches is 120' x 75'.

The minimum field size for Southern Conference matches is 115' x 70'. 2.6 Official Ball: Any NCAA approved brand of men’s soccer ball may be used during regular-season

Southern Conference matches. 2.7 Official Scorer: The home team shall provide an official scorer for all Southern Conference matches.

The visiting team may provide a scorer for the purpose of improving the accuracy of data collection during a match. The home team scorer shall always be designated the official book.


both teams and compiling an official NCAA box score. The home stats crew must send a completed

116

final NCAA box score via e-mail to the Southern Conference office on the same day that a Southern Conference match is completed. The visiting head coach should receive a copy of the official NCAA box score after the conclusion of each Conference match.

2.9 Video Exchange Policies: Each Southern Conference institution shall exchange game films via the

conference’s internet video exchange program. All conference and non-conference games will be available on an open exchange basis to all conference members and the conference office. All game film should include each match in a continuous fashion (i.e., no breaks between goals, etc.), should be filmed from a midfield location at a height no less than 6’ and should include sound. (Approved and effective 6/11)

2.9.1 Uploading Deadlines: For Conference matches, game files of weekend games must be

uploaded by the home team by noon (ET) of the following Monday. Game files of mid-week matches must be uploaded by the home team by noon (ET) of the following day. For NON-conference weekend matches, game films must be uploaded by noon ET of the following Tuesday. NON-conference mid-week matches must be uploaded by noon ET of the following day. (Approved and effective 6/11)

. 2.10 Uniforms: For all Conference games, the home team must wear light colored uniforms and the visiting

team must wear uniforms of contrasting color. It is required that all conference schools place a Southern Conference logo on their game uniforms. The recommended placement is on the left or right sleeve of the jersey, facing the side, approximately three inches above the bottom of the sleeve.


tickets for each Conference game, provided that the home team is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival. In accordance with Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations, a buffer section of visiting team seats or empty space must be provided in the area immediately behind the visiting team bench as it may be appropriate for each particular venue. The 50 complimentary tickets for the visiting team must be located within the buffer zone area. (Revised 5/13)



2.13 Pre-Game Format: The competition area (field) shall be available at least one hour prior to a match to

allow for warm-ups. Teams are limited to one half of the field while warming up if both teams are on the field. The same amount of warm-up time must be made available to both teams. Ball persons should be reminded to extend the same courtesies to the visiting team as they do for the home team during warm-ups. The host institution shall provide the visiting head coach with a pre-game itinerary and/or time line upon the visiting team’s arrival on site.

2.13.1 Player Introductions: For all games, the eleven starters will walk to mid field, international

style with the officials and face the crowd. When the player’s name is announced, that player would step forward and acknowledge the crowd. All eleven players shall also cross midfield and shake hands with the opposing team before the start of the game.

2.14 Ball Rotational System: A minimum of a five-ball rotational system should be used during all

Southern Conference matches. It is recommended that the home institution employ at least two ball persons to work all Conference matches. The ball persons shall act as a ball retriever to avoid unnecessary delay of the match. (Amended by NCAA 6/12)

2.15 Game Intervals: Intervals in play during Conference matches shall be as follows:

2.15.1 Halftime Intervals: Halftimes in Conference matches shall be 15 minutes in duration. A shorter

break is permissible (minimum of 10 minutes) by mutual consent of both head coaches.

117

2.15.2 Overtime Intervals: The interval between the end of regulation play and the first overtime period shall be five minutes. The interval between the first overtime period and the second overtime period shall be two minutes.

3.0 Men’s Soccer Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Men’s Soccer Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one faculty athletics representative, one senior woman administrator and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for men’s soccer; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association

and Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting men’s soccer in the

Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of men’s soccer in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year to address all matters relating to the sport of men’s soccer and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Men’s Soccer Committee. This meeting shall normally take place in the month of January.

5.0 Officiating

5.1 Coordinator of Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Soccer Officials, under the direction of the Southern Conference Commissioner and with the guidance of the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Officials Committee, shall establish a pool of officials for all Southern Conference matches and assign all officials. A three-person (head referee and two assistant referees) diagonal system of control shall be utilized.


evaluation procedure shall include head coaches’ evaluations and evaluations by the Coordinator of Officials and qualified assessors. Coaches shall review each official’s performance through a standard form. These forms should be sent to the Coordinator of Officials on the first working day following a Conference match.

5.3 Officials’ Uniforms: Officials’ uniforms for all Southern Conference matches shall be of contrasting

color to uniforms worn by the participating teams (including goal keepers). 5.4 Officiating Fees: For 2013, each school will pay the conference assignor a $980 game fee for each

conference match. The conference assignor would then be responsible for paying all 3 officials for the match from that $980 fee. (Approved 7/12)

6.0 Match Management

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the match management director for all Southern Conference matches. It is suggested that the match management director visit briefly with the officials and the visiting head coach prior to the match to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability. The home athletics director and/or match management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.


by the home team:

118

A. Bench: One 10-gallon cooler of water, one ice chest with ice and bags, two sleeves of cups, bench towels, one biohazard box.

B. Dressing Room: A dressing room with showers if requested in advance. Shower towels as needed if requested in advance.


7.1 Only the designated public address announcer may use a microphone during a Southern Conference match. The public address announcer is responsible for whatever is said over the PA system. The primary function of the announcer is to give specific information to the fans, not to incite them by unnecessary inflection of voice beyond the pre-match introduction of the home team.



8.2 Cheerleader Restrictions: Megaphones may never be turned toward the playing field. Amplified

microphones are prohibited. No pyramids may be performed that are more than two tiers (persons) high. No flips may be conducted other than those made from the ground. Mini-trampolines may not be used. Cheerleaders should never be located behind an opposing team’s bench.

8.3 Band Restrictions: Bands are allowed to play only during pre-match, halftime, post match and during

stoppages of play on the field. 8.4 Dance Teams and Mascots: Regulations as they apply to cheerleaders also apply to dance teams

and mascots. 8.5 Travel Restrictions: Cheerleading squads, bands and dance teams may travel during soccer season

only on weekends. 9.0 Artificial Noisemakers: Artificial noisemakers (air horns, electronic amplifiers, whistles, etc.) are not

permissible in Southern Conference venues except for those amplifiers that are part of the official home or visiting team pep band or cheerleading squad. Such instruments shall be removed from the facility when discovered. ”Thunder sticks” shall be allowed if distributed as part of a game-day promotion conducted by the home institution. (Effective 5/08).

10.0 Signs

10.1 Signs of a derogatory nature directed towards an individual opponent, visiting team or game official are not permitted in Southern Conference venues. It is the responsibility of the home institution to ensure that such signs are immediately removed.

11.0 Conduct

11.1 Coaches’ Conduct: All head and assistant coaches are to conduct themselves in such a manner during a match as to ensure or promote good crowd control. They also are responsible for the conduct of the players and other staff on the bench. Coaches (head and assistant) must follow Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations at all times.

11.2 Player Conduct: The Conference office will review all red cards issued to league teams during a

season. All players and head coaches are susceptible to the enforcement of Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations regarding ejections from contests for the issuing of red cards.

11.2.1 Ejection/Suspension Policy: A coach or player removed from a contest by the

issuance of a red card for unsportsmanlike behavior (i.e.: fighting, flagrant behavior, profanity, etc.) shall be immediately suspended from their team’s next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-match suspension, a third ejection a four-match suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-match suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record

119

cleared and return to a one-match suspension. Other red card ejections (i.e.: handballs, encroachment, accumulation of two yellow cards in the same game, etc.) will be penalized only according to NCAA rules and regulations.

11.2.3 Unsportsmanlike Behavior: Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct

including but not limited to those described below shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference.

11.2.3.1 Fighting: Any attempt by a person to strike an opponent or contest participant in

a combative manner unrelated to the sport involved or any act that insights an opponent to retaliate by acting in a similar manner shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

11.2.3.2 Aggressive Behavior: The use of obscene gestures, profane language, or the

display of hostile action towards officials, spectators, or opponents shall be described as unsportsmanlike.

11.2.3.3 Ejection: The removal by an official from a competitive sport activity shall require

the ejected participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately. 11.2.3.4 Suspension: A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the

vicinity of the contest suspended from during the time period beginning one hour prior to the scheduled contest until the conclusion of the contest. Suspension does not affect practice opportunities outside of the above time limitations.

11.2.3.5 Vicinity of Contest: The immediate area/site of the competition extended to

include any point or place from which the ejected/suspended individual could observe, supervise, or participate in any manner in the contest from which the participant is being ejected or suspended.

11.2.3.6 Competitive Conditions: The failure of an institution to provide an environment

for a contest that is safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.



12.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy, presented to the top team in the conference regular

season standings as determined by the points system. In the case of a tie, all teams involved in the tie shall receive trophies.

12.1.2 All-Conference Team: Twenty-two plaques presented to the members of the All-Conference

Team. Eleven plaques shall be presented to members of the All-Conference First Team and 11 plaques shall be presented to members of the All-Conference Second Team. The All-Conference Team shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players;


the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players;

12.1.4 All-Freshman Team: Eleven plaques presented to the All-Freshman Team. The All-Freshman

team will consist of the best true or red shirt freshmen voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player; (Effective 5/08)


Freshman of the Year award shall be the highest vote getter on the All-Freshman Team voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

120

12.1.6 Coach of the Year: One plaque presented to the person voted Coach of the Year. The Coach

of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office;


Week during the regular season. The Players of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office;

12.1.8 Players of the Month: A Player of the Month award shall be selected at the end of each month

during the season. The Player of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office; 13.0 Two-Year Moratorium of Approved Sport Regulations: Sport regulations approved by the membership



1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a single-elimination Conference tournament shall be conducted to determine the Southern Conference Tournament champion and the recipient of the league’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament. Each of the seven teams in the Conference regular-season standings that are eligible to compete will participate in the Conference tournament. The tournament will be conducted over two days. (Approved 06/09)

1.2 For 2013, the #1 seed will receive a bye and the #2, #3 and #4 seeds in the Conference tournament

shall host a first-round tournament match on Saturday, November 9. The winners of the three games will advance to play at a common site with the semifinals of the tournament taking place on Friday, November 15 and the championship match taking place on Sunday, November 17.


The Southern Conference Tournament will be conducted prior to the NCAA Tournament on the dates recommended by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association.



Men’s Soccer Committee. All bids shall be reviewed and voted on by the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association and Athletics Directors Association.

3.1.1 2013 Tournament Location: The 2013 Men’s Soccer Championship will be at Furman

University in Greenville, S.C. (Friday/Sunday format); (Approved 6/12) 3.1.2 Future Tournament Locations: Future sites of the semifinal and final tournament matches

will be as follows: Nov. 13 &15, 2014 – WakeMed Complex (Thursday/Saturday); Nov. 13 &15, 2015—UNCG (Friday/Sunday format). (Approved 6/12)


4.1 2013 Tournament Schedule: The 2013 Conference tournament shall be played on November 15 & 17 (Friday/Sunday format). The tournament bracket and match times shall be set by the Southern Conference Men’s Soccer Committee. Matches may not start before announced times.


121

5.1 Men’s Soccer Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Men’s Soccer Committee shall provide general oversight of the tournament. The Men’s Soccer Committee shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.

5.2 Games Committee: A Games Committee shall be appointed for first-round tournament games (if

scheduled) consisting of a designated representative from each competing institution and an on-site conference office liaison. A Games Committee shall be appointed for the tournament semifinals and final consisting of Men’s Soccer Committee members on site, the Southern Conference championships administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), and the tournament director. The Games Committee shall:




5.3 Tournament Director (Semifinals and Final): The host institution or agency for the tournament shall appoint a tournament director who, along with the conference Assistant Commissioner for Championships, shall perform the following functions under the direction of the Men’s Soccer Committee:


Conference Men’s Soccer Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant tournament information to all coaches, athletics directors, senior woman




5.4 Media Coordinator (Semifinals and Final): The tournament director shall appoint a tournament

media coordinator, who shall perform the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the activities of the stats crew and make sure that statistics are made available

to all media and teams at halftime and after each game; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the tournament; E. Be responsible for all-tournament balloting; F. Provide seating charts for the media on each day of the tournament; G. Coordinate the installation of phone lines as necessary for radio, television and print media

in the press box and in other media working areas; H. Make sure that all teams and electronic media are provided with pre-game itineraries

and/or time lines at least one hour prior to each match; I. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site.

5.5 Medical Personnel: All medical staff for the tournament shall be appointed by host institutions and the

tournament director (semifinals and final), who shall ensure that the following occurs: A. That a certified trainer is present for all practices and at all matches; B. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on site during all matches; C. That an EMS unit is on site during all matches; D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all tournament events; F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all head

athletic trainers and head coaches prior to their arrival at the tournament site(s).

5.6 Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Soccer Officials, working in conjunction with the Men’s Soccer Committee, shall contract all officials to work the tournament and shall:

122

A. Assign a pool of officials to work the tournament and make individual match assignments. The pool of officials should include officials recommended by the head coaches whenever possible. Coaches’ recommendations will be solicited during the annual meeting of the head coaches in March. Head coaches do not possess scratch power when it comes to the assigning of any official;

B. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with officials; C. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with scorer’s table personnel; D. Assign a fourth official for all tournament matches.

5.7 Additional Tournament Personnel: The following additional personnel shall be appointed by the host

institutions, tournament director and/or tournament media coordinator: A. Stats crew; B. Public address announcer; C. Official scorer; D. Clock, scoreboard and matrix board operators; E. Ball persons (at least two for each match); F. In addition, Southern Conference Men’s Soccer Committee members (excluding the head

coach representative) may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the event.

5.8 Promotions Director (Semifinals and Final): The tournament director shall appoint a promotions

director who ensures that a marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness and ticket sales to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the tournament is being played in.


6.1 The Southern Conference staff liaison shall send a tournament manual to all Conference chief

executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, athletics directors, senior woman administrators, head coaches and sports information directors at least one month prior to the tournament. The following information shall be contained in the manual:

A. Facilities information; B. Telephone numbers and addresses of key tournament personnel; C. Local maps; D. Dates, times and location of the tournament and related activities; E. Information on team and institutional credentials and parking passes; F. A tournament itinerary; G. Medical and training information; H. Media information; I. Information on hospitality and social functions; J. Names and responsibilities of Local Organizing Committee personnel; K. Names and responsibilities of host institution or agency personnel; L. A tournament emergency plan and emergency telephone numbers.


7.1 Seeding: The seeds for the tournament shall be determined based on each team’s regular-season Conference finish. In the event of a tie for a particular seed, the seed will be determined as follows (Effective 07/09):

A. If one team has defeated the other team, that team shall be awarded the higher seeded position;

B. If the tied teams tied or did not play, the higher position will be awarded to the team that has the best won-loss record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie;


D. If the records are the same against all teams, then the seeded position would be determined by:

i. GOAL DIFFERENCE in Southern Conference matches; ii. GOALS FOR in Southern Conference matches; iii. GOALS AGAINST in Southern Conference matches

123

E. If the records are the same against all teams, then the seeded position would be determined by a toss of the coin by the Southern Conference commissioner.

F. In the event of a three-way tie, the won-loss record of the tied teams against each other is first considered;

G. If the teams are still tied, the team’s records against the next highest seeded team after the three-way tie is considered and so forth until the tie is broken;

H. If the teams are still tied, then the seeded position would be determined by: i. GOAL DIFFERENCE in Southern Conference matches; ii. GOALS FOR in Southern Conference matches; iii. GOALS AGAINST in Southern Conference matches I. If there is still a tie, the seeded position of the teams will be determined by a draw conducted

by the Southern Conference Commissioner; J. For multiple ties larger than a three-way tie, the same procedure will be applied as used to

break a three-way tie; and K. For all multiple ties, the tie is broken by first deciding the highest seeded team involved in

the tie before deciding other seeding positions.

7.2. Ticket Prices: Prices for the 2013 Southern Conference Tournament shall be set by the host institution or agency with the approval of the Men’s Soccer Committee.

7.2.1 Complimentary Tickets: Schools shall receive no complimentary tickets for the 2013 Southern

Conference Tournament.

7.3 Match Balls: The “official ball” as adopted by the Southern Conference shall be used during all tournament semifinals and final matches. The Conference office shall be responsible for ordering a minimum of one dozen new balls for use during the tournament semifinals and final. Six balls shall be available for each team to use during warm-ups. Any NCAA approved ball may be used during first round tournament matches.


rules adopted for NCAA Division I Men’s Soccer and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations.

7.5 Uniforms: For all tournament matches, the higher seeded team shall wear home or light colored

uniforms. The visiting team shall wear road or dark colored uniforms. All competitors must wear exclusively the official uniform of their institution in competition, warm-up and during the post-tournament awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institution’s official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributors’ normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.


athletes to the Conference compliance administrator no later than three (3) days prior to the start of the tournament. The Conference office will verify the eligibility of these student-athletes and will notify an institution if a problem arises with any of its student-athletes. Student-athletes not deemed eligible to compete may not be in uniform during the Conference tournament.

7.7 Head Coaches Conference Call: A conference call of the head coaches and the Men’s Soccer

Committee will be held prior to the start of the tournament. The Men’s Soccer Committee chairman will chair the call and review information pertinent to the tournament. The head coach of each institution is required to be on the call. Head coaches who do not participate on the call are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Men’s Soccer Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.


A. Teams shall have access to the tournament field one hour prior to the start of their match. For semifinal-round matches, teams involved in the second match of the session may begin warm-up on a secondary field one hour prior to their scheduled start time. The tournament field shall then be available for both teams to utilize for warm-ups for a minimum of 10

124

minutes prior to the match. Teams may begin warm-ups prior to 10 minutes provided the tournament field is available for use;

B. The official time line and pre-match clock countdown shall begin one hour prior to match time for all tournament matches except the second semifinal-round match;

C. For all tournament matches except the second semifinal-round match, both teams should be prepared for player introductions no later than 10 minutes prior to match time;

D. A national anthem shall be played prior all tournament matches except for the second semifinal-round match. The national anthem shall take place five minutes before match time.

7.8.1 Player Introductions: Pre-match player introductions for the tournament shall be as follows:

A. All student athletes for the two teams shall be introduced; B. The two teams will walk out to midfield with the officials (single file lines), then line up to face

the grandstand area containing the largest number of spectators. As each player is introduced, they shall take one step forward and acknowledge the crowd;

C. The visiting team non-starters shall be introduced first, followed by the visiting team starters and head coach. The same order shall then be used to announce the home team;

D. The players will then cross midfield and shake hands with the opposing team before the start of the match.

E. For all tournament matches except the second semifinal-round match, a national anthem shall take place prior to the team introductions. The teams shall walk out to midfield prior to the national anthem and shall turn and face the flag while the national anthem is being played.

7.9 Squad Size Restrictions: An institution may designate any combination of 27 individuals to take the

field for pre-game warm-up and be seated in the team bench area. The 27 individuals may not be interchangeable once designated at the pre-game meeting. Twenty-one student-athletes are to be designated eligible for play and must be designated 15 minutes prior to game time. (Approved 11/07)

7.10 Practice Policies: It is the policy of the Southern Conference to make as many practice opportunities

as possible available to competing teams during the championship. All pre-tournament practices shall be arranged by the Conference office based upon the distance needed to travel to the site of the championship, rather than on tournament seeds. (Revised 1/09) This should result in teams being able to leave campus later in order to practice on an alternate field in the city in which the championship will take place. Any practices needed during the championship will be assigned based upon their regular-season finish (i.e., higher seeded teams will have first choice of practice times). Each participating team shall be ensured a one-hour practice time on the day prior to the championship. The host institutions and agency shall secure off-site practice facilities for teams to utilize during the championship. Teams shall not be allowed to practice on the championship field at any time.


have cleared the field area. 7.12 Media Policies: All coaches and student-athletes shall be available for interviews with the media

following each match.

7.12.1 Dressing Rooms: The dressing rooms (if utilized) of teams competing in the Southern Conference Tournament will be open to all members of the media following a mandatory 10-minute cooling off period.


entered the dressing room or left the bench area following a match. The cooling off period will not be extended to allow coaches or players to do interviews with a broadcasting television network. In the event that these interviews take place, the cooling off period will begin when the majority of a team’s players and coaches have entered the dressing room.

7.13 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Men’s Soccer Rules. 7.14 Bench Assignments: The host institution in the quarterfinals shall elect which bench they will use. In

the semifinals and championship match, the higher seeded team shall be assigned the bench to the right-hand side of the official scorer for all matches.


125

8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the championship match, a tournament

awards ceremony shall be held near midfield. The head coach and student-athletes of the winning team shall remain on the field for the awards ceremony. The head coach and student-athletes of the losing team shall have the option of immediately exiting the field following the match or remaining for the awards ceremony. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony:


team; 8.1.2 Runner-up Trophy: One trophy presented to the head coach and captains of the runner-up

team; 8.1.3 All-Tournament Team: Eleven plaques presented to members of the All-Tournament Team.

The head coaches of the four teams participating in the semifinals and final select the All-Tournament Team using the following criteria: A. The two teams losing in the semifinals shall receive two slots on the All-Tournament Team; B. The losing team of the final shall receive three slots on the All-Tournament Team; C. The winning team in the final shall receive four slots on the All-Tournament Team.

8.1.4 Most Outstanding Player: One plaque presented to the player selected as the Most Outstanding Player of the tournament. The Most Outstanding Player shall be selected by the head coach of the winning team immediately following the conclusion of the championship match.

8.1.5 NCAA Tournament Automatic Bid: One certificate will be presented to the athletics director of

the winning school. The certificate shall signify the school’s earning of the Southern Conference’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament.

8.2 Other Awards: Other awards presented in conjunction with the Southern Conference Tournament are

as follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Eighteen individual plaques will be presented to the head coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the championship team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.


9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Hospitality passes for use during the Southern Conference Tournament, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Men’s Soccer Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director.


Southern Conference Tournament. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Men’s Soccer Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director.

9.3 Team Bus Parking Passes: If necessary, each competing team shall be awarded bus passes as

needed for use during the Southern Conference Tournament. The bus passes shall be distributed by host institutions and/or the tournament director and are non-transferable.

127

2013 Women’s Soccer


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor women’s soccer as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University The Citadel Davidson College Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University Samford University University of North Carolina at Greensboro University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Western Carolina University Wofford College



2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: Each school shall play all members of the Conference once during the

regular season (11 Conference matches). The Southern Conference office shall produce a league master schedule prior to the annual coaches meeting. Conference games shall be scheduled to be played on Fridays and Sundays, although split weekend games shall be scheduled to be played on Thursdays and Sundays. Teams reserve the right to make changes to the Conference master schedule as long as participating athletics directors are agreeable to the moves and the moves are approved by the conference office. Game start times and locations shall be the prerogative of the home institution. The last regular-season Conference match for each team must be completed by the Thursday prior to the conference tournament. (Approved 6/10)

2.1.2 Scheduling Changes: All four parties affected by a schedule change must be notified by e-mail

when the change is made and the two non-changing parties, though notified, will not have power to prohibit the change. It is the host team’s responsibility to notify all parties involved. All match dates and times must be confirmed via e-mail by the third Friday in August. (Approved and Effective 06/09)

2.2 Championship Determination: The Southern Conference champion shall be determined by a points

system. The champion shall be the school that accumulates the greatest number of points in Conference matches where three points are awarded for a win and one point for a tie. In the case that two or more schools finish with identical points, they shall be declared co-champions.

2.3 Regular-Season Finish: League rank based on the regular season points system shall determine the

seeding position of teams into the Southern Conference Tournament. Ties for seeding purposes shall be broken using the Southern Conference tie-breaking system.


matches. 2.5 Field Dimensions: The recommended field size for all Southern Conference matches is 120' x 75'. The

minimum field size for Southern Conference matches is 115' x 70'.

128

2.6 Official Ball: Any NCAA approved brand of women’s soccer ball may be used during regular-season Southern Conference matches.

2.7 Official Scorer: The home team shall provide an official scorer for all Southern Conference matches. The

visiting team may provide a scorer for the purpose of improving the accuracy of data collection during a match. The home team scorer shall always be designated the official book.


both teams and compiling an official NCAA box score. The home stats crew must send a completed final NCAA box score via e-mail to the Southern Conference office on the same day that a Southern Conference match is completed. The visiting head coach should receive a copy of the official NCAA box score after the conclusion of each Conference match prior to leaving the venue.

2.9 Video Exchange Policies: Each Southern Conference institution shall exchange game films via the

conference’s internet video exchange program. All conference and all home non-conference games will be available on an open exchange basis to all conference members and the conference office. All game film should include each match in a continuous fashion (i.e., no breaks between goals, etc.), should be filmed from a midfield location at a height no less than 6’ and should include sound. (Approved 6/12)

2.9.1 Uploading Deadlines: For Conference matches, game files of weekend games must be

uploaded by the home team by noon (ET) of the following Monday. Uploading of these weekend Conference matches shall not take place between Thursday at 4:00 p.m. ET until Sunday at 4:00 p.m. ET. This lockout of uploads will currently be handled by the head coaches until the Conference electronic tape exchange system has the ability to isolate the blocking of uploads with the allowance of downloading to still take place. Game files of mid-week matches must be uploaded by the home team by noon (ET) of the following day. For home non-conference weekend matches, game films must be uploaded by noon ET of the following Tuesday. Non-conference mid-week home matches must be uploaded by noon ET of the following day. (Approved 6/12)

2.10 Uniforms: For all Conference games, the home team shall wear light uniforms in their Friday (or first

game of a swing) game and dark uniforms on Sunday. The visiting team shall wear dark uniforms in their Friday (or first game of a swing) game and light uniforms on Sunday. This is to alleviate road teams having to do laundry. (Approved and Effective 6/11). It is required that all conference schools place a Southern Conference logo on their game uniforms. The recommended placement is on the left or right sleeve of the jersey, facing the side, approximately three inches above the bottom of the sleeve.

2.11 Complimentary Tickets: The home team shall provide the visiting team with 50 complimentary tickets for

each Conference game, provided that the home team is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival. In accordance with Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations, a buffer section of visiting team seats or empty space must be provided in the area immediately behind the visiting team bench as it may be appropriate for each particular venue. The 50 complimentary tickets for the visiting team must be located within the buffer zone area. (Revised 5/13)



2.13 Pre-Game Format: The competition area (field) shall be available at least one hour prior to a match to

allow for warm-ups. Teams are limited to one half of the field while warming up if both teams are on the field. The same amount of warm-up time must be made available to both teams. Ball persons should be reminded to extend the same courtesies to the visiting team as they do for the home team during warm-ups. The host institution shall provide the visiting head coach with a pre-game itinerary and/or time line upon the visiting team’s arrival on site.

2.14 Ball Rotational System: A three-ball rotational system should be used during all Southern Conference

matches. It is recommended that the home institution employ at least two ball persons to work all

129

Conference matches. The ball persons shall act as a ball retriever to avoid unnecessary delay of the match.

2.15 Game Intervals: Intervals in play during Conference matches shall be as follows:

2.15.1 Halftime Intervals: Halftimes in Conference matches shall be 15 minutes in duration. A shorter

break is permissible (minimum of 10 minutes) by mutual consent of both head coaches. 2.15.2 Overtime Intervals: The interval between the end of regulation play and the first overtime

period shall be five minutes. The interval between the first overtime period and the second overtime period shall be two minutes.

3.0 Women’s Soccer Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Women’s Soccer Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one

senior woman administrator, one faculty athletics representative and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for women’s soccer; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association and

Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting women’s soccer in the

Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of women’s soccer in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year to address all matters relating to the sport of women’s soccer and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Women’s Soccer Committee. This meeting shall normally take place in the month of January.

5.0 Officiating

5.1 Coordinator of Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Soccer Officials, under the direction of the Southern Conference Commissioner and with the guidance of the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Officials Committee, shall establish a pool of officials for all Southern Conference matches and assign all officials. A three-person (head referee and two assistant referees) diagonal system of control shall be utilized.


evaluation procedure shall include head coaches’ evaluations and evaluations by the Coordinator of Officials and qualified assessors. Coaches shall review each official’s performance through a standard form. These forms should be sent to the Coordinator of Officials on the first working day following a Conference match.

5.3 Officials’ Uniforms: Officials’ uniforms for all Southern Conference matches shall be of contrasting color

to uniforms worn by the participating teams (including goal keepers). 5.4 Officiating Fees: For 2013, each school will pay the conference assignor a $980 game fee for each

conference match. The conference assignor would then be responsible for paying all 3 officials for the match from that $980 game fee. (Approved 7/11)


6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the match management director for all Southern Conference matches. It is suggested that the match management director visit briefly with the officials and the visiting head coach prior to the match to answer any questions and inform them of his or

130

her availability. The home athletics director and/or match management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.

6.1.1 Game Management Provisions: The following provisions shall be provided to the visiting team by

the home team: A. Bench: One 10-gallon cooler of water, one ice chest with ice and bags, two sleeves of cups,

bench towels, one biohazard box. B. Dressing Room: A dressing room with showers if requested in advance. Shower towels as

needed if requested in advance.





8.2 Cheerleader Restrictions: Megaphones may never be turned toward the playing field. Amplified


8.3 Band Restrictions: Bands are allowed to play only during pre-match, halftime, post match and during

stoppages of play on the field. 8.4 Dance Teams and Mascots: Regulations as they apply to cheerleaders also apply to dance teams and

mascots. 8.5 Travel Restrictions: Cheerleading squads, bands and dance teams may travel during soccer season

only on weekends. 9.0 Artificial Noisemakers: Artificial noisemakers (air horns, electronic amplifiers, whistles, etc.) are not

permissible in Southern Conference venues except for those amplifiers that are part of the official home or visiting team pep band or cheerleading squad. Such instruments shall be removed from the facility when discovered. “Thunder sticks” shall be allowed if distributed as part of a game-day promotion conducted by the home institution. (Effective 5/08)

10.0 Signs


11.0 Conduct


11.2 Player Conduct: The Conference office will review all red cards issued to league teams during the

season. All players and head coaches are susceptible to the enforcement of Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations regarding ejections from contests for the issuing of red cards.

11.2.1 Ejection/Suspension Policy: A coach or player removed from a contest by the issuance of a red

card for unsportsmanlike behavior (i.e.: fighting, flagrant behavior, profanity, etc.) shall be

131

immediately suspended from their team’s next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-match suspension, a third ejection a four-match suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-match suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-match suspension. Other red card ejections (i.e.; hand balls, encroachment, accumulation of two yellow cards in one game, etc.) will be penalized only according to NCAA rules and regulations.

11.2.2 Unsportsmanlike Behavior: Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct including but not limited to those described below shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference.

11.2.2.1 Fighting: Any attempt by a person to strike an opponent or contest participant in a

combative manner unrelated to the sport involved or any act that insights an opponent to retaliate by acting in a similar manner shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

11.2.2.2 Aggressive Behavior: The use of obscene gestures, profane language, or the display of

hostile action towards officials, spectators, or opponents shall be described as unsportsmanlike.

11.2.2.3 Ejection: The removal by an official from a competitive sport activity shall require the

ejected participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately. 11.2.2.4 Suspension: A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the vicinity of

the contest suspended from during the time period beginning one hour prior to the scheduled contest until the conclusion of the contest. Suspension does not affect practice opportunities outside of the above time limitations.

11.2.2.5 Vicinity of Contest: The immediate area/site of the competition extended to include any

point or place from which the ejected/suspended individual could observe, supervise, or participate in any manner in the contest from which the participant is being ejected or suspended.

11.2.2.6 Competitive Conditions: The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a

contest that is safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.



12.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy, presented to the top team in the conference regular season

standings as determined by the points system. In case of a tie, all tied teams shall receive trophies;

12.1.2 All-Conference Team: Twenty two plaques presented to the members of the All-Conference

Team. Eleven plaques shall be presented to members of the All-Conference First Team and 11 plaques shall be presented to members of the All-Conference Second Team. The All-Conference Team shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players;


the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players;


Freshman of the Year award shall be the highest vote getter on the All-Freshman Team voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

132

12.1.5 All-Freshman Team: An All-Freshman Team shall be named consisting of the best true or red shirt freshmen. The coaches will elect an 11-member all-freshman team with the leading vote getter receiving the Freshman of the Year award. Balloting will be done as it is for All-Conference voting. (Effective 5/08)



12.1.7 Players of the Week: Eight certificates presented to student-athletes named Player of the Week

during the regular season. The Player of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office; 12.1.8 Players of the Month: A Player of the Month award shall be selected at the end of every month

during the regular season. The Player of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office; 13.0 Two-Year Moratorium of Approved Sport Regulations: Sport regulations approved by the membership must



1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a single-elimination Conference tournament shall be conducted to determine the Southern Conference Tournament champion and the recipient of the league’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament. The top eight teams in the Conference regular-season standings that are eligible to compete will participate in the Conference tournament. The Conference tournament will be conducted over two days.

1.2 The top four seeds in the Conference tournament shall host a first-round tournament match on the Sunday

prior to the semifinals. That first round match shall be scheduled to start within the window of 1:00 p.m. to 4:00 p.m. local time. (Approved 6/11). The winners of the four games will advance to play at a common site with the semifinals of the tournament taking place on Friday, November 8 and the championship match taking place on Sunday, November 10.


2.1 The Southern Conference Tournament will be conducted prior to the NCAA Tournament on the dates

recommended by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association.


3.1 Bid Process: The location of the tournament shall be determined by a bid process conducted by the Women’s Soccer Committee. All bids shall be reviewed and voted on by the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association and Athletics Directors Association.

3.1.1 2013 Tournament Location: The 2013 Women’s Soccer Championship will be held on the

campus of Wofford College. 3.1.2 Future Tournament Locations: The site of future Women’s Soccer Championship tournaments

will be decided according to a bid process.


4.1 2013 Tournament Schedule: The 2013 Conference tournament shall be played on November 8 and November 10. The tournament bracket and match times shall be set by the Southern Conference Women’s Soccer Committee. Matches may not start before announced times.

133


5.1 Women’s Soccer Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Women’s Soccer Committee

shall provide general oversight of the tournament. The Women’s Soccer Committee shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.

5.2 Games Committee: A Games Committee shall be appointed for first-round tournament games

consisting of a designated representative from each competing institution and an on-site conference office liaison. A Games Committee shall be appointed for the tournament consisting of Women’s Soccer Committee members on site, the athletics director of the host institution or his or her designee, the Southern Conference championships administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), and the Tournament Director. The Games Committee shall:




5.3 Tournament Director (semifinals and final): The host institution for the tournament shall appoint a tournament director who, along with the conference Assistant Commissioner for Championships, shall perform the following functions under the direction of the Women’s Soccer Committee:


Conference Women’s Soccer Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant tournament information to all coaches, athletics directors, senior woman




5.4 Media Coordinator (semifinals and final): The tournament director shall appoint a tournament media coordinator, who shall perform the following duties for the tournament:

A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the activities of the stats crew and make sure that statistics are made available

to all media and teams at halftime and after each game; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the tournament; E. Be responsible for all-tournament balloting; F. Provide seating charts for the media on each day of the tournament; G. Coordinate the installation of phone lines as necessary for radio, television and print

media in the press box and in other media working areas; H. Make sure that all teams and electronic media are provided with pre-game itineraries

and/or time lines at least one hour prior to each match; I. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site.

5.5 Medical Personnel (semifinals and final): All medical staff for the tournament shall be appointed by

the tournament director who shall ensure that the following occurs: A. That a certified trainer is present for all practices and at all matches; B. That a general practice or orthopedic physician is on site at all matches; C. That an EMS unit is on site during all matches; D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all tournament events; F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all

head athletic trainers and head coaches prior to their arrival at the tournament site.

5.6 Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Soccer Officials, working in conjunction with the Women’s Soccer Committee, shall contract all officials to work the tournament and shall:

134

A. Assign a pool of officials to work the tournament and make individual match assignments. The pool of officials should include officials recommended by the head coaches whenever possible. Coaches’ recommendations will be solicited during the annual meeting of the head coaches in March. Head coaches do not possess scratch power when it comes to the assigning of any official;

B. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with officials; C. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with scorer’s table personnel; D. Assign a fourth official for all tournament matches.


tournament director and/or tournament media coordinator: A. Stats crew; B. Public address announcer; C. Official scorer; D. Clock, scoreboard and matrix board operators; E. Ball persons (at least two for each match); F. In addition, Southern Conference Women’s Soccer Committee members (excluding the

head coach representative), may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the event.

5.8 Promotions Director (semifinals and final): The tournament director shall appoint a promotions

director who ensures that a marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness and ticket sales to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the tournament is being played in.





7.1 Seeding: The seeds for the tournament shall be determined based on each team’s regular-season Conference finish. In the event of a tie for a particular seed, the seed will be determined as follows (Effective 07/09):

A. If one team has defeated the other team, that team shall be awarded the higher seeded position;

B. If the tied teams tied or did not play, the higher position will be awarded to the team that has the best won-loss record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie;


D. If the records are the same against all teams, then the seeded position would be determined by: i. GOAL DIFFERENCE in Southern Conference matches; ii. GOALS FOR in Southern Conference matches; iii. GOALS AGAINST in Southern Conference matches E. If the records are the same against all teams, then the seeded position would be determined by

a toss of the coin by the Southern Conference commissioner.

135


G. If the teams are still tied, the team’s records against the next highest seeded team after the three-way tie is considered and so forth until the tie is broken;

H. If the teams are still tied, then the seeded position would be determined by: i. GOAL DIFFERENCE in Southern Conference matches; ii. GOALS FOR in Southern Conference matches; iii. GOALS AGAINST in Southern Conference matches I. If there is still a tie, the seeded position of the teams will be determined by a draw conducted by

the Southern Conference Commissioner; J. For multiple ties larger than a three-way tie, the same procedure will be applied as used to

break a three-way tie; and K. For all multiple ties, the tie is broken by first deciding the highest seeded team involved in the tie

before deciding other seeding positions.

7.2. Ticket Prices: Prices for the 2013 Southern Conference Tournament shall be set by the host institution with the approval of the Women’s Soccer Committee.

7.2.1 Complimentary Tickets: Schools shall receive no complimentary tickets for the 2013 Southern


7.3 Match Balls: The “official” ball as adopted by the Southern Conference shall be used during all

tournament semifinals and final matches. The Conference office shall be responsible for ordering a minimum of one dozen new balls for use during the tournament semifinals and finals. Six balls shall be available for each team to use during warm-ups. Any NCAA approved ball may be used during first round tournament matches.


rules adopted for NCAA Division I Women’s Soccer and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations.


uniforms. The visiting team shall wear road or dark colored uniforms. All competitors must wear exclusively the official uniform of their institution in competition, warm-up and during the post-tournament awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institutions’ official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributor’s normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.



7.7 Head Coaches Conference Call: A conference call of the head coaches and Women’s Soccer

Committee will be held prior to the start of the tournament. The Women’s Soccer Committee chair will conduct the call and review information pertinent to the tournament. The head coach of each institution is required to be on the call. Head coaches who do not participate on the call are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Women’s Soccer Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.

7.8 Pre-Match Format: The following items address the issue of pre-match format:

A. Teams involved in the first match of each session shall have access to the tournament field one hour prior to the start of their match; Teams involved in the second match of each session may begin warm-up on a secondary field one hour prior to their scheduled start time. For the teams involved in the second match of a session, the tournament field shall be available for both teams to utilize for warm-ups for a minimum of 10 minutes prior

136

to each match. Teams may begin warm-ups prior to 10 minutes provided the tournament field is available for use;

B. The official time line and pre-match clock countdown shall begin one hour prior to match time for the first match of each session;

C. For the first match of each session, both teams should be prepared for player introductions no later than 10 minutes prior to match time;

D. A national anthem shall be played prior to the first match of each session. The national anthem shall take place three minutes before match time.

7.8.1 Player Introductions: Pre-match player introductions for the tournament shall be as follows:

A. The officials will proceed to midfield prior to introductions. They will be the first people identified;

A. All student-athletes for the two teams shall be introduced; B. As each player is introduced, they shall jog to the midfield area and line up to face the

grandstand area containing the largest number of spectators. Teams shall line up on the same side of the field as their bench;

C. The head coaches shall be introduced after both teams’ starters have been introduced. They shall meet in front of the scorer’s table at midfield, shake hands, and return to their bench area for the national anthem (if applicable);

D. For the first match of each session, the teams shall remain on the field for the national anthem and shall turn and face the flag while the national anthem is being played.


uniform and 30 persons in the bench area. A student-athlete will need a valid participant credential to enter the tournament venue. Coaches, trainers, managers and student-athletes not in uniform will need to display a visible participant credential to be allowed on the team bench during a match.


as possible available to competing teams during the championship. All pre-tournament practices shall be arranged by the Conference office based upon the distance needed to travel to the site of the championship, rather than on tournament seeds. (Revised 1/09) This should result in teams being able to leave campus later in order to practice on an alternate field in the city in which the championship will take place. Any practices needed during the championship will be assigned based upon their regular-season finish (i.e., higher seeded teams will have first choice of practice times). Each participating team shall be ensured a one-hour practice time on the day prior to the championship. The host institutions and agency shall secure off-site practice facilities for teams to utilize during the championship. Teams shall not be allowed to practice on the championship field at any time.


have cleared the field area. 7.12 Media Policies: All coaches and student-athletes shall be available for interviews with the media

following each match. 7.12.1 Dressing Rooms: The dressing rooms (if utilized) of teams competing in the Southern

Conference Tournament will be closed to all members of the media unless a media member requests access to that area prior to the conclusion of a match. This request must be made to the tournament media coordinator or the sports information director of the competing institution. If a dressing room is opened, it will be done only after a 10-minute “cooling off” period is observed.


entered the dressing room or left the bench area following a match. The cooling off period will not be extended to allow coaches or players to do interviews with a broadcasting television network. In the event that these interviews take place, the cooling off period will begin when the majority of a team’s players and coaches have entered the dressing room.

7.13 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Women’s Soccer

Rules.

137

7.14 Bench Assignments: The host institution in the quarterfinals shall select which bench they will use. In the semifinals and championship match, the higher seeded team shall be assigned the bench to the right-hand side of the official scorer for all matches. (Approved and effective 6/11)


8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the championship match, a tournament awards ceremony shall be held near midfield. The head coach and student-athletes of the winning team shall remain on the field for the awards ceremony. The head coach and student-athletes of the losing team shall have the option of immediately exiting the field following the match or remaining for the awards ceremony. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony:



team. 8.1.3 All-Tournament Team: Eleven plaques presented to members of the All-Tournament Team.

The All-Tournament Team shall be selected by the head coaches of the four teams participating in the semifinals and final using the following criteria: A. The two teams losing in the semifinals shall receive two slots on the All-Tournament

Team; B. The losing team of the final shall receive three slots on the All-Tournament Team; C. The winning team in the final shall receive four slots on the All-Tournament Team.


Outstanding Player of the tournament. The Most Outstanding Player shall be selected by the head coach of the winning team immediately following the conclusion of the championship match.

8.1.5 NCAA Tournament Automatic Bid: One certificate will be presented to the athletics director or

senior woman administrator of the winning school. The certificate shall signify the school’s earning of the Southern Conference’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament.

8.2 Other Awards: Other awards presented in conjunction with the Southern Conference Tournament

are as follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Twenty-two individual plaques will be presented to the head coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the championship team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.


9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Hospitality passes for use during the Southern Conference Tournament, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Women’s Soccer Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director.


Southern Conference Tournament. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Women’s Soccer Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director.


needed for use during the Southern Conference Tournament. The bus passes shall be distributed by the tournament director and are non-transferable.

139

2014 Softball


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor softball as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University University of North Carolina at Greensboro Samford University University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Western Carolina University


2.1 Scheduling: NCAA policies regarding scheduling requirements are the official policies of the Southern Conference. 2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: Each school shall play all members of the Conference three times

during the regular season (normally in a three-game weekend series at the site of one of the competing teams). The Southern Conference office shall produce a league master schedule at least three years prior to the start of each season. Conference games shall be played on Saturdays and Sundays with a doubleheader taking place on Saturday. Teams reserve the right to make changes to the Conference master schedule as long as participating athletics directors are agreeable to the moves and the moves are approved by the conference office. (Approved 6/10)

2.1.2 Make-Up Games: No make-up dates may be utilized to complete a Conference series it if is

unable to be completed during a scheduled series window (i.e. Saturday-Sunday). 2.1.3 Moving Games: Conference games may be moved to alternate or neutral locations if forced to

due to inclement weather or other extenuating circumstances. Games may be moved to alternate days in advance only in extenuating circumstances (exams, holidays, etc.) and not in anticipation of bad weather, however, the second game of a doubleheader scheduled for Saturday can be moved to Sunday in advance in anticipation of bad weather on Saturday. In all other instances, once a visiting team has arrived at a site, games may not be moved to alternate days.


with the best won-loss percentage in Conference games during the regular season. In the case that two or more schools finish with identical won-loss records, they shall be declared co-champions.


teams into the Southern Conference Tournament. League rank shall be determined by each team’s won-loss record in all Conference games during the regular season. Ties for seeding purposes shall be broken using the Southern Conference tie-breaking system.


games. 2.5 Halted Games: All Conference games shall normally be seven innings in length. The Southern

Conference shall adhere to the policies of the NCAA Softball Rules regarding regulation and halted games. No more than two games may be started in one day, but a halted game may be completed and two games started in one day with no game starting after 6:00 pm. If the last game of a series is not completed and the score is tied after becoming a regulation game, it shall be a complete game/tie.

140

2.6 International Tie-Breaker: The international tie-breaker rule shall be used in all Conference games at

the beginning of the 10th inning. 2.7 Eight-Run Rule: The eight-run rule shall be in effect for all Conference games. 2.8 Official Ball: The “official” ball (Worth NC 12L) as designated by the Conference office shall be used

in all Conference games. 2.9 Official Scorer: The home team shall provide an official scorer for all Conference games. The visiting

team may provide a scorer for the purpose of improving the accuracy of data collection during a game. The home team scorer shall always be designated the official scorer.


both teams and compiling an official NCAA box score. The home stats crew must send a completed final NCAA box score via e-mail to the Southern Conference office on the same day that a Southern Conference game is completed. The visiting head coach should receive a copy of the official NCAA box score after the conclusion of each Conference game.


Southern Conference teams with non-conference or Conference schools. 2.12 Uniforms: For all Conference series, it is recommended that the home team wear light colored

uniforms and the visiting team wear uniforms of contrasting color on the first day of competition. The home team may wear a colored shirt and the visiting team a contrasting shirt on the second day of competition. It is required that all conference schools place a Southern Conference logo on their game uniforms. The recommended placement is on the left or right sleeve of the jersey, facing the side, approximately three inches above the bottom of the sleeve; or on the left chest on sleeveless jerseys.


tickets for each Conference game, provided that the home team is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival. In accordance with Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations, a buffer section of visiting team seats or empty space must be provided in the area immediately behind the visiting team dugout as it may be appropriate for each particular venue. The 50 complimentary tickets for the visiting team must be located within the buffer zone area. (Revised 5/13)



2.15 Start Times: The home team shall set all game times and locations for a Conference series. Night

games may not be required for the last day of a series. Games on Sunday may not start prior to 1:00 p.m., unless a doubleheader is needed or both competing athletics directors are agreeable to starting prior to 1:00 p.m. Games may start on Sunday after 6:00 p.m. only with the approval of the athletics directors of the competing teams. For the resumption of halted games on the last day of a series, the resumption or starting time will be agreed upon by the two coaches, and if no agreement is possible, the umpire crew chief for the series shall set the time. (Approved 10/12)

2.15.1 Between Games: For all Conference doubleheaders, 30 minutes will be used between games

unless otherwise agreed upon by the two head coaches and umpires in advance.

2.16 Weather Decisions: When weather or field conditions require a decision as to whether a game shall be started, the following procedure shall be used:

A. When the visiting team is not on site, the administration of the host institution shall determine if the game shall start on the day and time scheduled;

141

B. When both teams are on site, after consulting with both coaches, the home game management director shall determine if the game is to start, except for the second game of a doubleheader; (Approved 10/08)

C. Should bad weather or unfit conditions (excluding lightning) prevail during a game, the home plate umpire shall be the sole judge as to suspension, resumption, or termination of play. The home plate umpire of the first game shall be the sole judge as to whether playing conditions permit the start of the second game of a doubleheader. (Revised and Effective 5/08)

D. In the case of lightning in the area, the home game management director shall have the authority to suspend and resume play and shall not be overruled by the home plate umpire. (Effective 5/08)

2.17 Protests: Head coaches may file game protests in accordance with NCAA Softball Rules. After filing a

protest, the head coach shall advise his or her athletics director, who shall then notify the Southern Conference Commissioner of the protest and circumstances involved. The protesting team must forward the protest to the Commissioner within 48 hours of the starting time of the protested game. The Commissioner and the Softball Committee shall decide the course of action to be followed in resolving the protest with the use of NCAA Softball Rules, precedents from softball and other sports decisions, and Conference policies.

2.18 Field Requirements: All Conference fields are required or recommended to have the following:

A. A backstop with a minimum distance of 25 feet and a maximum of 30 feet from home plate (required);

B. An outfield fence with foul poles (required); C. A scoreboard (required); D. Dimensions of a minimum of 190 feet from home plate down the left and right field lines

and a minimum of 200 feet from home plate to the centerfield fence. No portion of a fence shall be more than 225 feet from home plate;

E. An infield tarp (recommended); F. A skinned infield and natural grass outfield (recommended); G. Separate bullpens for each team equipped with regulation-sized home plates and pitcher’s

plates placed at regulation distance (recommended); H. If separate bullpens are not available, a singe bullpen must be large enough to

accommodate two pitchers (one from each team).

3.0 Softball Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Softball Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one faculty athletics representative, one senior woman administrator, and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for softball; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association

and Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting softball in the

Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of softball in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year to address all matters relating to the sport of softball and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Softball Committee. This meeting shall normally take place in the month of September.

5.0 Officiating

142

5.1 Assignments: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Softball Officials, under the direction of the Southern Conference Commissioner and with the guidance of the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Officials Committee, shall establish a pool of officials for all Conference games and assign

all officials. Three officials shall be assigned to a Conference series. Both officials shall work the plate

during the series. One official shall not work consecutive games behind the plate. 5.2 Evaluation Procedure: An evaluation procedure shall be used to ensure the quality of officials. The

evaluation procedure shall include head coaches’ evaluations and evaluations by the Coordinator of Officials. Coaches shall review each official’s performance through a standard form. These forms shall be sent to the Coordinator of Officials on the first working day following a Conference series.

5.3 Officiating Fees: For 2014, each official shall be paid a flat fee of $555 for a 3-game conference

series. (Approved 10/12) Lodging for officials shall be the responsibility of the host institution. The host institution shall provide two rooms for one night. (Revised 8/08)

6.0 Game Management

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the game management director for a Southern Conference series. It is suggested that the game management director visit briefly with the officials and the visiting head coach prior to a series to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability. The home athletics director and/or game management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.


by the home team: A. Bench: One 10-gallon cooler of water, one ice chest with ice and bags, two sleeves of

cups, bench towels, one biohazard box. B. Dressing Room: A dressing room with showers if requested in advance. Shower towels as

needed if requested in advance. 7.0 Public Address Announcer


8.0 Pre-Game Format

8.1 The home institution shall provide a minimum of two “official” (Worth NC12L) Conference softballs to be used during Conference games. The host institution shall provide the visiting head coach with a pre-game itinerary and/or time line at least 72 hours prior to the start of a Conference game. The visiting team shall be given equal access to batting cages, field space, pitching machines, machine balls, screens and tees as the home team. This policy applies equally to indoor and outdoor facilities.


9.1 Cheerleader Responsibilities: Cheerleaders should be encouraged to help maintain good

sportsmanship among the students and others in attendance. The head cheerleader should be ready at all times to instigate the most popular cheer in case an unpleasant situation should occur.

9.2 Cheerleader Restrictions: Megaphones may never be turned toward the playing area. Amplified

microphones are prohibited. No pyramids may be performed that are more than two tiers (persons) high. No flips may be conducted other than those made from the ground. Mini-trampolines may not be used. Cheerleaders should never be located behind an opposing team’s dugout.

9.3 Pep Band Restrictions: Bands are allowed to play only during pre-game, between games, post game

and between innings. 9.4 Dance Teams and Mascots: Regulations as they apply to cheerleaders also apply to dance teams

and mascots.

143

9.5 Travel Restrictions: Cheerleading squads, pep bands and dance teams may travel during softball

season only on weekends. 10.0 Artificial Noisemakers: Artificial noisemakers (air horns, electronic amplifiers, whistles, etc.) are not

permissible in Southern Conference venues except for those amplifiers that are part of the official home or visiting team pep band or cheerleading squad. Such instruments shall be removed from the facility when discovered. Thunder sticks will be allowed on an experimental basis at softball games if distributed as part of a game-day promotion conducted by the home institution. (Effective 5/08)

11.0 Signs



12.1 The home athletics director shall decide the policy regarding the use of explosive devices (cannons,

rifles, rocket launchers, etc.), live mascots (horses, birds, etc.), and motorized vehicles in their facility. Visiting athletics directors need to request permission for the use of these items at least two weeks in advance and approval or disapproval of the request must be given immediately by the home athletics director.

13.0 Conduct

13.1 Coaches’ Conduct: All head and assistant coaches are to conduct themselves in such a manner during a game as to ensure or promote good crowd control. They also are responsible for the conduct of the players and other staff on the bench. Coaches (head and assistant) must follow Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations (Administrative Regulation 5.0) at all times.

13.2 Ejection/Suspension Policy: A coach removed from a game for any reason shall be suspended from

his or her team’s next conference or non-conference game (i.e., if a coach is ejected from a conference game the suspension will apply to the next conference game, if the coach is ejected from a non-conference game, the suspension will apply to the next non-conference game). A player removed from a game for any reason shall immediately be suspended from the next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-game suspension, a third ejection a four-game suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-game suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-game suspension.





13.3.2 Aggressive Behavior: The use of obscene gestures, profane language, or the display of

hostile action towards officials, spectators, or opponents shall be described as unsportsmanlike. 13.3.3 Ejection: The removal by an official from a competitive sport activity shall require the ejected



13.3.5 Vicinity of Contest: The immediate area/site of the competition extended to include any point

or place from which the ejected/suspended individual could observe, supervise, or participate in any manner in the contest from which the participant is being ejected or suspended.

144

13.3.6 Competitive Conditions: The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a contest

that is safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior. 14.0 Regular-Season Awards

14.1 The following awards shall be provided by the Conference and distributed to the appropriate institution following the conclusion of the Conference regular season: 14.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy, presented to the team with the best won-loss percentage

in Conference games. In the case of a tie, all tied teams shall receive trophies; 14.1.2 All-Conference Team: Twenty four (24) plaques (a 12-member first team and a 12-member

second team) presented to the members of the All-Conference Team. All-Conference first and second teams will include utility player who has played at least 50 percent of her team’s games. All-Conference Team shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players;


the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

14.1.4 Pitcher of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Pitcher of the Year. The Pitcher

of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;


Freshman of the Year award shall be presented to the highest vote getter on the All-Freshman Team voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;




Week during the regular season. The Player of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office;

14.1.8 Pitchers of the Week: Eight certificates presented to student-athletes named Pitcher of the

Week during the regular season. The Pitcher of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office;

14.1.9 Players of the Month: A Player of the Month award shall be selected at the end of each

month during the spring season. The Player of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office;

14.1.10 Pitchers of the Month: A Pitcher of the Month award shall be selected at the end of each

month during the spring season. The Pitcher of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office;

14.1.11 All-Freshman Team: An All-Freshman Team shall be named consisting of 10 freshmen, red

shirt or otherwise. The members will be selected without regard to position and the freshman receiving the highest number of votes will be named as Freshman of the Year. Balloting will be done as it is for All-Conference voting. (Approved 10/08)



145


1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a double-elimination Conference tournament shall be conducted to determine the Southern Conference Tournament champion and the recipient of the league’s automatic bid to participate in the NCAA Tournament. All teams that are eligible to compete will participate in the Conference tournament. The tournament will normally be conducted over four days. If the Conference tournament is not completed due to inclement weather or other extenuating circumstances, the NCAA Tournament automatic bid will be presented to the highest seed remaining in the tournament.


2.1 The Southern Conference Tournament will be conducted prior to the NCAA Tournament on the dates recommended by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association. The dates of the 2014 Southern Conference Tournament shall be May 7-10.



Softball Committee. All bids shall be reviewed and voted on by the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association and Athletics Directors Association.

3.1.1 2014 Tournament Location: The 2014 Softball Championship will be determined at a later date. 3.1.2 Future Tournament Locations: Future sites of the Softball Championship will be determined by

a bid process.


4.1 Game Times: All tournament game times shall be set by the Southern Conference Softball Committee. Games may not start before announced times.

4.1.1 Tournament Unable To Reach Conclusion. If it is determined that the tournament cannot be

played to completion, the highest seed remaining in the tournament will be declared the champion and receive the conference’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament. If the tournament is not able to be played at all, the regular-season champion shall advance to the NCAA Tournament. All decisions relating to inclement weather shall be made by the Games Committee.


5.1 Softball Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Softball Committee shall provide general oversight of the tournament. The Softball Committee shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.

5.2 Games Committee: A Games Committee shall be appointed for the tournament consisting of Softball

Committee members on site, the athletics director of the host institution or his or her designee, the Southern Conference championships administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), the tournament director, and the Umpire In Chief. The Games Committee shall:




146

5.3 Tournament Director: The host institution for the tournament shall appoint a tournament director who, along with the conference Associate Commissioner for Championships, shall perform the following functions under the direction of the Softball Committee:


Conference Softball Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant tournament information to all coaches, athletics directors, senior woman





perform the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the activities of the stats crew and make sure that statistics are made available

to all media after each game; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the tournament; E. Be responsible for all-tournament balloting; F. Provide seating charts for the media on each day of the tournament; G. Coordinate the installation of phone lines as necessary for radio, television and print media

in the press box and in other media working areas; H. Make sure that all teams and electronic media are provided with pre-game itineraries and/or

time lines at least one hour prior to each game; I. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site;


director, who shall ensure that the following occurs: A. That a certified trainer is available for all practices and present at all games; B. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on call for all games; C. That an EMS unit is on call at all times; D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all tournament events; F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all head


5.6 Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Officials, working in conjunction with the Softball Committee, shall contract all officials to work the tournament and shall:

A. Assign a pool of officials to work the tournament and make individual game assignments. The pool of officials should include the top rated officials rated by the head coaches whenever possible. Head coaches do not possess scratch power when it comes to the assigning of any official;

B. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with officials; C. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with press box personnel.


tournament director and/or tournament media coordinator: A. Stats crew; B. Public address announcer; C. Official scorer; D. Scoreboard and matrix board operators; E. Ball or bat persons (at least one for each team); F. In addition, Southern Conference Softball Committee members (excluding the head coach

representative) may be assigned specific duties as necessary.

5.8 Promotions Director: The tournament director shall appoint a promotions director who ensures that a marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness and ticket sales to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the tournament is being played in.

147







B. If the tied teams split games, the higher position will be awarded to the team that has the best won-loss record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie;

C. If each team has the same record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie, then the won-loss records against the next highest seeded team not involved in the tie would be considered and so on down the line until the tie is broken;

D. If the records are the same against all teams, then the seeded position would be determined by a toss of the coin by the Southern Conference Commissioner;


F. If the teams are still tied, the teams’ record against the next highest seeded team after the three-way tie is considered, and so forth until the tie is broken;

G. If there is still a tie, the seeded position of the teams will be determined by a draw conducted by the Southern Conference Commissioner;



7.2. Ticket Prices: Prices for the 2014 Southern Conference Tournament shall be established by the host

institution and approved by the Softball Committee. 7.2.1 Complimentary Tickets: Schools shall receive no complimentary tickets for the 2014 Southern


7.3 Game Balls: The “official” (Worth NC12L) Conference softball shall be used during all tournament games. The Conference office shall be responsible for ordering a minimum of three dozen new balls for use during the tournament.


rules adopted for NCAA Division I Softball and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations.

7.5 Uniforms: For all tournament games, the lower seeded team shall have its choice of uniform color

and the higher seeded team must wear a uniform of contrasting color. If a team plays consecutive games, then that team shall wear the same uniforms in the second game and their opponents should wear a contrasting color. All competitors must wear exclusively the official uniform of their institution in competition, warm-up and during the post-tournament awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA

148

rules, the institutions’ official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributors’ normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.



7.7 Head Coaches Meeting: A Southern Conference head coaches meeting will be conducted by

conference call prior to the tournament. The Softball Committee Chair will chair the call and review information pertinent to the tournament. The head coach of each institution is required to participate on this call. Head coaches who do not participate are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Softball Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.


A. Games shall not begin prior to their announced start times; B. The teams shall be allowed a minimum of 10 minutes of warm-up time on the field prior to

their game unless the grounds are too wet and work is necessary to make it suitable for play;

C. Batting practice shall be conducted on practice fields or in batting cages, but shall not be conducted on the tournament field;

D. A national anthem shall be played prior to the first game each day.

7.8.1 Player Introductions: Pre-game player introductions for the tournament shall be as follows: A. Prior to each team’s first game in the tournament, and prior to the championship game, all

players and coaches shall be introduced to the crowd. For all other games, only the starting lineups will be announced.

B. As each player is introduced for their first game and for the championship game, participants will line up on the foul line nearest to their dugout as they are introduced.


uniform and 28 institutional representatives. A student-athlete will need a valid participant credential to enter the tournament venue. Coaches, trainers, managers and student-athletes not in uniform will need to display a visible participant credential to be allowed in their dugout during a game. In the dugout, and in the bullpen areas, each team is limited to eligible players in uniform, official coaches in uniform, one trainer, one manager and a maximum of two bat handlers (who should be in appropriate uniform). Teams will declare their 20-person player rosters at the head coaches meeting prior to the tournament.


as possible available to competing teams during the Southern Conference Tournament. For all practices, teams will be assigned practice times based upon the distance needed to travel to the site of the championship, rather than on tournament seeds. This should result in teams being able to leave campus later in order to practice on the championship field. Each participating team shall be ensured a one and a half hour practice time on the tournament field on the day prior to the tournament, unless the tournament field is deemed not suitable for play on that day. The host institution shall secure off-site practice facilities for teams to utilize during the remainder of the tournament. (Revised 1/09)

7.11 Home Team Determination: The higher seeded team shall be the home team for the first four games

of the tournament. After that, the home team shall be determined by using the following formula (in order):

A. The institution that has been the home team the fewer number of times during the tournament;

B. If two teams are equal in the number of times they have been the home team, but unequal in the number of times they have been visitor, then the team that has been the visitor more times shall be designated the home team;

C. If two teams are equal in the number of times they have been home and visitor, then the team that was the visitor in its preceding game shall be the home team;

149

D. If two teams are equal in the number of times they have been home and visitor and each team was the visitor in its preceding game, then, if the teams have met previously in the tournament, the visitor from the preceding game between the teams shall be the home team for the game in question;

E. If the above procedures do not resolve the matter, the home team shall be determined by lot;

7.12 Dugouts: The home team shall occupy the third-base dugout. A team playing back-to-back games

shall have the option of moving dugouts or remaining in their present dugout.

7.12.1 Dugout Supplies: The host institution shall provide towels, ice, cups, water and isotonics in each dugout during the tournament.


following each game after a 10-minute cooling off period has been observed.

7.13.1 Cooling Off Period: The cooling off period will begin when all coaches and players have left the dugout following a game. The cooling off period will not be extended to allow coaches or players to do interviews with a broadcasting television network. In the event that these interviews take place, the cooling off period will begin when the majority of a team’s players and coaches have left the dugout.

7.13.2 Dressing Rooms: The dressing rooms of teams competing in the Southern Conference

Tournament will be considered closed unless a media member states a desire to enter the dressing room area prior to the conclusion of a game. This request must be made to the tournament media coordinator or the sports information director of the participating team.

7.14 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Softball Rules. 7.15 International Tiebreaker Rule: The international tiebreaker rule will be utilized in all conference

tournament games except the championship game(s). 7.16 Eight-Run Rule: The eight-run rule will be utilized in all conference tournament games including the

championship game. 8.0 Tournament Awards

8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the championship game, a tournament

awards ceremony shall be held on the infield. The head coach and student-athletes of the winning team shall remain in their dugout for the awards ceremony. The head coach and student-athletes of the runner-up team shall have the option of immediately exiting the field following the game or remaining for the awards ceremony. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony:



team; 8.1.3 All-Tournament Team: Ten plaques presented to members of the All-Tournament Team. The

All-Tournament Team shall be selected without consideration of playing position by a committee of voters appointed by the tournament media coordinator. The balloting shall be conducted by the tournament media coordinator;


Outstanding Player of the tournament. The Most Outstanding Player shall be one of the ten members of the All-Tournament Team and is selected by a committee of voters appointed by the tournament media coordinator. The balloting shall be conducted by the tournament media coordinator;

150

8.1.5 NCAA Automatic Bid: One certificate presented to the athletics director or senior woman administrator of the winning school, signifying their institution’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament.


as follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Twenty individual plaques will be presented to the head coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the championship team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.


9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: If necessary, each member institution shall receive VIP Hospitality passes for use during the Southern Conference Tournament, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Softball Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.


Southern Conference Tournament. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Softball Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.



151

2014 Tennis


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor tennis as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University The Citadel (men only) Davidson College Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University Samford University University of North Carolina at Greensboro University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Western Carolina University (women only) Wofford College


2.1 Scheduling: NCAA policies regarding scheduling requirements are the official policies of the Southern Conference. 2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: Each school shall play all members of the Conference one time in a

conference match during the regular season. The Southern Conference office shall produce a league master schedule. The master schedule shall include only the home and away sequence of each team’s Conference schedule. Teams shall mutually agree on playing dates. Conference matches may not take place prior to January 1. Teams reserve the right to make changes to the location of matches as long as participating athletics directors are agreeable to the moves. Conference regular season matches can not be originally scheduled after the Saturday prior to the conference tournament. However, matches may be played after that date for make-up purposes. Match start times and locations shall be the prerogative of the home institution.


with the best won-loss percentage in Conference matches during the regular season. In the case that two or more schools finish with identical won-loss records, they shall be declared co-champions.


teams into the Southern Conference Tournament. League rank shall be determined by each team’s won-loss record in all Conference matches during the regular season. Ties for seeding purposes shall be broken using the Southern Conference tie-breaking system.

2.4 Playing Rules: Playing rules as adopted by the NCAA and Intercollegiate Tennis Association (ITA)

shall be in effect for all Southern Conference matches. 2.5 Match Format: All Southern Conference matches shall consist of six singles and three doubles

matches. All singles matches shall be best of three sets. All doubles matches shall be eight-game pro sets. All singles matches shall count as one point for the institution winning the match. The institution winning two out of three doubles matches shall be awarded one point. A regular scoring system (Ad scoring) and a 12-point tiebreaker shall be used in all singles and doubles matches.

2.5.1 Match Order: Doubles matches shall be played first, followed by singles matches. 2.5.2 Declaring A Winner: A match shall be considered won when one school has accumulated a

total of four points. All singles and doubles matches should be played to completion, regardless of whether a team winner has been declared.

152

2.5.2.1 In all Conference matches, all matches shall be played to completion. Once the

outcome of the team match has been decided, a shortened format shall be played unless both coaches agree otherwise. Matches still in the second set shall play a Match Tiebreak to decide the third set. Any match already in the third set shall play that set to completion. A match that has not started shall be the best of three sets with a Match Tiebreak in lieu of a third set.

2.6 Balls: The Wilson Extra Duty US Open ball will be used in all men’s and women’s conference

matches. It is required that three new balls be used for warm-ups and for the first set. A new can of balls will be used for the second set and in the event of split sets. It is required that four new balls be used for each doubles pro-set.

2.7 Host Institution Responsibilities: The host institution shall be responsible for assigning all courts

and starting matches.

2.7.1 Required Equipment: The home team shall provide the following items for a Conference match: A. Wilson Extra Duty US Open balls; B. Cups, ice, water or isotonics in an area accessible to all players during competition; C. Visible scorekeeping system for each court; D. Singles sticks; E. Twelve chairs (two to be used for competitors in singles matches and four to be used

by competitors in doubles matches). 2.8 Pre-Match Format: The court area shall be available at least one hour prior to a match to allow for

warm-ups. Both teams shall be granted the same number of courts and the same length of time for warm-ups. All matches shall begin at agreed upon times (confirmed in writing by the head coach of the home team to the head coach of the visiting team). Once a player has been checked in for a match, he or she will have a maximum of 10 minutes of warm-up on court with their opponent (five minutes if both players have warmed up previously).

2.9 Score Reporting: The home team shall be responsible for sending match results via fax or e-mail to

the Conference office on the same day after the completion of a Conference match. The home team book shall be the official book for edification purposes.


Southern Conference teams with non-conference or other Conference schools. 2.11 Complimentary Tickets: The home team shall provide the visiting team with 50 complimentary

tickets for each Conference match, provided that the home team is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival.



2.13 Weather Decisions: When weather conditions require a decision as to whether a match shall be

started, the following procedure shall be used: A. When the visiting team is not on site, the head coach and match management director of the

host institution shall determine if the match shall start on the day and time scheduled; B. When both teams are on site, the head coaches and match management director shall

determine if the match is to start; C. Should bad weather or unfit conditions prevail during a match, the USTA (United States

Tennis Association) certified official on site shall be the sole judge as to suspension, resumption, or termination of play.

D. Should bad weather or unfit conditions force the suspension of a match in progress and there is a disagreement as to whether the match can be continued outdoors, the following procedure will be applied:

153

(1) The teams will wait a maximum of 30 minutes to see if the courts can become playable;

(2) After 30 minutes, the USTA certified official shall make a determination on whether the courts are playable;

(3) If the USTA certified official determines that the courts are not playable after 30 minutes, the match should be continued indoors if appropriate ITA facilities are available and have been certified by the Conference office.

2.13.1 Rainouts: In the event of a rainout or postponement of a match during the regular season,

reasonable efforts shall be made to reschedule the match according to the following procedure (in order): a. If the match has not started and both teams are on site it shall be moved to an ITA approved indoor facility with at least 3 courts in an effort to complete the match that day. b. Play at another time or site as long as there is mutual consent of the head coaches. c. Play (as a last resort) just prior to the Conference tournament at the tournament site as long as there is mutual consent of the head coaches. d. In cases of not having available indoor facilities or there is a disagreement with all of

the above procedures, the Men’s or Women’s Tennis Committee shall determine whether the match must be played or a no-contest declared (based on the evaluation of the best efforts made by both coaches to reschedule the event). (Approved and Effective 10/10)

3.0 Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees

3.1 The Southern Conference Men’s Tennis Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one

faculty athletics representative, one senior woman administrator and one head coach. The Southern Conference Women’s Tennis Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one faculty athletics representative, one senior woman administrator, and one head coach. The sport committees shall perform the following duties for their respective sports: 3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for either men’s tennis or women’s tennis; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association

and Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting men’s or women’s

tennis in the Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of men’s or women’s tennis in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year to address all matters relating to the sport of tennis and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees. This meeting shall normally take place in the month of August.

5.0 Officiating

5.1 Assignments: It is required that a minimum of two USTA / ITA certified officials be present at all

Conference matches. The host institution is responsible for contracting officials and providing payment.

5.2 Uniforms: Officials’ uniforms for Conference matches shall be in accordance with USTA policy

(collared shirt, khaki pants or shorts, and white tennis shoes). 6.0 Match Management

154

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the match management director for all Southern Conference matches. It is suggested that the match management director visit briefly with the officials and the visiting head coach prior to a match to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability. The home athletics director and/or match management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.


7.1 Only the designated public address announcer may use a microphone during a Southern Conference match. The public address announcer is responsible for whatever is said over the PA system. The primary function of the announcer is to give specific information to the fans, not to incite them by unnecessary inflection of voice.

8.0 Artificial Noisemakers

8.1 Artificial noisemakers (air horns, electronic amplifiers, whistles, etc.) of any kind are not permissible in

Southern Conference venues. Such instruments shall be removed from the facility when discovered. 9.0 Signs

9.1 Signs of a derogatory nature directed towards an individual opponent, visiting team or match official are not permitted in Southern Conference venues. It is the responsibility of the home institution to ensure that such signs are immediately removed.

10.0 Motorized Vehicles, Explosive Devices, Mascots

10.1 The home athletics director shall decide the policy regarding the use of explosive devices (cannons, rifles, rocket launchers, etc.), mascots, and motorized vehicles at their facility. Visiting athletics directors need to request permission for the use of these items at least two weeks in advance and approval or disapproval of the request must be given immediately by the home athletics director. Use of motorized vehicles, explosive devices and mascots must conform to the rules of tennis decorum.

11.0 Conduct

11.1 Coaches’ Conduct: All head and assistant coaches are to conduct themselves in such a manner during a match as to ensure or promote good crowd control. They also are responsible for the conduct of their players and other staff. Coaches (head and assistant) must follow Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations at all times.

11.1.1 Tennis Sportsmanship Guidelines: The following guidelines have been developed to promote

sportsmanship during Conference matches:

A. First and foremost, a coach must control his or her own team. A coach must establish sportsmanship and demand it of his or her players. A coach must never condone cheating and must overrule his or her own team anytime erroneous calls are observed;

B. Each coach should meet with any official who works a Conference match and encourage the official to be observant;

C. The home coach must be willing to address the crowd in cases where crowd behavior becomes abusive or unsportsmanlike. This would include taunting but also cases where spectators are making distracting noises during play;

D. A visiting coach should be smart and counsel his or her players wisely. They should try to ignore the crowd and under no circumstances should they engage in conversations with spectators. This is a confrontation the visiting team can never win and makes crowd control all the more difficult for the officials and home coach;

11.1.2 On-Court Coaching: Coaching by the head coach and assistant coaches (one assistant

coach for men’s matches and two assistant coaches for women’s matches) shall be permitted on court during a match provided it does not interfere with play. Coaching shall be allowed during the 20 seconds between points, as long as play is not interrupted, and during 90-second changeovers. Coaches shall not impede with the pace of play or impede or interfere with play on adjacent courts. Coaches must sit or stand near the net post except during the

155

change of sides. On an empty adjacent court, the men’s coaches may stand at the doubles sideline on the same side as his/her own player. On the opponent’s side, he/she must remain at midcourt. Men’s players must remain a full court from any match in progress. Women’s coaches and players must remain a half court away from matches in progress.

11.1.3 Ejection/Suspension Policy: A coach or player removed from a contest for any reason shall

be immediately suspended from his or her team’s next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-match suspension, a third ejection a four-match suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-match suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-match suspension.

11.1.4 Unsportsmanlike Behavior: Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct

including but not limited to those described below shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference.

11.1.4.1 Fighting: Any attempt by a person to strike an opponent or contest participant in

a combative manner unrelated to the sport involved or any act that insights an opponent to retaliate by acting in a similar manner shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

11.1.4.2 Aggressive Behavior: The use of obscene gestures, profane language, or the

display of hostile action towards officials, spectators, or opponents shall be described as unsportsmanlike.

11.1.4.3 Ejection: The removal by an official from a competitive sport activity shall require

the ejected participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately. 11.1.4.4 Suspension: A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the

vicinity of the contest suspended from during the time period beginning one hour prior to the scheduled contest until the conclusion of the contest. Suspension does not affect practice opportunities outside of the above time limitations.

11.1.4.5 Vicinity of Contest: The immediate area/site of the competition extended to

include any point or place from which the ejected/suspended individual could observe, supervise, or participate in any manner in the contest from which the participant is being ejected or suspended.

11.1.4.6 Competitive Conditions: The failure of an institution to provide an environment

for a contest that is safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.

11.1.4 Match Conduct Penalty System: In all conference matches, the penalty for the first

issuance to a student-athlete of the ITA Point Penalty System shall be loss of game. A second issuance of the ITA Point Penalty System shall result in loss of match and disqualification for the remainder of the contest. In the event that a player is overruled on a line call during a match for a third time the penalty system would be enacted; third occurrence would result in the loss of game, fourth occurrence would result be the loss of match and a match ejection. (Effective 10/07)

12.0 Lineups and Substitutions

12.1 Southern Conference schools shall adhere to all ITA policies regarding team lineups and substitutions,

with special emphasis on the following: A. A team lineup should always be based on a school’s order of ability on a given day. “Matching up”

is prohibited. In singles, players must compete in order of ability with the best player on the team playing at No. 1 singles, the second best at No. 2 singles, and so on through all positions. In cases of injury or illness, all players must move up. This rule shall also apply to doubles play;

B. If a player is injured or ill for three weeks or longer, the coach should use his or her discretion in determining where to place the player in the team lineup. If the player has played the majority of his or her matches at one position, he or she must be placed within two positions up or down to be within a “range”;

156

C. A player who has established a winning record at a team position in six team matches and whose ITA rankings and results show that he or she is clearly stronger than the players below them, may not be moved down;

D. If a top-six player is clearly stronger than the player immediately above him or her, then the other player must be moved down;

E. Players of similar ability may be allowed to move up or down between adjacent positions from one match to the next. They may alternate between adjacent positions so long as the alternating is not done for the purposes of “matching up” but rather for the purposes of maintaining “rank order”;

F. A player shall not be moved down in the lineup because of (1) an injury or illness which has lasted less than three weeks; (2) disciplinary reasons (although the player may be removed from the lineup altogether); (3) challenge matches after six team matches have been played after January 1 of a school year;

G. If an opposing coach feels that another team’s lineup during the regular season is not fair, a protest must be made prior to the start of the match with both the opposing coach and head referee. The match shall then be played under protest. At the conclusion of the match it is the responsibility of the coach who protested to make the Conference office aware of the specifics of the protest. The tennis committee (including the ex-officio committee) will then handle any protest concerning a challenge in a conference match. No regular season conference match may be protested subsequent to its completion. (Approved 10/12)

13.0 Changeovers

13.1 All breaks between games shall be 90 seconds in duration. Play shall be continuous between the second and third sets in singles should the second set end on a changeover. If the second set does not end on a changeover, play will be halted briefly for the players to obtain a new can of tennis balls. In the event of an injury on a changeover, USTA / ITA rules will apply.



14.1.1 Championship Trophy: Two trophies (one men’s and one women’s) presented to the

teams with the best won-loss percentage in conference matches;

14.1.2 All-Conference Team: Forty-eight plaques (24 men’s and 24 women’s) presented to the members of the All-Conference Teams. The All-Conference Teams shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. A student-athlete must have played at least 50% of conference matches at a position to be considered for first and second team all-conference awards. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes. The All-Conference First Teams shall be divided into singles units consisting of six members and doubles units consisting of three tandems for both the men and women. The All-Conference Second Teams shall be comprised of one player from each singles flight outside of the first team members, and three doubles tandems from each flight outside of the first team members. (Approved 10/12)

14.1.3 Player of the Year: Two plaques (one men’s and one women’s) presented to the players

voted Player of the Year. The Player of the Year awards shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

14.1.4 Freshman of the Year: Two plaques (one men’s and one women’s) presented to the players

voted Freshmen of the Year. The Freshmen of the Year awards shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. The freshman receiving the highest number of votes on both men’s and women’s All-Freshman Team will be named as the Freshman of the Year. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

14.1.5 Coach of the Year: Two plaques (one men’s and one women’s) presented to the person(s)

voted Coach of the Year. The Coach of the Year awards shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office;

157

14.1.6 Sportsmanship Award: Two plaques (one men’s and one women’s) presented to the

players voted as the winners of the Sportsmanship Award. The Don Bunch/Buddy Hartsell Sportsmanship award will be presented in Men’s Tennis. The Sportsmanship Awards shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

14.1.7 Players of the Week: Sixteen certificates (eight men’s and eight women’s) presented to

student-athletes named Player of the Week during the regular season. The Player of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office;

14.1.8 Players of the Month: A Player of the Month award shall be selected for men and women at

the end of each month during the season. The Players of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office;

14.1.9 All-Freshman Team: An All-Freshman Team shall be named consisting of six freshmen, true

freshmen, red shirt or otherwise. The coaches will vote to select a 6-member team. The freshman receiving the highest number of votes will be named as the Freshman of the Year. Balloting will be done as it is for All-Conference voting. (Approved 10/08)




1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, single-elimination Conference tournaments shall be conducted to determine the Southern Conference Tournament champions and the recipients of the league’s automatic bids to participate in the NCAA Men’s and Women’s Tennis Championships. All teams that are eligible to compete will participate in the Conference tournaments. The tournaments will be conducted over four days. If a Conference tournament is not completed due to inclement weather or other extenuating circumstances, the respective NCAA Tournament automatic bid will be presented to the highest remaining seed in the tournament. If the Conference tournament is not able to be played at all, the regular season champion shall receive the respective NCAA Tournament automatic bid.

1.2 In the event of inclement weather on the final day of competition, there shall be shall be a rain date for the day following the regularly scheduled tennis championship final in an effort to complete the tournament. It was noted that this will only happen in cases of weather on the final day of the tournament – every effort will be made to complete the tournament on the regularly scheduled date (even if weather takes place on the first, second or third day of the tournament). (Approved 10/11)


2.1 The Southern Conference Tournaments will be conducted prior to the NCAA Tournaments on the dates recommended by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association. The 2014 men’s and women’s tennis championship tournaments will be held on April 16-19, in Chattanooga, Tennessee and will be hosted at the Champions Club (format will be Wednesday – Saturday due to Easter Sunday).

2.2 Future Tournament Dates: The dates for the 2015 tournament will be April 23-26.


3.1 Bid Process: The location of the tournaments shall be determined by a bid process conducted by the Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees. All bids shall be reviewed and voted on by the Senior Woman Administrators Association and Athletics Directors Association.

158

3.1.2 Future Tournament Locations: The 2015 men’s and women’s tennis championship

tournament will be held on April 23-26 at a location to be determined.


4.1 Bracket and Match Times: Tournament bracket and match times shall be set by the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees. Matches may not start before announced times.


5.1 Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees shall provide general oversight of the tournaments. The committees shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.

5.2 Games Committee: A Games Committee shall be appointed for the tournaments consisting of the

Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committee members on site, the athletics director of the host institution or his or her designee, the Southern Conference championships administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), the tournament director, and the head referee. The Games Committee shall:


B. Make decisions regarding situations that occur where resolution is not covered in the rules and regulations of the NCAA, ITA, USTA or the Southern Conference as stated in the Tournament Manual or these sport regulations;


5.3 Tournament Director: The host institution for the tournaments shall appoint a tournament director, who will work with the conference Assistant Commissioner for Championships to perform the following functions under the direction of the Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees:

A. Serve as supervisor of the tournaments; B. Plan and coordinate all activities of the tournaments in conjunction with the Southern

Conference Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant tournament information to all coaches, athletics directors, chief executive

officers, faculty representatives, senior woman administrators, and other necessary personnel of competing institutions;


tournament manual; F. Delegate duties and responsibilities to tournament personnel; G. Secure a certified trainer and other medical personnel for the tournaments.


perform the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Make sure that results are made available to all media after each match; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the tournaments; E. Be responsible for all-tournament balloting; F. Coordinate the installation of phone lines as necessary in media work areas; G. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site.

5.5 Medical Personnel: All medical staff for the tournaments shall be appointed by the tournament

director, who shall ensure that the following occurs: A. That a certified trainer is on site for all practices and present at all matches at each venue; B. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on call for all matches; C. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities and that an EMS unit is

on call during all matches; D. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all tournament events; E. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all head


159

5.6 Officials: The Southern Conference Assistant Commissioner for Championships, working in

conjunction with the Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees, shall contract all officials to work the tournaments and shall:

A. Assign a pool of officials to work the tournaments. The pool of officials should include a head referee and a deputy referee (who shall serve at the discretion of the head referee). The head referee shall make all individual match assignments and shall provide for at least two rovers for each match on the first three days and chair umpires for all matches on the fourth day. Coaches do not possess scratch power when it comes to the assigning of any official;

B. Conduct pre-match and post-match meetings as necessary with officials; C. Make sure that all officials are USTA / ITA certified; D. Make sure that all officials are dressed in appropriate attire for representation of the USTA.


tournament director and/or tournament media coordinator: A. Tournament desk personnel; B. Public address announcer; C. In addition, Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committee members

(excluding the head coaches’ representatives), may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the tournaments.


marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness and ticket sales to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the tournament is being played in.


6.1 The Southern Conference staff liaison shall send a tournament manual to all Conference chief executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, athletics directors, senior woman administrators, head coaches and sports information directors at least one month prior to the tournaments. The following information shall be contained in the manual:

A. Facilities information; B. Telephone numbers and addresses of key tournament personnel; C. Local maps; D. Dates, times and location of the tournaments and related activities; E. Information on team and institutional credentials and parking passes; F. Tournament itineraries; G. Medical and training information; H. Media information; I. Information on hospitality and social functions; J. Names and responsibilities of Local Organizing Committee(s) personnel; K. Names and responsibilities of host institution personnel; L. A tournament emergency plan and emergency telephone numbers.


7.1 Seeding: The seeds for the tournaments shall be determined based on each team’s regular-season conference finish. In the event of a tie for a particular seed, the seed will be determined as follows:

A. If one team has defeated the other team, that team shall be awarded a higher seeded

position; B. If the tied teams tied or did not play, the higher position will be awarded to the team that

has the best won-loss record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie; C. If each team has the same record against the highest seeded team not involved in the tie,

then the won-loss records against the next highest seeded team not involved in the tie would be considered and so on down the line until the tie is broken;

160

D. If the records are the same against all teams, then the seeded position would be determined by looking at (1) best overall team score, (2) number of matches won and (3) least number of sets lost;

E. If the records are the same against all teams, then the seeded position would be

determined by a toss of a coin by the Commissioner;


G. If the teams are still tied, the team’s records against the next highest seeded team after the

three-way tie is considered and so forth until the tie is broken; H. If the records are the same against all teams, then the seeded position would be

determined by looking at (1) best overall team score, (2) number of matches won and (3) least number of sets lost;

I. If there is still a tie, the seeded position of the teams will be determined by a draw

conducted by the Commissioner; J. For multiple ties larger than a three-way tie, the same procedure will be applied as used to

break a three-way tie; K. For all multiple ties, the tie is broken by first deciding the highest seeded team involved in

the tie before deciding other seeding positions.

7.2. Ticket Prices: Prices for the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Tennis Tournaments shall be established by the host institution and approved by the Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees. There shall be no admission charge to the 2014 conference tournaments.

7.3 Match Balls: The Wilson Extra Duty US Open tennis ball shall be used during all men’s and women’s tournament matches. The Conference office shall be responsible for ordering a minimum of 75 dozen new balls for use during the tournaments. It is required that three new balls be used for warm-ups and for the first set. A new can of balls will be used for the second set and in the event of split sets. It is required that four new balls be used for each doubles pro-set.

7.4 Playing Rules: The playing rules for the Southern Conference Tournaments shall conform to those

rules adopted for NCAA Division I Men’s and Women’s Tennis, as well as the ITA, USTA, and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations.


warm-up and during the post-tournament awards ceremony. All competitors are expected to wear the same team uniform at the start of the match. (Approved 10/08) In accordance with NCAA rules, the institution’s official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributors’ normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., racquets, shoes) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.


athletes to the Conference compliance administrator no later than three (4) days prior to the start of the tournament. The Conference office will verify the eligibility of these student-athletes and will notify an institution if a problem arises with any of its student-athletes. Student-athletes not deemed eligible to compete may not be in uniform during the Conference tournaments.

7.7 Head Coaches Teleconference: A Southern Conference head coaches teleconference will be

conducted prior to the start of the tournament. The Assistant Commissioner for Championships will conduct the teleconference and review information pertinent to the tournaments. The head coach of each institution is required to participate on the conference call. Head coaches who do not participate

161

are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees and enforced by the Commissioner.


A. Matches shall not begin prior to their announced start times; B. Teams involved in the first matches of the day shall have access to courts a minimum of 45

minutes prior to their scheduled start time for warm-ups; C. Teams involved in later matches during the day may warm-up on secondary courts prior to

their scheduled match time. If secondary warm-up courts are not available, teams will be allotted 45 minutes of warm-up time on the main courts regardless of when courts become available after the preceding match;

D. If secondary courts are available for warm-up, teams involved in later matches will be allotted 10 minutes of warm-up on the main courts.

7.8.1 Player Introductions: Pre-match player introductions for the tournaments shall be as follows:

A. Lineups shall be introduced via a public address system whenever possible; B. For matches that can not be introduced via a public address system due to other matches in

progress, the head coaches will introduce their lineups to the crowd.

7.9 Lineups and Substitutions: All ITA policies regarding team lineups and substitutions in effect during the regular season shall also be in effect during the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Tennis Tournaments. The following additional policies shall govern tournament lineups and substitutions:

A. All lineups for the tournaments shall be submitted to the Conference office by noon on the

Monday prior to the start of competition. The Conference office will distribute all lineups to the head coaches on Monday afternoon. Any protests to submitted lineups will be due by Tuesday at noon and challenged coaches will be notified by 5:00 pm on Tuesday. A conference call will be held on Wednesday with the challenged coaches and the Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees to resolve the protest;

B. The protest(s) will be addressed by a committee consisting of appropriate conference staff, the members of the Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees and two ex-officio committee members that will include two additional coaches who will not vote but act as an additional information resource. A coach or administrator whose institution is involved in the protest must excuse themselves from the call. Before the beginning of the season a rotation list of ex-officio committee members will be established by the Conference office so that all coaches are aware of the potential to serve on a protest call. (Approved 10/08);

C. Once a lineup is approved for the tournament, the only way it can be changed is due to injury or illness. In that event, everyone should be moved up one spot. Also, a seventh or eighth player may come into a sixth position at any time;

D. A player will be allowed to come back into the tournament after sitting out a match as long as they re-enter at their previous position;

E. In doubles competition, any replacement must be a straight line replacement. The three doubles teams must remain in order of strength as determined by their respective competition records. A No. 3 doubles player may came out and another player entered in his or her spot, as long as the teams remain in rank order.

7.10 Court Assignments and Score Reporting: The tournament desk shall control the assigning of all

courts and the recording of all scores. After a match is completed, players must return their balls and report their scores to the tournament desk immediately. Coaches must check-in at the tournament desk 30 minutes before their scheduled match time to submit their lineups and receive court assignments.

7.11 Changeovers: All changeovers between games and sets shall be 90 seconds in length. The time

shall be kept by an official. Play shall be continuous between the second and third sets should the second set end on a changeover. If the second set does not end on a changeover, play may be halted briefly for the players to obtain a new can of tennis balls. In the event of injury on a changeover, USTA rules will apply.

7.12 Defaults: Any player not ready to play within 15 minutes after their scheduled match time may be

defaulted.

162

7.13 Media Policies: All coaches and student-athletes shall be available for interviews with the media following each match after a 10-minute cooling off period has been observed.

7.13.1 Cooling Off Period: The cooling off period shall begin at the conclusion of a particular

match when all coaches and players have left the court area. The cooling off period will not be extended to allow coaches or players to do interviews with a broadcasting television network. In the event that these interviews take place, the cooling off period will begin when the majority of a team’s players and coaches have left the court area.


8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the championship matches, a tournament awards ceremony shall be held on the main courts. The head coach and student-athletes of the winning teams shall remain for the awards ceremony. The head coach and student-athletes of the losing teams shall have the option of immediately exiting following the match or remaining for the awards ceremony. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony:

8.1.1 Championship Trophy: Two trophies (one men’s and one women’s) presented to the head

coach and captains of the winning teams; 8.1.2 Runner-up Trophy: Two trophies (one men’s and one women’s) presented to the head coach

and captains of the runner-up teams; 8.1.4 Most Outstanding Player: Two plaques (one men’s and one women’s) presented to the players

selected as the Most Outstanding Players of the tournaments. The Most Outstanding Players shall be selected by the Games Committee;

8.1.5 NCAA Automatic Bid: Two certificates (one men’s and one women’s) presented to the athletics

director and/or senior woman administrator of the winning schools, signifying their institution’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament.


as follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Twenty individual plaques (ten men’s and ten women’s) will be presented to the head coach(s) of the championship teams for presentation to the student-athletes of the championship teams. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.



the Southern Conference Tournaments, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.


Southern Conference Tournaments. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Men’s and Women’s Tennis Committees. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.


needed for use during the Southern Conference Tournament. The bus passes shall be distributed by the Tournament Director and are non-transferable.

163

2014 Track & Field Regular-Season Regulations

1.0 Sponsorship

1.1 The following member institutions sponsor track and field as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University (indoor and outdoor, men and women) The Citadel (indoor and outdoor, men and women) Davidson College (indoor and outdoor, men and women) Elon University (indoor and outdoor, women only) Furman University (indoor and outdoor, men and women) Georgia Southern University (indoor and outdoor, women only) Samford University (indoor and outdoor, men and women) University of North Carolina at Greensboro (indoor and outdoor, men and women) University of Tennessee at Chattanooga (indoor and outdoor, men and women) Western Carolina University (indoor and outdoor, men and women) Wofford College (indoor and outdoor, men and women)




Conference institutions during the regular season. Southern Conference institutions hosting track and field events during the regular season are encouraged to extend invitations of participation to other Conference schools.

2.2 Championship Determination: Southern Conference team or individual champions shall not be determined

during regular-season competition. Team and individual champions shall be determined at the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Indoor and Outdoor Track and Field Championships.

2.3 Competition Rules: Competition rules as adopted by the NCAA shall be in effect for all Southern

Conference track and field events during the regular season. 2.4 Results Reporting: Conference institutions shall update all results information of regular season events to

the Conference ranking list by 5:00 PM ET on Monday of each week. It is mandatory that the Conference ranking list be completed by 5:00 PM ET of the Monday prior to the indoor and outdoor track & field championships in preparation for seeding purposes. Those student-athletes who have not been added to the Conference ranking list by that time will not be allowed to have times or marks used for seeding into the championships. (Approved 10/09)

2.5 Scouting Information: Southern Conference teams shall not share scouting information on other Southern

Conference teams with non-Conference or other Conference schools. 2.6 Complimentary Tickets: Conference institutions hosting regular season meets shall provide Conference

visiting institutions with 50 complimentary tickets for the meet, provided that the home institution is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival.

2.7 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for having all of its student-athletes eligible prior

to the season. All student-athlete eligibility profiles shall be transmitted to the Conference office prior to a school’s first day of competition. This information shall be filed and in accordance with the instructions of the Southern Conference Associate Commissioner for Compliance. If any questions arise, the Conference compliance administrator shall have the details on all student-athletes who are eligible for Conference regular-season and post-season competition.

2.8 Signs: Signs of a derogatory nature directed toward an individual opponent, visiting team or an official are

not permitted at events being hosted by Southern Conference institutions. It is the responsibility of the meet

164

management director to see that derogatory signs are confiscated. 2.9 Track Inspection: It is recommended that Southern Conference institutions hosting regular-season meets

make the track available for inspection by all participating teams on the day prior to the meet. Each institution should be allowed the same amount of inspection time and/or practice opportunities.

2.10 Entries, Scratches and Substitutions: Southern Conference institutions shall adhere to NCAA policies

regarding event entries, scratches, and substitutions.

3.0 Track and Field Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Track and Field Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one faculty athletics representative, one senior woman administrator and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for men’s and women’s track and field; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association and

Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting men’s and women’s track

and field in the Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sports of men’s and women’s indoor and outdoor track and field in the

Southern Conference. 4.0 Head Coaches Meetings

4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year to address all matters relating to the sports of men’s and women’s indoor and outdoor track and field and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Track and Field Committee. This meeting shall normally take place in the month of August.

5.0 Meet Officials

5.1 Home Institution Responsibilities: Southern Conference institutions hosting meets during the regular season are responsible for contracting a qualified head referee, qualified judges for all field events, a head clerk, starter, scorer and a qualified track inspector. It is recommended that neutral officials be present at all events being hosted by Southern Conference institutions.

6.0 Meet Management

6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the meet management director for all events being hosted by Southern Conference institutions. It is suggested that the meet management director visit briefly with the officials and the visiting head coaches prior to the meet to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability. The home athletics director and/or meet management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.


7.1 Only the designated public address announcer may use a microphone during a meet hosted by a Southern Conference institution. The public address announcer is responsible for whatever is said over the PA system. The primary function of the announcer is to give specific information to the fans, not to incite them by unnecessary inflection of voice beyond the pre-meet introduction of the home team or pre-event introduction of the host institution’s student-athletes.

8.0 Conduct

8.1 Coaches’ Conduct: All head and assistant coaches are to conduct themselves in such a manner during a meet as to ensure or promote good crowd control. They also are responsible for the conduct of their student-athletes and staff. Coaches (head and assistant) must follow Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code

165

Regulations at all times. 8.2 Ejection/Suspension Policy: A coach or student-athlete removed from a competition for any reason shall

be immediately suspended from their team’s next competition. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-competition suspension, a third ejection a four-competition suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-competition suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-competition suspension.

8.3 Unsportsmanlike Behavior: Acts of unsportsmanlike behavior or unethical conduct including but not limited

to those described below shall make the offending party subject to sanctions by the conference.

8.3.1 Fighting: Any attempt by a person to strike an opponent or contest participant in a combative manner unrelated to the sport involved or any act that insights an opponent to retaliate by acting in a similar manner shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior.



participant to leave the vicinity of the competitive activity immediately. 8.3.4 Suspension: A penalty that denies the involved participant from being in the vicinity of the contest

suspended from during the time period beginning one hour prior to the scheduled contest until one hour after the contest is completed. Suspension does not affect practice opportunities outside of the above time limitations.



8.3.6 Competitive Conditions: The failure of an institution to provide an environment for a contest that is

safe and fair to competition shall be described as unsportsmanlike behavior. 9.0 Awards

9.1 Performers of the Week: Certificates shall be presented to student-athletes named indoor or outdoor Performer of the Week during the regular season. The Performers of the Week for both track events and field events for men and women will be selected. The Performers of the Week shall be selected by a committee of head coaches determined at the August meeting of the head coaches and Track and Field committee. (Approved 10/08)

9.2 Performers of the Month: A Performer of the Month shall be awarded at the end of each month

during the indoor and outdoor season for both men and women. The Performers of the Month shall be selected by a committee of head coaches determined at the August meeting of the head coaches and Track and Field Committee.

10.0 Two-Year Moratorium of Approved Sport Regulations: Sport regulations approved by the membership must


Conference Championship Meet Regulations 1.0 Championships Format

1.1 At the conclusion of both the indoor and outdoor track and field regular seasons, Conference championship meets shall be conducted to determine men’s and women’s team and individual champions. All teams eligible to compete shall participate in the Conference championship meets.

166

The events contested in the indoor and outdoor track and field championships shall normally be the same

events contested at the NCAA Division I Indoor and Outdoor Track and Field Championships. Events may not be added or deleted to the Southern Conference Championships without a majority vote of the Conference head coaches and the approval of the Track and Field Committee and the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association.

2.0 Championships Dates

The Southern Conference men’s and women’s Indoor Track and Field Championships shall normally be conducted two weeks prior to the NCAA championships. The Southern Conference men’s and women’s Outdoor Track and Field Championships shall normally be conducted five weeks prior to the NCAA Preliminary Rounds. 2.1 Indoor Track and Field: The dates of the 2014 Indoor Track and Field Championships shall be March 1-2. 2.2 Outdoor Track and Field: The dates of the 2014 Outdoor Track and Field Championships shall be April 26-27.


3.1 Rotation: The location of the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Outdoor Track and Field Championships shall be determined by a rotational system among Conference schools that meet hosting criteria. The location for the Southern Conference Men’s & Women’s Indoor Track and Field Championships shall be determined by the Track and Field Committee.

3.1.1 Indoor Criteria: The Southern Conference Indoor Track and Field Championships shall not be

granted to any school or outside entity that can not have a track with at least six lanes in the straightaway events and three lanes around the oval. The facility must be able to accommodate all events indoors and provide good spectator viewing of all events.

3.1.2 2013 Indoor Championships Location: The site of the 2014 Southern Conference Men’s and

Women’s Indoor Track and Field Championships shall be the JDL Fast Track in Winston-Salem, N.C. (Approved 6/12).

3.1.3 Future Indoor Championships Locations: The 2015 Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s

Indoor Track and Field Championships shall be held on February 27-28 at the CrossPlex facility in Birmingham, AL. The 2016 Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Indoor Track and Field Championships shall be held on February 26-27 at the CrossPlex facility in Birmingham, AL. (Approved 6/12)

3.1.4 Outdoor Criteria: The Southern Conference Outdoor Track and Field Championships shall not be

granted to any school or outside entity that can not have a track with at least eight lanes or is not more than 42 feet wide for both straightaway and oval events. The facility must be able to accommodate all events within walking distance to the main track and provide good spectator viewing of all events. An appeal can be made to the head coaches and Track and Field Committee at their annual meeting to conduct a meet with one or more of these criteria lacking but must meet approval of the majority of the head coaches and the request must also be approved by the Athletics Directors Association.

3.1.5 2014 Outdoor Championships Location: The site of the 2014 Southern Conference Men’s and

Women’s Outdoor Track & Field Championships shall be held in Spartanburg, S.C. (Hosted by Wofford College at Spartanburg HS)

3.1.6 Future Outdoor Championships Locations: Outdoor Track & Field Rotation: April 25-26, 2015 –Samford University April 23-24, 2016 – Western Carolina University


4.1 Start Times: Championships schedules shall be set by the Southern Conference Track and Field Committee.

5.0 Championships Administration

167

5.1 Track and Field Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Track and Field Committee shall

provide general oversight of the men’s and women’s indoor and outdoor championships. The Track and Field Committees shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.

5.2 Games Committee: A Games Committee shall be appointed for the men’s and women’s indoor and outdoor

championships consisting of Track and Field Committee members on site, the athletics director of the host institution or his or her designee, the Southern Conference championships administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), the meet director, and the head referee. The Games Committee shall:

A. Ensure that the championships are conducted in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Southern Conference as contained in the Southern Conference Championships Manual and these sport regulations;

B. Make decisions regarding situations that occur where resolution is not covered in the rules and regulations of the NCAA or the Southern Conference as stated in the Championships Manual or these sport regulations;

C. Inspect the meet facilities prior to the start of the event.

5.3 Meet Director: The host institution for the tournament shall appoint a meet director, who will work with the Assistant Commissioner for Championships and shall perform the following functions under the direction of the Track and Field Committee:

A. Serve as supervisor of the championships; B. Plan and coordinate all activities of the championships in conjunction with the Southern

Conference Track and Field Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant championships information to all coaches, athletics directors, senior woman

administrators, chief executive officers, faculty representatives and other necessary personnel of competing institutions;

D. Coordinate and supervise the activities of the meet officials; E. Oversee servicing the needs of the participants and spectators as prescribed in the

championships manual; F. Delegate duties and responsibilities to championships personnel; G. Secure a certified trainer and other medical personnel for the championships.

5.4 Media Coordinator: The meet director shall appoint a championships media coordinator, who shall perform

the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the activities of the results crew and make sure that results are made available to all

media and coaches as soon as possible after the conclusion of each meet; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the championships; E. Be responsible for awards balloting; F. Coordinate the installation of phone lines for the media; G. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site.

5.5 Medical Personnel: All medical staff for the indoor championships shall be appointed by the meet director

through the conference Sports Medicine Committee. All medical staff for the outdoor championships shall be appointed by the meet director. Both shall ensure that the following occurs:

A. That two certified trainers are present during all competitions; B. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on site during all competitions; C. That an EMS unit is on site during all competitions; D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all championships events; F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all head

athletic trainers and head coaches prior to their arrival at the championships site; G. That all institutions commit to sending one trainer to the competition site.

5.6 Officials: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Rules. The Southern Conference staff liaison,

working in conjunction with the Track and Field Committee, shall contract all officials to work the championships and shall:

A. Assign a pool of officials to work the championships. The pool of officials shall include the following: (1) Head referee; (2) Starter;

168

(3) Recall starter (assistant starter); (4) Clerk of the course; (5) Head inspector; (6) Inspectors for field events and running event judging (a minimum of two inspectors shall

be assigned to each turn, one inside the track and one outside the track. Inspectors shall judge each straightaway, plus the relay passing zones in the relay races. Inspectors shall judge the straightaway races divided between the ends and the sides of the track. The head inspector shall be located at a designated position);

B. Conduct pre-event and post-event meetings as necessary with officials; C. Oversee the selection and training of all other meet officials with the meet director and ensure

that a training session is conducted for these officials prior to competition; D. Ensure that the head referee remains at the championships site for at least 30 minutes after the

final results are posted or read and ensure that the head referee makes a written report before departing of all actions, protests, and controversial decisions that may have affected the meet (the report shall be made available to all coaches at the site upon request).

5.7 Additional Championships Personnel: The following additional personnel shall be appointed by the meet

director and/or championships media coordinator: A. Official timer; B. Public address announcer; C. Clock, scoreboard and matrix board operators; D. In addition, Southern Conference Track and Field Committee members (excluding the head

coach representatives), may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the championships.

5.8 Promotions Director: The meet director shall appoint a promotions director that ensures that a marketing

and promotions plan is created to promote awareness to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community in which the championships are being held.

5.9 Involvement of Head Coaches: The Southern Conference head track and field coaches shall be utilized as

counsel for the planning of both the indoor and outdoor championships. Their technical knowledge and personal experience in the administration of meets shall assure the maintenance of meet reputation for excellence and efficiency. Selection of certain officials (head referee, starter, etc.) shall be considered upon the recommendation of the head coaches. Coaches’ recommendations for these officials and a review of planning for the indoor and outdoor championships shall be an item on the agenda for the annual meeting of the head coaches and Track and Field Committee.


6.1 The Southern Conference staff liaison shall send a championships manual to all Conference chief executive

officers, faculty athletics representatives, athletics directors, senior woman administrators, head coaches and sports information directors at least one month prior to the championships. The following information shall be contained in the manual:

A. Facilities information; B. Telephone numbers and addresses of key championships personnel; C. Local maps; D. Competition schedule of events; E. Dates, times and location of the championships and related activities; F. Information on team and institutional credentials and parking passes; G. A championships itinerary; H. Medical and training information; I. Media information; J. Information on hospitality and social functions; K. Names and responsibilities of Local Organizing Committee personnel; L. Names and responsibilities of host institution personnel; M. A championships emergency plan and emergency telephone numbers.


7.1 Scoring: At the indoor and outdoor championships, teams may enter a maximum of six competitors in all individual events and six competitors in multi-event competitions (heptathlon, decathlon, etc.). The eight-place scoring system (10-8-6-5-4-3-2-1) shall be used in individual and relay events during the indoor and outdoor championships. (Amended and Approved 10/11)

169

7.2 Tie-Breaking Procedures: In case of a tie for first place in a team championship, the tying teams shall be

considered co-champions. 7.3 Travel Squads: Travel squads to the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Indoor are 25 and Outdoor

Track and Field Championships shall be limited to 28 student-athletes per team. 7.4 Rules: The rules for the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Indoor and Outdoor Track and Field

Championships shall conform to those rules adopted by the NCAA for the Division I Indoor and Outdoor Track and Field Championships, and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Championships Manual and these sport regulations.

7.5 Uniforms: All competitors must wear exclusively the official uniform of their institution in competition, warm-

up and during the post-championships awards ceremony. Visible undergarments shall be an identical and solid color. Bare midriff tops will not be allowed as a competition uniform. In addition, all uniforms must allow for hip numbers to be placed on the hip of the uniform, not on a bare leg or bare thigh. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institution’s official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributor’s normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes, bags) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.

7.6 Student-Athlete Eligibility: Each institution is responsible for submitting a list of competing student-athletes

to the Conference compliance administrator no later than three (3) days prior to the start of the championships. The Conference office will verify the eligibility of these student-athletes and will notify an institution if a problem arises with any of its student-athletes. Student-athletes not deemed eligible to compete may not be in uniform during the Conference championships.

7.7 Head Coaches Meeting: A Southern Conference head coaches meeting will be held at the championships

site prior to the start of the indoor and outdoor championships. The Track and Field Committee chair will conduct the meeting and review information pertinent to the championships. The head coach of each institution is required to attend these meetings. Head coaches who do not attend the meeting are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Track and Field Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.

7.8 Entries and Scratches: The following items address the issues of event entries and scratches:

A. The Conference office shall send out instructions regarding event entry procedures to the head coach at each institution at least 14 days prior to the championships;

B. Entry forms shall allow a maximum of six entries per team for each individual event and six entries per team for multi-events (Amended and Approved 10/11);

C. All entries for conference championship events shall be done on-line. Entries and all changes to entries (i.e., event scratches) are due no later than Noon on the day prior to the start of competition. No additional entries or changes to entries may be made after that time;

D. Entry forms shall also be e-mailed to the conference staff liaison by Noon on the day prior to the start of competition for verification purposes;

E. All performances used by coaches on entry forms must have been made in the current indoor or outdoor season and must have been posted on the official Southern Conference Ranking List. No relay individual performances are acceptable, nor will hand held times taken by the coach be accepted. Only officially recorded performances either hand or electronic will be accepted for seeding purposes. A coach may make an appeal to the Track and Field Committee to submit a coaches’ hand time;

F. Heat and flight sheets shall be made available to all head coaches at the meeting on the night prior to the start of the championships for the purposes of verification and last minute scratches;

G. A student-athlete scratched from an event at the pre-championships meeting shall be disqualified from the rest of the meet.

H. If a student-athlete has a distance or time on a regular season official results list, that time or distance must be placed on the Conference performance list. (Approved 10/08)

7.9 Seeding: For lane events (including the 800 meters) all events shall be seeded by time using the “snake”

method of seeding. Coaches may petition to the Games Committee a competitor’s position on the seeded list of any running or field event. The Games Committee shall, by majority vote, determine the proper seeded place.

170

7.10 Lane Assignments: For all preliminaries, lane assignments shall be determined by random draw. For all finals, lane assignments shall be determined by preferred lanes.

A. Lane preference shall be determined by the host institution and not subject to debate. The following are recommended lane preferences:

Nine Lane Track staggered starts (for outdoor) – 5, 6, 7, 8, 4, 3, 9, 2, 1 Nine Lane Track straight-aways (for outdoor) – 5, 6, 4, 7, 3, 8, 2, 9, 1 (Approved 10/11) Eight Lane Track staggered starts – 4, 5, 6, 7, 3, 2, 1, 8 Eight Lane Track straight-aways – 4, 5, 3, 6, 2, 7, 1, 8 Six Lane Track staggered starts – 4, 5, 6, 3, 2, 1 Six Lane Track straight-aways – 3, 4, 5, 2, 1, 6

B. Lane assignments are only altered or redrawn after the meet director has drawn them and

only if enough scratches warrant a redraw, otherwise vacated lanes remain empty. If scratches bring an event down to less than or same as the lanes being used, there will be a final only in that event and preferred lanes will be used. For the Indoor 200 meters and 400 meters sprints, the preliminaries and finals shall use only lanes 3 through 6. In the preliminaries, the lane assignments will be random. In the finals, the lane assignments will use a 4, 5, 6, 3 preference.

7.11 Distance Event Seeding and Lane Assignments: If a runner in the fast heat of a distance event which

uses a fast and slow heat format is scratched, then the next runner on the entry order list will be moved to the fast heat. Distance events shall be seeded by time from best to worst. Preferred positions will be used. Starting position criteria will be determined by a vote of the coaches at the pre-meet meeting. For most distance events, there can be two heats – a fast heat and a slow heat depending on the number of entries.

A. In the mile, 1500 meters, 3000 meters and 3000 meters steeplechase, the fast heat shall be a

maximum of 12 competitors. In the 3,000 meters steeplechase, the fast section will be composed of the 12 fastest declared times based on the descending order list posted on the Monday prior to the championships. If 18 or less athletes declare for the 3,000 meters steeplechase there shall be one heat, if 19 or more declare there shall be one section of the 12 fastest declared and multiple sections of 18. (Approved 10/11) There shall be only one heat for the 10,000 meters at the outdoor championships.

B. For the 3000 meters and 5000 meters distance events, an athlete would need to have met a

pre-determined qualifying standard in order to be in the fast section at the conference championship meet. Those qualifying standards are as follows:

Women: 3000 meters –10:40.00 (Approved 10/08) 5000 meters – 18:45.00 (Approved 10/11) Men: 3000 meters – 8:50.00 5000 meters – 15:37.00 (Approved 10/11)

C. A maximum number of 12 athletes is the pre-determined number that is desired in the fast sections of the indoor 3000 meters and 5000 meters.

D. If a situation arises where more than 12 athletes have met the qualifying standing in the 3000

meters, then all athletes that met the standard would be included in the fast section. If a situation arises where there are not 12 athletes that have met the qualifying standard in the 3000 meters, the remainder of the 12 athlete field will be drawn from the entry list in descending order.

E. In the Indoor 5000 meters, any athlete that has met the standard would be included in the fast

section along with any athlete that enters the 5000 meters without a time but has run a qualifying time of 10:35 for the women and 8:48 for the men in the 3000 meters prior to the start of the indoor championship. (Approved 10/11)

F. An athlete that has a 5000 meters time recorded on the conference ranking list but their time for

the 3000 meters on the conference ranking list would qualify them for the fast heat of the 5000 meters, may enter the 5000 meters based on the 3000 meters time and get into the fast section. This decision must be made by the coach of the athlete prior to the start of the meet at the pre-meet coaches meeting.

G. To schedule the slow heat of the 5K just prior to the fast heat in the indoor and outdoor track &

field championships (and having set times for both on the schedule). Student-athletes would have 30 minutes prior to the start of the slow heat to declare. If 18 or less entrants check in for

171

the 5K it will be run as one heat at the scheduled time of the fast heat. If 19 or more check in, there shall be a second section composed of athletes who have not met the criteria spelled out above. (Approved 10/08)(Amended 10/11)

7.12 Advancement: Advancement from heats to finals in lane events shall be determined by the number of

heats using the place and time method. The following are the heats to finals advancement setups;

7.12.1 A. Two heats -- top three places in each heat, next fastest times overall to fill the lanes;

B. Three heats -- top two places in each heat, next fastest times overall to fill the lanes; C. Four heats -- top place in each heat, next fastest times overall to fill the lanes; D. Five heats -- top place in each heat, next fastest time overall to fill the lanes; E. Six heats -- finalists will be determined by best times from all heats to fill the lanes; F. Seven heats – top place in each heat, next fastest times overall to fill the lanes; G. Eight or more heats – finalists determined by best times overall to fill the lanes.

7.13 Field Events Flight Format: In field events, the determination of flights shall be as follows:

A. The placement of competitors shall be seeded from worst to best as with no more than 12 in a flight but no less than five. The best seeds should be in the last flight. The flight position shall be randomly selected;

B. The minimum number of competitors that advances to the finals shall be no more than one over the number of places scored;

C. The time between flights shall be 10 minutes; D. If a competitor leaves a field event trial and does not return before all other competitors have

taken their trials in that flight, the competitor in question will forfeit any remaining attempts; E. A competitor shall get only the time between consecutive attempts as listed in the NCAA rules

manual; F. If a competitor leaves a field event final, they will get a mandatory allowed time as set forth by

NCAA rules to begin their attempt and must then forfeit that attempt if an attempt is not made; G. In the high jump and pole vault, if a competitor leaves the competition they must be back before

all other competitors have completed their attempts at the height they left. If not, the competitor must then make whatever number of attempts that were remaining at the previous height at the new height.

7.14 Event Specifics: The following are specific policies for certain events:

A. 800 meters -- a one-turn stagger shall be used in all races. Cones or some other easily visible object must be placed on the lane lines at the break point;

B. 1,500 meters -- a waterfall start shall be used; C. 400 meter relay and 1,600 meter relay -- both events shall be run as a final based on time. The

seeding shall be fastest to slowest filling all the lanes in the fast heat with the remainders placing in the slow heat. If there are more teams than lanes on the track, the teams will be distributed between two or more heats with the fast heat having the larger number of teams and the slow heat having no less than three teams. The slow heat shall run first. A shared lane may be used in the fast heat if there is one more team entered than the number of lanes on the track. Teams will be seeded by entry time and assigned by preferred lane;

D. Pole vault -- The five-alive method shall be used in determining order of competition after the athletes have been ranked from worst to best. A two-minute warm-up without the bar shall be allowed before a student-athlete enters competition if they have passed two consecutive heights. The starting height shall be 12" below the eighth ranked competitor on the conference ranking list. The starting height shall be rounded down to the nearest centimeter which shall allow the interval to increase to achieve the minimum NCAA qualifying mark. Weather conditions may vary these policies as agreed upon by the Games Committee;

E. High jump -- The starting height will be 4" below the eighth ranked competitor on the conference ranking list. The starting height shall be rounded down to the nearest centimeter which shall allow the interval to increase to achieve the minimum NCAA qualifying mark. Weather conditions may vary these policies as agreed upon by the Games Committee.

F. To use box starts in the following indoor track and field events: Distance Medley Relay, 3K, 5K, and the Mile. (Approved 10/08)

G. Triple jump – There will be two boards, a short (taped) board and a long board for both the Indoor and Outdoor Track and Field Championships. The short taped board will be at 28’ for the women and 38’ for the men. (Approved 10/08)

172

7.15 Media Policies: All coaches and student-athletes shall be available for interviews with the media during both days of competition. Student-athletes shall be required to speak with the media following a 10-minute “cooling off” period after the completion of their final individual competition of the day. Coaches shall be required to speak with the media following a 10-minute “cooling off” period following their team’s final competition of the day.

7.16 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Track and Field Rules and

Regulations.

7.17 Ticket Prices: Ticket prices for the indoor and outdoor championships shall be set by the conference office or host institution in consultation with the Southern Conference Track and Field Committee.

7.18 Protests: Protests relating to matters which develop during the conduct of the championships should be

made at once and not later than 30 minutes after the results of the event in question have been posted. Any such protest should be made in writing by a head coach and submitted to the head referee, who will render a decision. There shall be a protest table and an official to man it throughout the championships. Protest forms shall be made available to all head coaches.

7.19 Timing: All timing shall be NCAA approved electronic timing and shall be official. There must be a primary

electronic system for timing; an electronic or hand timing back-up system is also recommended. Manual timing shall be used only as a backup. In the event that manual timing is needed during an event, manual timing shall then apply to that entire round in the affected event. When manual timing has to be used, two watches should be used to time first place, and one watch should be used to time each subsequent place. The Conference’s timing company shall provide an infield or finish line clock at the outdoor championship regardless of whether the facility has a scoreboard that can interface with the timing system. (Approved 10/11)

7.20 Numbers: Numbers large enough for identification shall be worn by each competitor. The number shall be

securely pinned on each contestant to allow for plain visibility. 7.21 Equipment: The following equipment and/or arrangements shall be provided by the host institution:

A. Stopwatches; B. Chronomix type timing clock; C. Timing equipment (electronic and manual); D. A large scoreboard for the posting of results; E. An awards stand and presentation area; F. Public address system; G. At least two 32-caliber starting pistol and blanks; H. Copier for results duplication; I. Pits, standards and cross bars for the high jump and pole vault; J. Pins and numbers for competitors; K. Tapes of 100 feet, 250 feet and 300 feet (all tapes shall give metric readings); L. Indicator boards for field events; M. Inspector flags; N. Enough hurdles for all lanes; O. At least nine batons; P. Judges and timers stand; Q. A protest table; R. Starting blocks for each lane; S. Necessary weighing and checking equipment for field events; T. Equipment to raise and lower the pole vault cross bar; U. Stop watches for each head judge in the field events; V. Clip boards (as needed); W. Ladder for pole vault; X. Lap counter.

7.22 Posting of Results: All results shall be posted during the competition in a place where coaches and

student-athletes shall have equal access. Posting shall also include newly drawn up heat sheets and lane assignments.

7.23 Official Measurements: Official field event measurements shall be made in metric, but the meet director

shall require the public address announcer, performance indicators and posted results to be done in English measurements.

173

7.24 Practice Availability: The competition facilities shall be made available for inspection and/or practice for

all institutions on the afternoon prior to the beginning of competition. All facilities shall be open for a minimum of two hours.

8.0 Championships Awards

8.1 Awards Ceremonies: Immediately following the conclusion of each event, an awards ceremony shall be held at the awards presentation area. An awards ceremony will also be held at the conclusion of the meet. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremonies for both the indoor and outdoor championships:

8.1.1 Championship Trophies: Two trophies (one for men and one for women) presented to the head

coach and captains of the winning teams; 8.1.2 Runner-Up Trophies: Two trophies (one for men and one for women) presented to the head coach

and captains of the runner-up teams; 8.1.3 Third Place Finisher Plaques: Plaques shall be presented to each individual or relay team member

finishing in third place in an event;

8.1.4 Second Place Finisher Plaques: Plaques shall be presented to each individual or relay team member finishing in second place in an event;

8.1.5 First Place Finisher Plaques: Plaques shall be presented to each individual or relay team member

finishing in first place in an event;

8.1.6 All-Conference Plaques: First, Second and Third Place plaques shall include an inscription indicating that the recipient has earned All-Conference honors;

8.1.7 Most Outstanding Track Performer Plaques: Two plaques (one for men and one for women) shall

be presented to the person winning the Most Outstanding Track Performer awards. The Most Outstanding Track Performer awards shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championships site. Voting shall take place at a meeting to be held 10 minutes after the competition of the final event. A list of the top 10 performers scoring the most track event pints will be provided to aid in the voting. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

8.1.8 Most Outstanding Field Performer Plaques: Two plaques (one for men and one for women) shall

be presented to the person winning the Most Outstanding Field Performer. The Most Outstanding Field Performer awards shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championships site. Voting shall take place at a meeting to be held 10 minutes after the competition of the final event. A list of the top 10 performers scoring the most field event points will be provided to aid in the voting. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

8.1.9 Most Outstanding Athlete Plaques: Two plaques (one for men and one for women) shall be

presented to the person scoring the most points at the Championships. In Men’s Indoor Track and Field, the Most Outstanding Athlete award is known as the Heath Whittle Award. No voting will take place for this award. (Effective 10/07)

8.1.10 Freshman of the Year Plaques: Two plaques (one for men and one for women) shall be presented

to the person winning the Freshman of the Year awards. The Freshman of the Year awards shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championships site. Voting shall take place at a meeting to be held 10 minutes after the competition of the final event. A list of the top 10 freshman scoring the most points will be provided to aid in the voting. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

8.1.11 Coach of the Year Plaques: One plaque shall be presented to the person winning the Men’s Coach

of the Year award, and one plaque shall be presented to the person winning the Women's Coach of the Year award. The Coach of the Year awards shall be voted on by the head coaches at the championships site. Voting shall take place at a meeting to be held 10 minutes after the completion of the final event. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office.

174

8.1.12 All-Freshman Team: An All-Freshman Team shall be named consisting of the top three freshman

finishers (must have a time or a mark) in each event, whether true freshmen, red shirt or otherwise. (Approved 10/08)

8.2 Other Awards: Other awards presented in conjunction with the Southern Conference Indoor and Outdoor

Track and Field Championships are as follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: In Men’s and Women’s Indoor Track and Field, twenty five (25) individual plaques will be presented to the head coach of the championship teams and twenty-eight (28) individual plaques will be presented to the head coach of the men’s and women’s Outdoor Track and Field championship teams for presentation to the student-athletes of those squads. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion;


9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Hospitality passes for use during the Southern Conference Championships, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Track and Field Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.

9.2 VIP Parking Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Parking passes for use during the Southern

Conference Championships. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Track and Field Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.

9.3 Team Bus Parking Passes: If necessary, each competing team shall be awarded bus passes as needed

for use during the Southern Conference Championships. The bus passes shall be distributed by the meet director and are non-transferable.

175

2013 Volleyball


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor volleyball as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University The Citadel Davidson College Elon University Furman University Georgia Southern University Samford University University of North Carolina at Greensboro University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Western Carolina University Wofford College


2.1 Scheduling: NCAA policies regarding scheduling requirements are the official policies of the Southern Conference. 16-game unbalanced schedule with no divisions for 2013

2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: The conference master schedule will consist of a 16-game

unbalanced schedule with no divisions for 2013. (Effective 6/13) The Southern Conference office shall produce a league master schedule to the start of each season. In 2013, conference playing days will be Friday/Saturday. (Approved 6/12) Teams reserve the right to make changes to the Conference master schedule as long as participating athletics directors are agreeable to the moves and the moves are approved by the conference office. Coaches shall confirm all match dates and times by the third Friday in August via e-mail. (Approved 06-09) Game start times and locations shall be the prerogative of the home institution. The last regular-season Conference match for each team must be completed by the Sunday prior to the Conference tournament. A finalized home schedule must be submitted to the conference office and the coordinator of officials by January 15th prior to each season.

2.1.2 Non-Division I Opponents: Each Southern Conference school may play one NCAA non-

Division I opponent during the regular season. 2.2 Championship Determination: The Southern Conference champion shall be the team that finishes

with the best won-loss percentage in Conference games during the regular season. In the case that two or more schools finish with identical won-loss records, they shall be declared co-champions. (Updated 8/13)


teams into the Southern Conference Tournament. League rank shall be determined by each team’s won-loss record in all Conference matches during the regular season. Ties for seeding purposes shall be broken using the Southern Conference tie-breaking system.


matches. 2.5 Match Format: All Conference matches shall be best of five sets utilizing the rally point system. The

rally point system awards a point on each service that does not involve a play over. Sets 1-4 shall be won when one team scores 25 points and has at least a two-point advantage over its opponent. Set 5

176

shall be won when one team scores 15 points and has at least a two-point advantage over its opponent. There shall be no point cap on any set of a match.

2.6 Official Ball: The “official” volleyball as designated by the Conference shall be used during regular-

season Southern Conference matches, unless a school has an independent agreement with another ball manufacturer for its home games. The official ball for the 2013 season is the Molten IV58 L-N Super Touch blue/silver/white leather volleyball.

2.7 Official Scorer: The home team shall provide an official scorer for all Southern Conference matches.

The visiting team may provide a scorer for the purpose of improving the accuracy of data collection during a match. The home team scorer shall always be designated the official book.


both teams and compiling an official NCAA box score. The home institution must send a completed final NCAA box score via e-mail to the Southern Conference office on the same day that a Southern Conference match is completed. The visiting head coach should receive a copy of the official NCAA box score after the conclusion of each set during a Conference match.


Southern Conference teams with non-conference or other Conference schools. 2.10 Uniforms: For all Conference games, the home team shall normally wear light colored uniforms and

the visiting team shall wear uniforms of contrasting color. If a team is playing back-to-back conference matches on the road before returning home, then it shall wear dark colored uniforms for the first match and light colored uniforms for the second match. The home team would then wear dark colored uniforms for the visiting team’s second match. It is required that all conference schools place a Southern Conference logo on their game uniforms. The recommended placement is on the left or right side of the chest, facing front.

2.11 Complimentary Tickets: The home team shall provide the visiting team with 50 complimentary tickets

for each Conference match, provided that the home team is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival. In accordance with Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations, a buffer section of visiting team seats or empty space must be provided in the area immediately behind the visiting team bench as it may be appropriate for each particular venue. The 50 complimentary tickets for the visiting team must be located within the buffer zone area. (Revised 5/13)



2.13 Pre-Match Format: The competition area (court) shall be available at least one hour prior to a match

to allow for warm-ups. All matches will begin at a time determined by the host institution. The home team shall be responsible for supplying at least 20 “official” (Molten IV58 L-N Super Touch blue/silver/white leather volleyball) balls for both teams to use during warm-ups. All balls should be of competition quality. The same amount of warm-up time must be made available to both teams. Ball shaggers should be reminded to extend the same courtesies to the visiting team as they do for the home team during warm-ups. The host institution shall provide the visiting head coach with a pre-match protocol and/or time line upon the visiting team’s arrival on site. The NCAA pre-match protocol is required for all Conference matches.

2.14 Substitutions: A maximum of 15 substitutions per set shall be allowed for both teams during

Southern Conference matches. 2.15 Ball Rotational System: A three-ball rotational system shall be used during Southern Conference

matches. 2.16 Set Intervals: Intervals in play during Conference matches shall be three minutes between all sets,

except that a 10-minute break shall occur between games two and three consisting of seven minutes

177

of break and three minutes of warm-up. Timeouts in all conference matches will be 75 seconds in length. (Approved 6/12)

2.17 Video Exchange Policies: Each Southern Conference institution shall exchange conference game

films via the conference’s internet video exchange program. All conference and non-conference matches will be available on an open exchange basis to all conference members and the conference office. All game film should include each match in a continuous fashion (i.e., no breaks between points), should be filmed from an end zone location (elevated 6’ to 20’) and should include sound. All video should be uploaded in DVD format to provide optimal conversion possibilities. Footage shot for video streaming does not qualify as appropriate DragonFly video. All lockers should contain the date of the game and the name both institutions, in that order. Score sheets, box scores and a libero tracking sheet should be uploaded along with the video to DragonFly. The uploading of this additional content should follow the same deadlines as the video. (Approved and Effective 07/09; Revised 6/12).

2.17.1 Uploading Deadlines: For Conference matches, game files of weekend matches must be

uploaded by both teams by noon (ET) of the following Monday for home teams and by 5:00 p.m. ET the following Monday for the visiting team. The uploading of these weekend Conference matches shall not take place between Friday at 4:00 p.m. ET until Sunday at 4:00 p.m. ET. This lockout of uploads will currently be handled by the head coaches until the Conference electronic tape exchange system has the ability to isolate the blocking of uploads with the allowance of downloading to still take place. Game files of mid-week matches must be uploaded by both teams by noon (ET) of the following day. For NON-conference weekend matches, game films must be uploaded by noon ET of the following Tuesday. NON-conference mid-week matches must be uploaded by noon ET of the following day. (Approved and Effective 07/09; Revised 6/12)

2.18 Practice Times: Three days before each Conference match, the home team will provide the visiting

team with an available practice time, provided that the visiting team will be arriving on site the day before the scheduled match. If there should be changes necessitated by the availability of facilities that is beyond the control of the host institution, revision to the stated time would be acceptable. It is to be understood that times cannot be changed for the mere convenience of the home team. On match days, practice sessions should be made available to both competing teams if possible. The home team shall be granted the first available practice session and the visiting team the second available practice session. Each of these practice sessions shall be equal in terms of time allowed.

3.0 Volleyball Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Volleyball Committee shall consist of at least one athletics director, one faculty athletics representative, one senior woman administrator, and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties: 3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for volleyball; 3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association

and Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant; 3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting volleyball in the

Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of volleyball in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year to address all matters relating to the sport of volleyball and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Volleyball Committee. This meeting shall normally take place in the months of either January or February.

5.0 Officiating

178

5.1 Coordinator of Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Volleyball Officials, under the direction of the Southern Conference Volleyball Committee, the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Officials Committee, and the Southern Conference Commissioner, shall establish a pool of officials for all Conference matches and assign all volleyball officials.

5.2 Officials’ Assignments: Two officials shall be assigned to each Conference match. Officials assigned

to conference matches may be national, junior national, regional or state rated officials. 5.2.1 Officials’ Fees: Officials shall be paid a flat fee of $255 per official per match. (Approved and

Effective10/12)

5.3 Evaluations: Coaches shall have the opportunity to evaluate officials working Conference matches through the conference’s officiating website (www.arbitersports.com/southern). Evaluations should be completed by the head coach via the website on the first working day following a Conference match.

5.4 Officials’ Uniforms: Officials’ uniforms for all Southern Conference matches shall be a white shirt with

a collar, navy slacks and white tennis shoes. 5.5 Line Judges: The home team is required to secure a minimum of two competent line judges to work

Conference matches. Line judges should arrive on site at least 30 minutes prior to match time in order to meet with the officials. Line judges should be dressed in appropriate and neutral attire (i.e., navy slacks or shorts, white shirt with collar, white tennis shoes). It is not acceptable for the home team to switch line judges during a match.


6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve as the match management director for all Southern Conference matches. It is suggested that the match management director visit briefly with the officials and the visiting head coach prior to the match to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability. The home athletics director and/or match management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations.


by the home team: A. Bench: One 10-gallon cooler of water, one ice chest with ice and bags, two sleeves of

cups, bench towels, one biohazard box. B. Dressing Room: A dressing room with showers if requested in advance. Shower

towels as needed if requested in advance.





8.2 Cheerleader Restrictions: Megaphones may never be turned toward the playing court. Amplified


8.3 Pep Band Restrictions: Bands are allowed to play only during pre-match, between sets, post match

and during timeouts.

179


8.5 Travel Restrictions: Cheerleading squads, pep bands and dance teams may travel during volleyball

season only on weekends.

9.0 Conduct



immediately suspended from their team’s next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-match suspension, a third ejection a four-match suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-match suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-match suspension.















10.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy, presented to the team with the best won-loss percentage

in conference matches. In case of a tie, all tied teams shall receive a trophy. 10.1.2 All-Conference Team: Fourteen plaques presented to the members of the All-Conference

Team (seven first-team members and seven second-team members). The All-Conference Team shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches would nominate players in order of coaches’ preference and ranked by number (#1 being the best). This ranking would be shown on the ballots for postseason award voting. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own players; (Approved 06/09; Revised 6/10)

180

10.1.3 Player of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Player of the Year. The Player of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;

10.1.4 Libero of the Year: One plaque presented to the player voted Libero of the Year. The Libero of

the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player. A student-athlete must have competed as a libero in 50 percent of her team’s matches to be considered for the Libero of the Year award;

10.1.5 Freshman of the Year (Rayna Matea Taylor Award): One plaque presented to the player

voted Freshman of the Year. The Freshman of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own player;




Week during the regular season. The Players of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office. Certificates shall be presented to student-athletes named Offensive, Defensive and Freshman Player of the Week during the regular season. The Players of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office. (Approved 6/10)

10.1.8 Players of the Month: A Player of the Month award shall be selected at the end of each

month during the regular season. The Player of the Month shall be selected by the Conference office.

10.1.9 All-Freshman Team: Seven All-Freshman Team members shall be named consisting of

freshmen, red shirt or otherwise. Balloting will be done as it is for All-Conference voting. (Effective 5/08)




1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a single-elimination Conference tournament shall be conducted to determine the Southern Conference Tournament champion and the recipient of the league’s automatic bid to participate in the NCAA Tournament. Normally, the top four teams in each division in the Conference that are eligible to compete will participate in the Conference tournament (effective 5/08). The tournament will be conducted over three days.


2.1 The Southern Conference Tournament will be conducted prior to the NCAA Tournament on the dates recommended by the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association and Athletics Directors Association. The dates for the 2013 Conference Tournament shall be November 22-24.


181

3.1 Bid Process: The location of the tournament shall be determined by a bid process conducted by the Volleyball Committee. All bids shall be reviewed and voted on by the Senior Woman Administrators Association and Athletics Directors Association.

3.1.1 2013 Tournament Location: The site of the 2013 Southern Conference Tournament shall be

Timmons Arena on the campus of Furman University in Greenville, S.C. 3.1.2 Future Tournament Locations: The location for the 2014 Championship Tournament will be

Fleming Gymnasium on the campus of UNCG. The tentative date will be November 22-24.


4.1 Tournament Bracket and Match Times: The tournament bracket and tournament match times shall be set by the Southern Conference Volleyball Committee. Matches may not start before announced times.


5.1 Volleyball Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Volleyball Committee shall provide general oversight of the tournament. The Volleyball Committee shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.


Volleyball Committee members on site, the athletics director of the host institution or his or her designee, the Southern Conference championships administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), the tournament director, and the head official as designated by the Coordinator of Volleyball Officials. The Games Committee shall:




5.3 Tournament Director: The host institution for the tournament shall appoint a tournament director, who will work with the Assistant Commissioner for Championships, and shall perform the following functions under the direction of the Volleyball Committee:

A. Serve as supervisor of the tournament; B. Plan and coordinate all activities of the tournament in conjunction with the Southern Conference

Volleyball Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant tournament information to all coaches, athletics directors, senior woman

administrators, chief executive officers, faculty representatives and other necessary personnel of competing institutions;

D. Coordinate and supervise the activities of the officials; E. Oversee servicing the needs of the participants and spectators as prescribed in the tournament

manual; F. Delegate duties and responsibilities to tournament personnel; G. Secure a certified trainer and other medical personnel for the tournament.


perform the following duties: A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the activities of the stats crew and make sure that statistics are made available to all

media and teams after each set; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the tournament; E. Be responsible for all-tournament balloting; F. Provide seating charts for the media on each day of the tournament; G. Coordinate the installation of phone lines as necessary for radio, television and print media on

press row and in other media working areas;

182

H. Make sure that all teams and electronic media are provided with pre-game itineraries and/or time lines at least one hour prior to each match;

I. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site.


A. That a certified athletics trainer is present for all practices and at all matches; B. That a general practice or orthopedic physician is on call for all matches; C. That an EMS unit is on call during all matches; D. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; E. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all tournament events; F. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all head


5.6 Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Volleyball Officials, working in conjunction with the Southern Conference Assistant Commissioner for Championships and the Volleyball Committee, shall contract all officials to work the tournament and shall:

A. Assign a pool of officials to work the tournament and make individual match assignments. The pool of officials should include officials recommended by the head coaches whenever possible. Coaches’ recommendations will be solicited during the annual meeting of the head coaches. Head coaches do not possess scratch power when it comes to the assigning of any official;

B. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with officials; C. Conduct pre-game and post-game meetings as necessary with scorer’s table personnel.


A. Stats crew; B. Public address announcer; C. Official scorer; D. Clock, scoreboard and matrix board operators; E. Ball persons (at least two for each match); F. Dressing room attendants; G. In addition, Southern Conference Volleyball Committee members (excluding the head coach

representative), may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the event.

5.8 Promotions Director: The tournament director shall appoint a promotions director, who shall ensure

that a marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness and ticket sales to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the tournament is being played in.


6.1 The Southern Conference staff liaison shall send a tournament manual to all conference chief executive officers, faculty athletics representatives, athletics directors, senior woman administrators, head coaches and sports information directors at least one month prior to the tournament. The following information shall be contained in the manual:



183

7.1 Seeding: The seeds for the tournament shall be determined based on each team’s regular-season Conference finish within its division. Seeds shall be cross-matched for bracketing purposes (i.e.: the #1 seed from the North plays the #4 seed from the South in a first round match; the #1 seed from the South plays the #4 seed from the North, etc.). In the event of a tie for a particular seed, the seed will be determined as follows (Effective 5/08):

(Two Teams within division)

1. Highest winning percentage in head-to-head play. 2. Highest winning percentage in matches played within the division. 3. Highest winning percentage in matches against common teams from the

opposite division played an equal number of times. 4. Highest percentage of sets won in head-to-head play. 5. Highest percentage of sets won within the division.

(Three teams within division) 1. Highest winning percentage in matches played among the three teams. 2. Highest winning percentage in matches played within the division. 3. Highest winning percentage in matches against common teams from the

opposite division played an equal number of times. 4. Highest percentage of sets won in matches played among the three teams. 5. Highest percentage of sets won within the division.

7.2. Ticket Prices: Prices for the 2013 Southern Conference Tournament shall be established by the host

institution and approved by the Volleyball Committee


7.3 Match Balls: The “official” ball (Molten IV58 L-N Super Touch blue/silver/white leather volleyball) as

adopted by the Southern Conference shall be used during all tournament matches. The Conference office shall be responsible for ordering a minimum of one dozen new balls for use during the tournament. Six balls shall be available for each team to use during warm-ups.


rules adopted for NCAA Division I Volleyball and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations.


uniforms. The visiting team shall wear road or dark colored uniforms. All competitors must wear exclusively the official uniform of their institution in competition, warm-up and during the post-tournament awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institution’s official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributor’s normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.



7.7 Head Coaches Meeting: A Southern Conference head coaches meeting will be conducted by

conference call on the Tuesday prior to the start of tournament competition. The chair of the Volleyball Committee will conduct the conference call and review information pertinent to the tournament. The head coach of each institution is required to participate on this call. Head coaches who do not participate are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Volleyball Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.

7.8 Pre-Match Format: Pre-match format shall adhere to NCAA Tournament policies for single or double

match protocol. The following items address the issue of pre-match format:

184

A. Teams involved in the first match of each session shall have access to the tournament court one hour prior to the start of their match; Teams involved in the second match of each session may begin warm-up on a secondary court one hour prior to their scheduled start time. These teams will be allowed a minimum of 30 minutes of warm-up on the main court regardless of when the first match finishes.

B. The official time line and pre-match clock countdown shall begin one hour prior to match time for the first match of each session and a minimum of 30 minutes prior to match time for the second match of each session;

C. A national anthem shall be played prior to the first match of each session.

7.8.1 Player Introductions: Pre-match player introductions shall adhere to NCAA Tournament procedures:

A. Teams stand at their benches for the national anthem (if applicable); B. Players proceed from team bench to end line as their names are announced. The visiting team

non-starters, then starters, then coaches will be introduced first; followed by the home team in the same order;

C. The referee shall whistle for the captains and remaining starters to go to center court and shake hands. Play will then begin.


uniform and 24 institutional representatives. Team benches will be set for 16 individuals. A student-athlete will need a valid participant credential to enter the tournament venue. Coaches, trainers, managers and student-athletes not in uniform will need to display a visible participant credential to be allowed on the team bench during a match. (Amended by NCAA 6/12)


as possible available to competing teams during the Southern Conference Tournament. Each participating team shall be ensured a one-hour practice time on the competition court on the day prior to the tournament. All pre-tournament practices shall be arranged by the Conference office based upon the distance needed to travel to the site of the championship, rather than tournament seeds. (Approved 1-09). All practices needed on the championship court during the championship will be assigned based upon their regular-season finish (i.e., higher seeded teams will have first choice of practice times).

7.11 Set Intervals: All breaks between sets shall be three minutes in length, except the break between sets

two and three shall be 10 minutes in length. The 10-minute break shall consist of seven minutes of break and three minutes of warm-up. The clock counting down the time between changeovers shall begin when both teams have left the court or gathered in the bench area, or as instructed by the head official or Conference television coordinator.


following each match after a 10-minute cooling off period has been observed.

7.12.1 Cooling Off Period: The cooling off period will begin when all coaches and players have entered the dressing room following a match. The cooling off period will not be extended to allow coaches or players to do interviews with a broadcasting television network. In the event that these interviews take place, the cooling off period will begin when the majority of a team’s players and coaches have entered the dressing room.

7.12.2 Dressing Rooms: The dressing rooms of teams competing in the Southern Conference

Tournament will be considered closed unless a media member states a desire to enter the dressing room area prior to the conclusion of a match. This request must be made to the tournament media coordinator or the sports information director of the participating team.

7.13 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Volleyball Rules. 7.14 Bench Assignments: The higher seeded team shall start each match by occupying the bench to the

right-hand side of the official scorer.


185

8.1 Awards Ceremony: Immediately following the conclusion of the championship match, a tournament awards ceremony shall be held near mid-court. The head coach and student-athletes of the winning team shall remain on the court for the awards ceremony. The head coach and student-athletes of the losing team shall have the option of immediately exiting the court following the match or remaining for the awards ceremony. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the awards ceremony:



team. 8.1.3 All-Tournament Team: Seven plaques presented to members of the All-Tournament Team. The

All-Tournament Team shall be selected by the coaches in a format that will allow one student-athlete from each losing semi-final round team to be named to the All-Tournament team, two from the losing final team and three from the winning championship team for a total of seven. The Most Outstanding Player will be one of the seven and selected by the winning coach. The balloting shall be conducted by the tournament media coordinator. (Effective 5/08)


Outstanding Player of the tournament. The Most Outstanding Player shall be one of the seven members of the All-Tournament Team and selected by the winning coach (Effective 5/08). The balloting shall be conducted by the tournament media coordinator.

8.1.5 NCAA Automatic Bid: One certificate presented to the athletics director or senior woman

administrator of the winning school, signifying their institution’s automatic bid to the NCAA Tournament.


as follows:

8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Fifteen (15) individual plaques will be presented to the head coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the championship team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.


9.1 VIP Hospitality Passes: Each member institution shall receive VIP Hospitality passes for use during the Southern Conference Tournament, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Volleyball Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.


Southern Conference Tournament. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Volleyball Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director or senior woman administrator.



187

2013-14 Wrestling


1.1 The following member institutions sponsor wrestling as a varsity intercollegiate sport: Appalachian State University The Citadel Davidson College University of Tennessee at Chattanooga Campbell University (associate member) Gardner-Webb University (associate member) Southern Illinois University-Edwardsville (associate member) Virginia Military Institute (associate member)



2.1.1 Conference Scheduling: Each school shall have a dual match against all members of the

Conference once during the regular season. Conference matches shall be scheduled on dates and times as agreed upon by the competing head coaches. A dual match between Conference schools may take place as part of a dual tournament. Each school must designate the dates of its Conference matches to the Conference office prior to the start of the season. Match locations shall be the prerogative of the home institution.


with the best won-loss percentage in Conference matches during the regular season. In the case that two or more schools finish with identical won-loss records, they shall be declared co-champions.

2.3 Wrestling Rules: Wrestling rules as adopted by the NCAA shall be in effect for all Southern

Conference matches.

2.4 Match Format: All Conference matches shall be divided into 10 weight classes (125 pounds, 133 pounds, 141 pounds, 149 pounds, 157 pounds, 165 pounds, 174 pounds, 184 pounds, 197 pounds, 285 pounds). All matches shall be seven minutes long, divided into three periods, with the first period lasting three minutes and the second and third periods lasting two minutes. In all Conference matches, the head coaches can mutually agree as to which weight class will be wrestled first. If there is not mutual agreement, a random drawing to determine which weight class will be wrestled first shall be conducted after the weigh-in and before the first match begins. Once the first weight class is established, subsequent matches will continue in the traditional sequence.

2.5 Official Scorers/Clock Keepers: The home team shall provide official scorers and clock keepers for

all Southern Conference matches and shall be responsible for the payment of these people. 2.6 NCAA Box Score: The home team shall be responsible for recording NCAA statistical information for

both teams and compiling an official results sheet for each Conference match. The home institution must send a completed results sheet to the Southern Conference office via fax or e-mail on the same day that a Conference match is completed. The visiting head coach should also receive a copy of the results sheet prior to the visiting team’s departure from the match site.


Conference teams with non-conference or other Conference schools.

188

2.8 Complimentary Tickets: The home team shall provide the visiting team with 50 complimentary tickets for each Conference match, provided that the home team is charging admission. The 50 complimentary tickets should be provided from a pass list given to the home institution by the visiting institution upon its arrival. In accordance with Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations, a buffer section of visiting team seats or empty space must be provided in the area immediately behind the visiting team bench as it may be appropriate for each particular venue. The 50 complimentary tickets for the visiting team must be located within the buffer zone area. (Revised 5/13)


prior to the season. A completed squad list must be transmitted to the Conference office prior to a school’s first day of competition. This information shall be filed and in accordance with the instructions of the Southern Conference Associate Commissioner for Compliance. If any questions arise, the Conference compliance administrator shall have the details on all student-athletes who are eligible for Conference regular-season and tournament competition.

2.10 Pre-Match Weigh-Ins: Southern Conference institutions shall follow NCAA Pre-Match Weigh-In

procedures at all times during the regular season.

2.10.1 Dual, Triangular and Quadrangular Meets: Contestants shall weigh-in one hour or less before the first match begins, on digital scales provided by the host institution or organization. Teams failing to comply with weigh-in rules shall forfeit the competition. When a team is wrestling multiple dual meets at home or at different sites on the same day, weigh-ins for all teams involved shall be held one hour before the start of the first scheduled contest. The team(s) at subsequent site(s) shall conduct an honor weigh-in at the same time at their site. No team shall weigh-in more than once a day. At the scheduled time for weigh-ins, all student-athletes who wish to compete must present themselves at the scales. During the weigh-in period contestants may not leave the weigh-in area and activities that promote dehydration are prohibited. Weigh-ins shall proceed through the weight classes beginning at the lowest weight class. When all wrestlers for a weight class have had an opportunity to weigh in and the next class is called, that weight class is closed. Upon completion of the heavyweight class, weigh-ins are concluded. No additional time shall be granted. A contestant may step on and off the scale three times to allow for mechanical inconsistencies in the scale.

2.10. 2 Tournaments: Weigh-ins will be held two hours or less before the first matches begin on the

first day and one hour or less before the first matches begin on subsequent days. Weigh-ins for a one-day individual or team advancement tournament shall be held two hours or less before the scheduled start of wrestling. At this time, weigh-ins are concluded. At the scheduled time for weigh-ins, all activities that promote dehydration must cease and all student-athletes who wish to compete must present themselves at the scales. The weigh-in shall proceed through the weight classes beginning at the lowest weight class. If a contestant fails to make weight on one of the designated digital scales, the contestant may step on each available official digital scale one time in an attempt to make weight immediately following the heavyweight class. The contestant shall not leave the weigh-in area during this time.

2.11 Weight Certification: Southern Conference institutions shall follow NCAA Weight Certification

procedures at all times during the regular season.

2.12 Hypohydration: Hypohydration poses a health hazard to wrestlers. With regard to the practice of dehydration, the use of laxatives, emetics, excessive food and fluid restriction, self-induced vomiting, hot rooms, hot boxes, saunas and steam rooms is prohibited during the course of a season. Also, the use of diuretics at any time is prohibited. Regardless of the purpose, the use of vapor-impermeable suits (e.g., rubber or rubberized nylon) or any similar devices used solely for dehydration are prohibited. Artificial means of rehydration (i.e., intravenous hydration) are also prohibited.

3.0 Wrestling Committee

3.1 The Southern Conference Wrestling Committee shall consist at least of one athletics director, one faculty athletic representative, one senior woman administrator and one head coach. The sport committee shall perform the following duties:

3.1.1 Review the sport regulations for wrestling;

189

3.1.2 Make recommendations to the Southern Conference Senior Woman Administrators Association and Athletics Directors Association as situations warrant;

3.1.3 Ensure that coaches are informed about league rules and matters affecting wrestling in the

Southern Conference; 3.1.4 Conduct surveys, etc.; and 3.1.5 Administer, in general, the sport of wrestling in the Southern Conference.


4.1 Southern Conference head coaches shall meet once a year to address all matters relating to the sport of wrestling and to make recommendations to the Southern Conference Wrestling Committee. This meeting shall normally take place in the month of September.

5.0 Officiating

5.1 Coordinator of Officials: The Southern Conference Coordinator of Wrestling Officials, under the direction of the Southern Conference Wrestling Committee, the Southern Conference Men’s and Women’s Officials Committee, and the Southern Conference Commissioner, shall establish a pool of officials for all regular season Conference matches and assign all wrestling officials.

5.2 Officials’ Assignments: One official shall be assigned to each Conference match. It is required that

the official be a member of the designated pool of Southern Conference officials.

5.3 Officials Fees: An official assigned to a Conference match shall be paid flat fee of $325 per match. (Approved 7/11)

5.4 Evaluation Forms: Coaches shall have access to evaluation forms for officials working Conference

matches via the NCWA website. Evaluation forms should be sent via electronic mail by the head coach to the Coordinator of Wrestling Officials within 48 hours following a Conference match.


6.1 The home athletics director (or his or her designee) shall serve, along with the conference Assistant Commissioner for Championships, as the match management director for all Southern Conference matches. It is suggested that the match management director visit briefly with the official and the visiting head coach prior to the match to answer any questions and inform them of his or her availability. The home athletics director and/or match management director also has the direct responsibility for crowd control as outlined in the Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations. 6.1.1 Artificial Noisemakers: Artificial noisemakers, air horns and electronic amplifiers (other than

the designated public address system) are not permissible at Southern Conference wrestling venues. Such instruments shall be removed from the facility when discovered inside.

6.1.2 Signs: Signs of a derogatory nature directed towards an individual opponent, visiting team or

match official are not permitted in Southern Conference venues. It is the responsibility of the home institution to see that any such signs are immediately removed.

6.1.3 Medical Personnel On Site: It is recommended that the host institution have a medical doctor

available at the site of each Conference match throughout the duration of competition. 6.1.4 Game Management Provisions: The following provisions shall be provided to the visiting team

by the home team:

1. Bench: One 10-gallon cooler of water, one ice chest with ice and bags, two sleeves of cups, bench towels, one biohazard box.

2. Dressing Room: A dressing room with showers if requested in advance. Shower towels as needed if requested in advance.

190


7.1 Only the designated public address announcer may use a microphone during a Southern Conference match. The public address announcer is responsible for whatever is said over the PA system. The primary function of the announcer is to give specific information to the fans, not to incite them by unnecessary inflection of voice beyond the pre-match introduction of the home wrestlers.



8.2 Cheerleader Restrictions: Megaphones may never be turned toward the mat area. Amplified


8.3 Pep Band Restrictions: Bands are allowed to play only during pre-match, between matches, post

match and during timeouts.


8.5 Travel Restrictions: Cheerleading squads, pep bands and dance teams may travel during wrestling

season only on weekends. 9.0 Conduct

9.1 Coaches’ Conduct: All head and assistant coaches are to conduct themselves in such a manner during a match as to ensure or promote good crowd control. They also are responsible for the conduct of their student-athletes and other staff members. Coaches (head and assistant) must follow Southern Conference Sportsmanship Code Regulations at all times.


immediately suspended from their team’s next contest. A second ejection of a coach or player shall carry a two-match suspension, a third ejection a four-match suspension, a fourth ejection an eight-match suspension, etc. Ejections are recorded over a participant’s career, except that a participant who completes one calendar year without an additional ejection shall have their record cleared and return to a one-match suspension.









191

9.3.5 Vicinity of Contest: The immediate area/site of the competition extended to include any point or place from which the ejected/suspended individual could observe, supervise, or participate in any manner in the contest from which the participant is being ejected or suspended.





10.1.1 Championship Trophy: One trophy, presented to the team with the best won-loss percentage

in conference matches. In case of a tie, all tied teams shall receive trophies; 10.1.2 All-Conference Team: Ten plaques presented to the members of the All-Conference Team.

The All-Conference Team shall consist of one member from each of the ten weight classes and be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own wrestlers:

10.1.3 Wrestler of the Year: One plaque presented to the student-athlete voted Wrestler of the Year.

The Wrestler of the Year award shall be voted on by the head coaches and the balloting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own wrestlers;

10.1.4 Wrestlers of the Week: Eight certificates presented to student-athletes named Wrestler of the

Week during the regular season. The Wrestler of the Week shall be selected by the Conference office;

10.1.5 Wrestler of the Month: A Wrestler of the Month shall be awarded at the end of each month

during the regular season. The Wrestler of the Month award shall be selected by the Conference office;

10.1.6 All-Freshman Team: An All-Freshman team shall be named consisting of 10 freshman, true

freshman, red shirt or otherwise. The members will be selected without regard to weight class. The freshman receiving the highest number of votes will be named as the Freshman of the Year. Balloting will be done as it is for All-Conference voting. (Effective 10/09)




1.1 At the conclusion of the regular season, a Conference tournament shall be conducted to determine the Southern Conference Tournament champion and the recipient of the league’s individual automatic bids to participate in the NCAA Tournament. As many teams that are eligible to compete will participate in the Conference tournament. The tournament will be conducted over one day.

2.0 Tournament Dates. The Southern Conference Tournament will be conducted prior to the NCAA

Tournament on the dates recommended by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association. The date of the 2014 Southern Conference tournament is March 8.


192

3.1 Bid Process: The location of the tournament shall be determined by the Southern Conference Athletics Directors Association. Information pertaining to possible tournament locations shall be reviewed first by the Southern Conference Wrestling Committee and Senior Woman Administrators Association.

3.1.1 2014 Tournament Location: The site of the 2014 Southern Conference Tournament shall be on

the campus of Campbell University in Buies Creek, N.C. 3.1.2 Future Tournament Locations: Sites of future Southern Conference Tournaments will be as follows and will continue in this rotation in future years pending change in Southern Conference institutions. (Approved 10/11) 2015 – The Citadel 2016 – Davidson 2017 – Gardner-Webb 2018 – SIUE

2019 – ASU 2020 – UTC 2021 – VMI


4.1 Match Times: All tournament match times shall be set by the Southern Conference Wrestling Committee. Matches may not start before announced times.

4.1.1 Tournament Schedule: The schedule for the Southern Conference Wrestling Tournament will

be established by the host institution and approved by the Wrestling Committee. 4.1.2 Finals Schedule: A meeting of all head coaches will take place prior to the start of the finals to

determine the wrestling order of the finals for the sole purpose of alleviating any extended intermission(s) between championship matches and potential true place matches. This will take place by majority vote. (Approved 10/12)


5.1 Wrestling Committee Involvement: The Southern Conference Wrestling Committee shall provide general oversight of the tournament. The Wrestling Committee shall have the authority to discipline and/or fine any member institution that does not abide by Conference regulations.


Wrestling Committee members on site, the athletics director of the host institution or his or her designee, the Southern Conference championships administrator on site (who shall serve as chair of the committee), the tournament director, and the head official as designated by the Coordinator of Wrestling Officials. The Games Committee shall:



C. Inspect the competition facilities prior to the start of the event.

5.3 Tournament Director: The host institution or agency for the tournament shall appoint a tournament director, who along with the Assistant Commissioner for Championships shall perform the following functions under the direction of the Wrestling Committee:


Conference Wrestling Committee and local organizing committee(s); C. Provide relevant tournament information to all coaches, athletics directors, chief executive

officers, faculty representatives, senior woman administrators and other necessary personnel of competing institutions;


tournament manual; F. Delegate duties and responsibilities to tournament personnel;

188

G. Secure a certified trainer and other medical personnel for the tournament.

5.4 Media Coordinator: The tournament director shall appoint a tournament media coordinator, who shall perform the following duties:

A. Coordinate and administer all media working areas and media hospitality areas; B. Process all media requests for working credentials; C. Coordinate the activities of the stats crew and make sure that results are made available to

all media and teams in a timely fashion; D. Write and distribute all releases as necessary prior to and during the tournament; E. Be responsible for post-tournament awards balloting; F. Provide working seats for the media on each day of the tournament; G. Coordinate the installation of phone lines as necessary for media members; H. Fulfill the needs of Conference sports information directors not on site.


director, who shall ensure that the following occurs: A. That a certified athletics trainer is available for skin checks and present at all matches; B. That a dermatologist is available for skin checks and on call during all matches; C. That a general practitioner or orthopedic physician is on site at all matches; D. That an EMS unit is on site during all matches; E. That there is planned and pre-arranged access to medical facilities; F. That training facilities and training supplies are available for all tournament events; G. That information concerning medical and training accommodations is distributed to all head


5.6 Officials: The Southern Conference staff liaison working in conjunction with the Wrestling Committee and head coaches, shall contract all officials to work the tournament and shall:

A. Assign a pool of officials to work the tournament. The pool of officials should include officials recommended by the head coaches whenever possible. Coaches’ recommendations will be solicited during the annual meeting of the head coaches in September and during the annual Southern Scuffle Tournament hosted by the University of North Carolina at Greensboro. Head coaches do not possess scratch power when it comes to the assigning of any official;

B. Conduct pre-tournament meetings as necessary with officials; C. Conduct pre-tournament meetings as necessary with scorer’s table personnel.


tournament director and/or tournament media coordinator: A. Public address announcer; B. Official scorer; C. Clock, scoreboard and matrix board operators; D. Mat attendants (at least one for each match); E. In addition, Southern Conference Wrestling Committee members (excluding the head coach

representative), may be assigned specific duties as necessary to ensure the orderly operation of the event.

5.8 Promotions Director: The tournament director shall appoint a promotions director, who shall ensure

that a marketing and promotions plan is created to promote awareness and ticket sales to fans of member institutions and their local communities, as well as the local community that the tournament is being staged in.



A. Facilities information; B. Telephone numbers and addresses of key tournament personnel; C. Local maps; D. Dates, times and location of the tournament and related activities; E. Information on team and institutional credentials and parking passes;

189

F. A tournament itinerary; G. Medical and training information; H. Media information; I. Information on hospitality and social functions; J. Names and responsibilities of Local Organizing Committee personnel; K. Names and responsibilities of host institution personnel; L. A tournament emergency plan and emergency telephone numbers.


7.1 Seeding: Head coaches shall submit their team entry forms (designating their 10 wrestlers in each weight class) to the Conference office prior to Noon ET on the Monday prior to the championship. The Conference office will then distribute a ballot with those names to the head coaches. The head coaches will then rank each weight class prior to 5:00 PM ET on the Tuesday prior to the championship. Based on the cumulative ranking of each weight class a point total will be assigned to each wrestler. The highest point total in each weight class will be seeded (1), the second highest point total will be seeded (2) and so on for all six wrestlers at each weight class. If there are ties in point totals the criteria in 7.1.1 or 7.1.2 below will be used to break the tie. (Approved and Effective 10/10)

7.1.1 Tiebreaker:

A. Head to head record during regular season Conference duals at that weight class will be used

to determine the higher seed; B. If the two wrestlers failed to meet in a regular season Conference dual than any head-to-head

meeting at that weight class during the current regular season shall determine the higher seed unless the wrestlers have met 3 or more times;

C. If the two wrestlers failed to meet during the current regular season, or were tied when doing so OR met 3 or more times, then the record (net differential) vs. all common opponents during the current regular season (regardless of weight class) shall determine the higher seed. You may not use the same opponent for more than 1 net win or 1 net loss (i.e. if Wrestler A is 2-0 and Wrestler B is 1-0 against a common opponent – they are still tied because you cannot use the same opponent for more than 1 net win);

D. If the wrestlers have a tie in net differential or they have no common opponents during the current regular season, the highest seed will be determined by the wrestler who has the highest top 33 ranking in the final NCAA/NWCA Coaches Poll. If there is still a tie or neither wrestler is ranked proceed down the line;

E. Win over a returning All-American; F. Most wins over Top 12 wrestlers in the final NCAA/NWCA Coaches Poll; G. Most wins over Top 20 wrestlers in the final NCAA/NWCA Coaches Poll; H. Most wins over Top 33 wrestlers in the final NCAA/NWCA Coaches Poll; I. The wrestler that has qualified at that weight class for an automatic bid to the upcoming

NCAA championship; J. If the wrestlers are still tied a vote of all of the coaches will take place via conference call or

email prior to the championship; K. In the case of a tie in coaches voting the seed will be determined by total number of Division I

wins during the current regular season. You may not use the same Division I opponent for more than 1 win;

L. If the wrestlers have the same total number of Division I wins then the higher seed will be the wrestler with the fewest total Division I losses during the current regular season. You may not use the same Division I opponent for more than 1 loss.

7.1.2 Three-Way Tie:

A. In the event of a three-way tie for seed, the best record (net differential) vs. all overall common opponents during the current regular season shall determine the highest seed of the three. You may not use the same opponent for more than 1 net win or 1 net loss;

B. In the event that the best record (net differential) vs. all overall common opponents during the current regular season fails to break the three-way tie, proceed to criteria 7.1.1 D to determine the higher seed of the three;

C. Once the higher seed of the three is established, the remaining two seeds will be determined by head to head record during the current regular season (including both conference duals and other meets);

190

D. If no head to head match exists between the remaining two seeds, the tie will be broken by the best record (net differential) vs. all overall common opponents during the current regular season regardless of weight class. You may not use the same opponent for more than 1 net win or 1 net loss. If there is still a tie between the remaining two seeds, the tie will be broken by proceeding to 7.1.1 D above.

7.2. Ticket Prices: Ticket prices for the 2014 Southern Conference Tournament shall be set by the host

institution and approved by the Southern Conference Wrestling Committee.


7.3 Wrestling Rules: The wrestling rules for the Southern Conference Tournament shall conform to those

rules adopted for NCAA Division I Wrestling and the Southern Conference as stated in the Southern Conference Tournament Manual and these sport regulations.

7.4 Uniforms: All competitors must wear an official uniform similar in design and identical in color of their

institution in competition, warm-up and during the post-tournament awards ceremony. In accordance with NCAA rules, the institutions’ official uniform (including warm-ups) and all other items of apparel (socks, head bands, t-shirts, wrist bands, towels, etc.) should bear only a single manufacturer’s or distributors normal label or trademark. The label or trademark may not exceed 2 1/4 inches square in size. Equipment (i.e., shoes) may bear only the manufacturer’s normal label or trademark as it is used on all such items for sale to the general public. Failure to comply with this regulation may cause disqualification or may jeopardize a student-athlete’s eligibility.


athletes to the Conference compliance administrator no later than three (3) days prior to the start of the tournament. The list will be compared to previously submitted Squad Lists and the Conference office will notify an institution if a problem arises with any of its student-athletes. Student-athletes not deemed eligible to compete may not be in uniform during the Conference tournament.

7.6 Head Coaches Meeting: A Southern Conference head coaches meeting will be held at the tournament

site prior to the start of competition. The Wrestling Committee Chair will direct the meeting and review information pertinent to the tournament. The head coach of each institution is required to attend this meeting. Head coaches who do not attend the meeting are subject to disciplinary action as imposed by the Wrestling Committee and enforced by the Commissioner.


A. All rounds of the tournament shall not begin prior to announced times; B. The mat area shall be available for all teams to utilize for warm-ups at least one hour prior

to the start of competition; C. A national anthem shall be played prior to the start of competition.

7.7.1 Player Introductions: Pre-match introductions for the tournament shall be as follows:

A. For all rounds of the tournament except the finals, the pre-match introductions of competitors shall take place prior to each individual match;

B. For the finals, pre-match introductions of all competitors will take place prior to the start of the round.

7.8 Squad Size Restrictions: Travel squads to the tournament are limited to 16 institutional

representatives with no more than 13 student-athletes in uniform. A student-athlete will need a valid participant credential to enter the tournament venue. Coaches, trainers, managers and student-athletes not in uniform will need to display a visible participant credential to be allowed in the tournament venue or near the mat area during competition.

7.9 Skin Checks: All participants will be examined by a physician or certified athletic trainer for

communicable skin diseases immediately prior to weighing in for the tournament. A dermatologist shall be required to be on-site for the conduct of skin checks for reference purposes. Failure of a participant to receive a skin check during the designated time will result in disqualification. The physician or certified athletic trainer will report the results of all examinations to the tournament director or Southern Conference staff liaison, which will then be responsible for the administrative enforcement of the medical recommendation if it involves disqualification from the tournament. It is recommended that the

191

skin over the entire body be examined before participation. Open wounds and infectious skin conditions that cannot adequately be protected should be considered cause for disqualification. Recommended tournament guidelines for disposition of skin infections can be found in the NCAA Wrestling Championships Handbook. Categories of such skin conditions and examples include:

A. Bacterial skin infections (impetigo, erysipelas, carbuncle, generalized folliculitis, hidradenitis suppurative):

B. Parasitic skin infections (pediculosis, scabies); C. Viral skin infections (herpes simplex, herpes zoster, molluscum contagiosum); D. Fungal skin infections (tinea corporis).

7.9.1 Skin Check Procedures: The following procedures shall be observed during skin checks:

A. Male student-athletes shall wear shorts and female student-athletes shall wear shorts and a sports bra during examinations;

B. Skin checks will precede official weigh-ins; C. All weight groups (including wrestlers who may not weigh in) will be examined.

Wrestlers will be examined by weight groups beginning with the 125-pound class. All 125-pound wrestlers will be examined before the 133-pound class.

7.10 Weigh-In Policies: The following procedures shall be observed during weigh-ins.

A. Weigh-Ins will take place two hours prior to the start of the championship. (Revised 9/08) B. Each wrestler who plans to participate in the Southern Conference Wrestling Tournament

must weigh in at or under his or her weight class. At the scheduled time for weigh-ins, all activities that promote dehydration must cease and all student-athletes who wish to compete must present themselves at the scales;

C. Two digital scales will be utilized for weigh-ins. Weigh-ins for 125 lbs through 157 lbs will take place on Scale 1. Weigh-ins for 165 lbs through 285 lbs will take place on Scale 2. Weigh-ins at each scale will take place by weight class with the 125 lbs and 165 lbs wrestlers going first. If a contestant fails to make weight on one of the designated scales, the contestant may step on each additional scale one time in an attempt to make weight immediately following the conclusion of the final weight class on that scale at the conclusion of the 157 lbs and 285 lbs weigh-ins. The contestant shall not leave the weigh-in area during this time;

D. A wrestler choosing to step onto a second scale after not making weight on the first scale shall do so immediately after all wrestlers scheduled to weigh in on that scale have finished at the conclusion of the 157 lbs and 285 lbs weigh-ins. A wrestler must attempt weight immediately or be declared ineligible for the attempted weight class;

E. All wrestlers will weigh-in with their weight class. Wrestlers may not defer their initial opportunity to weigh in;

F. When a weight class is called, the appropriate wrestlers will line up for weigh-in. Each wrestler will then hand the official at each scale in charge of weigh-in a picture ID before stepping on the scale. Should a wrestler forget his ID, two opposing coaches must verify his identity;

G. All wrestlers should weigh-in with shorts. Wrestlers will step on their appointed scale backwards and remain still until released by the weigh-in official.

H. Scales shall be available at the tournament site for use by competing teams no later than 2 p.m. the day prior to the championships.

7.11 Media Policies: All coaches and student-athletes shall be available for interviews with the media.

Student-athletes shall be required to speak with the media following a 10-minute “cooling off” period after the completion of their final individual competition of the tournament. Coaches shall be required to speak with the media following a 10-minute “cooling off” period after their team’s final competition of the tournament.


entered the dressing room or left the mat area following a match. The cooling off period will not be extended to allow coaches or players to do interviews with a broadcasting television network. In the event that these interviews take place, the cooling off period will begin when the majority of a team’s players and coaches have entered the dressing room or left the mat area.

192

7.11.2 Dressing Rooms: The dressing rooms of teams competing in the Southern Conference Tournament will be considered closed unless a media member states a desire to enter the dressing room area prior to the conclusion of a match. This request must be made to the tournament media coordinator or the sports information director of the participating team.

7.12 Officials Responsibilities: Officials and their duties are outlined in the NCAA Wrestling Rules. 7.13 True Place Matches: True place matches may be needed in the event that a weight class is allocated

more than one automatic qualifier by the NCAA prior to the Conference Championship. True place matches will be wrestled in the event that the two wrestlers have not wrestled earlier in the tournament. (e.g., the 2nd place wrestler has not wrestled the 3rd place wrestler in the tournament). True place matches will not be wrestled if the two have met previously in the tournament. In this instance the prior result will be used to determine the “true place” regardless of which wrestler placed higher in the tournament. (Approved 10/11) 7.13.1 Scheduling of True Place Matches: True place matches normally take place after the

heavyweight finals (in weight class order). The true place match will be scheduled so that no contestant shall wrestle with less than 45 minutes of rest between matches. This ensures that all wrestlers have an adequate recovery period. (Approved 10/11)


8.1 Awards Ceremonies: Immediately following the conclusion of each weight class final, an awards ceremony shall be held at the awards presentation area. An awards ceremony will also be held at the conclusion of the tournament. The following awards shall be provided by the Conference office and distributed at the various awards ceremonies:



team; 8.1.3 Third Place Finisher Plaques: Plaques shall be presented to each individual finishing in third

place in a weight class; 8.1.4 Second Place Finisher Plaques: Plaques shall be presented to each individual finishing in

second place in a weight class; 8.1.5 First Place Finisher Plaques: Plaques shall be presented to each individual finishing in first

place in a weight class; 8.1.6 Most Outstanding Wrestler Plaque: One plaque shall be presented to the wrestler selected as

the Most Outstanding Wrestler of the tournament. The Most Outstanding Wrestler shall be selected by the head coaches at the tournament site. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office. Coaches are not allowed to vote for their own student-athletes;

8.1.7 Coach of the Year Plaque: One plaque shall be presented to the person selected as the Coach

of the Year. The Coach of the Year shall be selected by the head coaches at the tournament site. The voting shall be conducted by the Conference office.


as follows: 8.2.1 Individual Championship Team Plaques: Thirteen (13) individual plaques will be presented to

the head coach of the championship team for presentation to the student-athletes of the championship team. These plaques will be presented at the head coach’s discretion.



the Southern Conference Tournament, provided that VIP functions are conducted. These passes shall

193

be provided in a number as approved by the Wrestling Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director.


Southern Conference Tournament. These passes shall be provided in a number as approved by the Wrestling Committee. The passes may be distributed at the discretion of each school’s athletics director.



194

Index General Information Administrative Standing Committees ............................................................................................... 7 Coordinators of Officials ................................................................................................................... 8 Duties of Staff ................................................................................................................................. 12 Game Management Principles ....................................................................................................... 11 Officers and Staff ............................................................................................................................. 5 Participant Principles ...................................................................................................................... 10 Spectator Code of Conduct .............................................................................................................. 9 Sport Committees ............................................................................................................................ 8 Waivers .......................................................................................................................................... 13 Constitution Effective Date ................................................................................................................................. 19 Governance .................................................................................................................................... 17 Governing body; Officers; Committees; Commissioner

Legislative Process ........................................................................................................................ 18 Meetings; Amendments

Membership ................................................................................................................................... 18 New members; Suspension/Expulsion; Obligations

Organization ................................................................................................................................... 18 Composition, Duties and Responsibilities

Principles of Conduct ..................................................................................................................... 17 Institutional Control; Ethical Conduct

Purpose .......................................................................................................................................... 17 Bylaws Administration ................................................................................................................................ 24 Commissioner; Commissioner’s staff

Amendment to Bylaws ................................................................................................................... 33 Proposal; Submission; Circulation; Amendment to Amendment; Effective date

Athletics Directors Association ....................................................................................................... 23 Composition, Duties and Responsibilities

Awards, Academic ......................................................................................................................... 28 Barrett/Bonner; Graduation Rate; Honor Roll; Academic All-Conference; Commissioner’s Medal

Awards, Athletic ............................................................................................................................. 29 Germann Cup; Commissioner’s Cup; Trophies

Awards, Graduate Scholarships .................................................................................................... 29 Description of program

Commissioner ................................................................................................................................ 25 Duties and Responsibilities; Staff

Competition .................................................................................................................................... 27 Required varsity sports; Regular season/tournament competition; Post season competition; Transition exception

Eligibility Requirements .................................................................................................................. 27 Academic requirements; Transfer requirement

Executive Committee ..................................................................................................................... 20 Composition, Duties and Responsibilities

Finances, Conference .................................................................................................................... 30 Budget Process; Revenues; Expenses; Operating Fund; Audit; Revenue Sharing; Annual Funding

Finances, Investment ..................................................................................................................... 32

195

Investment Responsibility; Investment Strategy

Governance .................................................................................................................................... 20 Council of Presidents; Executive Committee; Conference Officers; Conference Meetings

Meetings ......................................................................................................................................... 21 Order of Business

Meetings, Conference .................................................................................................................... 33 Dates; Executive/Special/Combined Sessions; Voting; Quorum

Members ........................................................................................................................................ 25 New Members; Associate Members; Admission Procedure

Organization ................................................................................................................................... 22 Standing/Sport Committees; Associations-AD, SWA, Coaches, SAAC

Saving Clause ................................................................................................................................ 34 Implied Powers and Authority; Correctable Errors Senior Woman Administrators Association .................................................................................... 24 Composition, Duties and Responsibilities

Student-Athlete Association ........................................................................................................... 24 Composition, Duties and Responsibilities

Television ....................................................................................................................................... 33 Property Rights; Syndicator; Revenue

Administrative Regulations Amendment of the Administrative Regulations .............................................................................. 39 Proposal; Submission; Effective date; Amendment to Amendment

Conference Tournaments .............................................................................................................. 39 Participation; NCAA Eligibility; Date exclusivity

National Letter of Intent .................................................................................................................. 37 Participation in NLI

Officiating ....................................................................................................................................... 39 Policy on assignments

Protests .......................................................................................................................................... 37 Explanation of policy

Rules Violations ............................................................................................................................. 37 Reporting procedure for in/out of conference violations

Sportsmanship ............................................................................................................................... 37 Responsibility of CEO, AD, Coach; Game ejections; Unsportsmanlike behavior; Awards

Tie-Breaker Policy .......................................................................................................................... 39 Explanation of procedure

Sport Regulations Baseball.......................................................................................................................................... 43 Men’s Basketball ............................................................................................................................ 55 Women’s Basketball ....................................................................................................................... 67 Cross Country ................................................................................................................................ 79 Football ........................................................................................................................................... 87 Men’s Golf ...................................................................................................................................... 95 Women’s Golf ............................................................................................................................... 105 Men’s Soccer ............................................................................................................................... 115 Women’s Soccer .......................................................................................................................... 127 Softball ......................................................................................................................................... 139 Tennis ........................................................................................................................................... 151 Track & Field ................................................................................................................................ 163 Volleyball ...................................................................................................................................... 175 Wrestling ...................................................................................................................................... 187

southern conference manual · southern conference manual 2013-14 . 1 ... darcie vincent,...

Documents